Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Pdf Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

11th Bio Botany Guide Plant Growth and Development Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part – I.

Question 1.
Select the wrong statement from the following:
(a) Formative phase of the cells retain the capability of cell division.
(b) In elongation phase development of central vacuole takes place.
(c) In maturation phase thickening and differentiation takes place.
(d) In maturation phase, the cells grow further.
Answer:
(d) In maturation phase, the cells grow further.

Question 2.
If the diameter of the pulley is 6 inches, length of pointer is 10 inches and distance travelled by pointer is 5 inches. Calculate the actual growth in length of plant.
a) 3 inches
b) 6 inches
c) 12 inches
d) 30 inches
Answer:
options are wrong, (correct Ans = 1.5 inches)
Solution:
Step I:
Diameter of the Pulley=6 inches
Radius of the pulley \(=\frac{6}{2}\)= 3 inches
Actual growth in length= Distance travailed by pointer x Radius of the pulley Length of the pointer
=\(\frac{5 \times 3}{10}\) =1.5=1.5.
Answer:
1.5 inches

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 3.
In unisexual plants, sex can changed by the application of
a) Ethanol
b) Cytokinins
c) ABA
d) Auxin
Answer:
c) ABA

Question 4.
Select the correctly matched one
A) Humanurine i) Auxin-B
B) Corn gram oil ii) GA3
C) Fungs iii) Abscisic acid II
D) Herring fish sperm iv) Kinetin
E) Unripcrnaizegrains v) AuxinA
F) Young cotton boils vi) Zeatin

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 1
Answer:
b) A – v, B – i, C – ii, D – iv, E – vi, F – iii

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 5.
Seed dormancy allows the plants to:
(a) overcome unfavorable climatic conditions
(b) develop healthy seeds
(c) reduce viability
(d) prevent deterioration of seeds
Answer:
(a) overcome unfavorable climatic conditions

Question 6.
What are the parameters used to measure growth of plants?
Answer:
Growth in plants can be measured in terms, of

  • Increase in length or girth (roots and stems)
  • Increase in fresh or dry weight
  • Increase in area or volume (fruits and leaves)
  • Increase in a number of cells produced.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 7.
What is plasticity?
Answer:
Plasticity refers to the environmental heterophylly seen in Butter cup plant (Ranunculus). In this aquatic plant, the leaves in the air is normal, where as the leaves submerged underwater are highly thin and hairy highly adapted to do carbon assimilation Developmental heterophlly seen in the juvenile plant leaves of cotton and corianter. Where the young leaves have a different shape from the mature leaves is not considered as plasticity.

Question 8.
Write the physiological effects of Cytokinins.
Answer:

  1. Cytokinin promotes cell division in the presence of auxin (IAA).
  2. Induces cell enlargement associated with IAA and gibberellins
  3. Cytokinin can break the dormancy of certain light-sensitive seeds like tobacco and induces seed germination.
  4. Cytokinin promotes the growth of lateral bud in the presence of apical bud.
  5. Application of cytokinin delays the process of aging by nutrient mobilization. It is known as the Richmond Lang effect.
  6. Cytokinin:
    • increases rate protein synthesis
    • induces the formation of inter-fascicular cambium
    • overcomes apical dominance
    • induces the formation of new leaves, chloroplast and lateral shoots.
  7. Plants accumulate solutes very actively with the help of cytokinins.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 9.
Describe the mechanism of photoperiodic induction of flowering.
Answer:
Mechanism of photoperiodic induction of flowering.

  • The physiological change on flowering due to the relative length of light and darkness (photoperiod) is called Photoperiodism.
  • The photoperiod required to induce flowering is called critical day length. Eg. 12 hours in Maryland Mammoth’s Tobacco Xanthium 15.05 hours.

Photoperiodic induction:

  • An appropriate photoperiod in 24 hours cycle constitutes one inductive cycle. Plants may require one or more inductive cycles for flowering.
  • The phenomenon of conversion of leaf primordia into flower primordia under the influence of suitable inductive cycles is called photoperiodic induction. Example: Xanthium (SDP) -1 inductive cycle and Plantago (LDP) -25 inductive cycles.

Site of photoconductive perception:

  • Leaves are the parts that receive photoperiodic stimulus (PPS), again it is only leaves that synthesize floral hormones and translocate them to the apical tip to promote flowering.
  • This can be demonstrated by experiments conducted in the Cocklebur plant. Which is an SD plant. The nature of flower-producing stimulus has been elusive so far. It is believed by physiologists that a hormone is responsible for it, Chailakyan (1936) named it as Florigen It is not possible to isolate it.
Procedure Observation Inference
1. Take potted plant A and defoliate the plant subject it to SD – a condition There is no induction of flowering No leaf to receive stimulus or induction of flowering
2.  Take potted plant B – and defoliate all, except one leaf subject it to SD – condition. There is the induction of flowering One leaf is enough to receive stimulus or induction of flowering.
3.  Take potted plant C – and defoliate it and subject it to LD condition There is no induction of flowering no leaf to receive stimulus or induction of flowering
4. Take potted plant D and subject all leaves to LD but one leaf to SD There is the induction of flowering One leaf is enough to receive an induction in the SD condition

Question 10.
Give a brief account of programmed cell death (PCD).
Answer:
Senescence is controlled by plants’ own genetic program and the death of the plant or plants part consequent to senescence is called Programmed Cell Death. In short senescence of an individual cell is called PCD. The proteolytic enzymes involving PCD in plants are phytases and in animals are caspases. The nutrients and other substrates from senescing cells and tissues are remobilized and reallocated to other parts of the plant that survives.

The protoplasts of developing xylem vessels and tracheids die and disappear at maturity to make them functionally efficient to conduct water for transport. In aquatic plants, aerenchyma is normally formed in different parts of the plant such as roots and stems which enclose large air spaces that are created through PCD. In the development of unisexual flowers, male and female flowers are present in earlier stages, but only one of these two completes its development while the other aborts through PCD.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 2

Part-II.

11th Bio Botany Guide Plant Growth and Development Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
The open form of the growth occurs in:
(a) leaves and flowers
(b) stem and root
(c) leaves and stem
(d) stem and flowers
Answer:
(b) stem and root

Question 2.
An example of a De-Differentiating cell is ………………
a) Tracheary element
b) shoot apex
c) Cork cambium
d) root apex
Answer:
c) Cork cambium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 3.
Primary growth of the plant is due to the activity of:
(a) phloem parenchyma
(b) phloem meristem
(c) vascular cambium
(d) apical meristem
Answer:
(d) apical meristem

Question 4
Choose the natural Auxin of the following
a) Anti Auxin
b) NAA
c) 2.4.D
d) IndoleAcetic Acid (IAA)
Answer:
d) Indole Acetic Acid (IAA)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 5.
Thickening and differentiation of cells take place during:
(a) elongation phase
(b) formative phase
(c) maturation phase
(d) flowering phase
Answer:
(c) maturation phase

Question 6.
The hormone present in Coconut milk is
a) Gibberellins
b) Ethylene
c) Cytokinin
d) Auxin
Answer:
c) Cytokinin

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 7.
The total growth of the plant consists of four phases in the following order.
(a) Log phase, lag phase, decelerating phase and maturation phase
(b) Log phase, lag phase, maturation phase and decelerating phase
(c) Lag phase, log phase, maturation phase and decelerating phase
(d) Lag phase, log phase, decelerating phase and maturation phase
Answer:
(d) Lag phase, log phase, decelerating phase and maturation phase

Question 8.
Which of the following Phytóhormone does not occur naturally in plants?
a) 2. 4. D
b) GibberellicAcid
c) 6. Furfuryl amino purine
d) IAA
Answer:
a) 2.4.D

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 9.
Absence of light may lead to the yellowish color in plants and this is called:
(a) venation
(b) etiolation
(c) estivation
(d) vernation
Answer:
(b) etiolation

Question 10.
Apical dominance is caused when Auxin
a) Concentration is more than Cytokinins
b) Concentration is less than Cytokinins
c) and Cytokinin concentration are equal
d) and Cytokinin concentration are fluctuating
Answer:
a) Concentration is more than Cytokinins

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 11.
Indicate a plant growth regulator from the following:
(a) cytocin
(b) cytokinins
(c) acetic acid
(d) methylene
Answer:
(b) cytokinins

Question 12.
Which prevents premature fall of fruit?
a) NAA
b) Ethylene
c) GA3
d) Zeatin
Answer:
a) NAA

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 13.
The activity of synergistic effect involves the activity of:
(a) auxin and gibberellins
(b) auxin and ethylene
(c) ABA and gibberellins
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(a) auxin and gibberellins

Question 14.
The term Auxin was coined by
a) Went
b) Darwin
c) Smith
d) Garner
Answer:
a) Went

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 15.
The term auxin was first coined by:
(a) Charles Darwin
(b) Kogl
(c) F.W. Went
(d) Smith
Answer:
(c) F.W. Went

Question 16.
The term Gibberellin was coined by
a) Went
b) Kurosawa
c) Skoog
d) Yabuta
Answer:
d) Yabuta

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 17.
Indicate a synthetic auxin.
(a) Indole Acetic Acid
(b) Phenyl Acetic Acid
(c) Indole Butyric Acid
(d) Naphthalene Acetic Acid
Answer:
(d) Naphthalene Acetic Acid

Question 18.
The mineral required for the synthesis of IAA is
a) Copper
b) Magnesium
c) Zinc
d) Boron
Answer:
c) Zinc

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 19.
Auxin stimulates:
(a) transpiration
(b) respiration
(c) flowering
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) respiration

Question 20.
The most widely occurring Cytokinin in plants is
a) ABA
b) NAA
c) TNT
d) IPA
Answer:
d) IPA

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 21.
Who established the structure of gibberellic acid?
(a) Brain etal
(b) Kurosawa
(c) Cross et al
(d) Yabuta and Sumiki
Answer:
(c) Cross etal

Question 22.
The term Florigen was coined by
a) Maheswari
b) Chailakyan
c) R Gane
d) Richmond Lang
Answer:
b) Chailakyan

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 23.
Cytokinins inducing cell division was first demonstrated by:
(a) Haberlandt
(b) Charles Darwin
(c) Clarke
(d) Hubert
Answer:
(a) Haberlandt

Question 24.
Which of the following is a bioassay for Cytokinins?
a) Chlorophyll preservation test
b) Dwarf maize Assay
c) Seed germination Assay test
d) Neem cotyledon Assay
Answer:
d) Neem cotyledon Assay

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 25.
Indicate correct statements.
(i) Genes are intracellular factors for growth.
(ii) Temperature has no role in the growth of plant.
(iii) Oxygen has a vital role in the growth of plants.
(iv) CIN ratio of soil does not affect the growth of plant.
(a) (i) and (iv)
(b) (ii) and (iv)
(c) (i) and (iii)
(d) (ii) and (iii)
Answer:
(c) (i) and (iii)

Question 26.
Avena curvature test as a BioAssay for
a) Auxins
b) GA3
c) Cytokinin
d) Ethylene
Answer:
a) Auxins

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 27.
The stress phytohormones (Abscisic acid) was first isolated by:
(a) Linn et al
(b) Addicott et al
(c) Edward et al
(d) Stone and Black
Answer:
(b) Addicott et al

Question 28.
The Gibberellins have been commercially exploited for
a) increasing the size of grapefruits
b) inducing rooting in stem cuttings
c) breaking the dormancy in seeds
d) production of disease-resistant varieties
Answer:
c) breaking the dormancy in seeds

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 29.
Pick out the correct statement from the following:
(i) Abscisic acid is found abundantly inside the chloroplast of green cells.
(ii) ABA is a powerful growth promotor.
(iii) ABA is formed from the pentose phosphate pathway.
(iv) ABA has anti-auxin and anti-gibberellin properties.
(a) (i) and (iv)
(b) (i) and (ii)
(c) (ii) and (iii)
(d) (ii) and (iv)
Answer:
(a) (i) and (iv)

Question 30.
Biennials can be induced to flower in the first season itself by treatment with
a) Auxin
b) Kinetin
c) GA
d) ABA
Answer:
c) GA

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 31.
Pea and barley are classified under:
(a) short-day plants
(b) short long day plants
(c) long day plants
(d) long short day plants
Answer:
(c) long day plants

Question 32.
Auxin a was isolated from human urine by
a) F.W. went
b) Charles Darwin
c) Kogl and Haugen Smith
d) Denny
Answer:
c) Kogl and Haugen smith

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 33.
Usually, Xanthiumpensylvanicum will flower under:
(a) long day condition
(b) short long day condition
(c) photo neutral condition
(d) short-day condition
Answer:
(d) short-day condition

Question 34.
The most widely occurring Cytokinin in plants is
a) Indole Acetic Acid (LAA)
b) Indole Butyric Acid (IBA)
c) Pentenyl Adenine (IPA)
d) Naphthalene  Acetic Acid (NAA)
Answer:
c) Pentenyl Adenine (IPA)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 35.
Who found out the phytochrome in plants?
(a) Butler et al
(b) Michell et al
(c) Boumick et al
(d) Gamers and Allard
Answer:
(a) Butler et al

Question 36.
Scientists, those who are connected with Ethylene
(I) Denny
(II) R. Gane
(III) Kurosawa
(IV) Cocken
Options:
a) (I) (II) & (III)
b) (II) (III) & (IV)
c) (I) (II) & (IV)
d) (I) (III) & (IV)
Answer:
c) (I)(II)& (IV)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 37.
Pick out the wrong statement from the following:
(a) Vernalization increases the cold resistance of plants
(b) It increases the resistance of plants to fungal disease
(c) Vemalizatiqn increase the vegetative period of the plant
(d) It accelerates the plant breeding
Answer:
(c) Vemalizatiqn increase the vegetative period of the plant

Question 38.
Day-neutral plants are
a) Sugarcane & Coleus
b) Bryophyllum& Night Jasmine
c) Wheat, rice & Oats.
d) Potato, Tomato & Cotton
Answer:
d) Potato, Tomato & Cotton

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 39.
In apple and plum, the method of breaking seed dormancy involves the process of:
(a) impaction
(b) Scarification
(c) exposing to red light
(d) Stratification
Answer:
(d) Stratification

Question 40.
Xanthium (Cocklebur) requires …………….. hours of light to induce flowering,
a) 12
b) 9
c) 15.05
d) 13.05
Answer:
c) 15.05

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 41.
The hormone that cannot be isolated
a) IAA
b) ABA
c) NAA
d) Florigen
Answer:
d) Florigen

Question 42.
The term Photoperiodism was coined by
a) Went
b) Butler
c) Gamer
d) Skoog
Answer:
c) Garner

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 43.
ABA acts as antagonistic to
a) Ethylene
b) Cytokinin
c) Gibberellic acid
d) IAA
Answer:
c) Gibberellic acid

Question 44.
If a short-day plant, flowering is induced by
a) Long nights
b) Photo periods less than 12 hrs
c) Photoperiods shorter than critical value and uninterrupted long night
d) Short photoperiods and interrupted long nights
Answer:
c) Photoperiods shorter than critical value and uninterrupted long night.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 45.
Phytochrome is
a) Reddish phytohormone
b) Bluish biliprotein pigment
c) Photoreceptor of apical bud
d) Unstable pigment molecule
Answer:
b) Bluish biliprotein pigment

Question 46.
The growth & ripening is induced by Ethylene in
a) Tropical fruits
b) Temperate fruits
c) Climacteric fruits
d) Nonclimacteric fruits
Answer:
c) Climacteric fruits

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 47.
The bioassay of ABA was done with
a) Rice
b) Wheat
c) Maize
d) Barley
Answer:
a) Rice

Question 48.
Four types of senescence were recognized by
a) Leopold
b) Gamer
c) Addicott
d) Cocken et al
Answer:
a) Leopold

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 49.
The final stage of senescence is
a) PCD
b) Scarification
c) Yellowing
d) Abscission
Answer:
d) Abscission

Question 50.
Match & Find out the Correct Answer

Column I Column II
1.  Yabuta&Sumiki a) Identified Ethylene
2.  Lethan & Miller b) Isolated Auxin from Human urine
3.  Cockenetal c) Isolated and identified Zeatin
4.  Kogi & Haugen Smith d) Isolated Gibberellin in Crystal form

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 3
Answer:
b) D C A B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 51.
Match the following and Find the Correct Answer

I. Auxin a) Bolting
II. ABA b) Induces Respiration
III. Gibberellin c) Cell division
IV. Ethylene d) Weedicide
V. Cytokinin e) Closure of stomata

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 4
Answer:
b) D E A B C

II. Assertion (A) & Reason (R)

Question 52.
a. Both A & R are true and ‘R’ is the correct explanation of A
b. Both A & R are true but ‘R’ is not the correct explanation of A
c. A is true but R is False
d. Both A and ‘R’ are False
Assertion (A): The shoot Apical meristems are the only source of Auxin synthesis
Reason (R): Dormancy of lateral buds over Apical buds is due to Auxin
Answer:
C. A is true but R is False

Question 53.
Assertion (A): Hormones are also called Growth regulator
Reason (R): Hormones promote or inhibit plant growth
Answer:
A. Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true and Reason is the correct explanation of Assertion.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 54.
Assertion (A): In many land Mammoth flowering occurred at different times at different latitude
Reason (R): Many land Mammoth is a tobacco variety
Answer:
b. Both Assertion (A) and, Reason (R) are true and Reason is not the correct explanation of Assertion.

III. 2 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Define closed form of growth in plants.
Answer:
Leaves, flowers, and fruits are limited in growth or of determinate or closed-form growth.

Question 2.
Compare between Absolute and Relative growth rates
Answer:

Absolute growth Relative growth
An increase in the total growth of two organs measured and compared per unit time is called Absolute growth rate The growth of the given system per unit time expressed per unit initial parameter is called relative growth rate

Question 3.
Name the phases of growth in ‘S’ shaped growth curve.
Answer:

  • Lag phase
  • Log phase
  • Decelerating phase
  • Maturation phase

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 4.
Mention the phase of growth in plants
Answer:
I. Formative phase
II. Elongation phase
III. Maturation phase

Question 5.
Distinguish between absolute growth rate and relative growth, rate.
Answer:
Absolute growth rate:
An increase in total growth of two organs measured and compared per unit time is called absolute growth rate.

Relative growth rate:
The growth of the given system per unit time expressed per unit initial parameter is called relative growth rate.

Question 6.
What is the Grand period of growth
Answer:
The total period from initial to the final stage of growth is called Grand period of growth.
When plotted against time the growth curve is ‘S’ shaped, (sigma curve) it is also known as Grand Period curie consists of 4 phases

  1. Lag,
  2. Log,
  3. Decelerating,
  4. Maturation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 7.
What is meant by the dedifferentiation of plant cells?
Answer:
Differentiated cells, after multiplication again lose the ability to divide and mature to perform specific functions. This is called redifferentiation, eg: Secondary xylem and Secondary phloem.

Question 8.
Define Phytohormone.
Answer:
The chemical substances synthesized by plants and thus naturally occuring are known as Phytohormones. Eg. Auxin, Gibberellins.
Recently 2 groups – Brassinosteroids, Polyamines were also known to behave like hormones.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 9.
Mention any two synthetic auxins.
Answer:

  • 2, 4 – Dichloro Phenoxy Acetic Acid (2, 4 – D)
  • 2, 4, 5 – Trichloro Phenoxy Acetic Acid (2, 4, 5 – T)

Question 10.
State 3 characteristic features of phytohormones.
Answer:

  1. They are produced in root tips and stem tips and leaves (do not have specialized cells or organs for secretion)
  2. The transfer of hormones takes place through the conducting system (xylem and phloem)
  3. They are required in trace quantities
  4. They either promote, inhibit or modify growth.

Question 11.
Name the natural auxins present in plants.
Answer:

  • Indole Acetic Acid (IAA)
  • Indole Propionic Acid (IPA)
  • Indole Butyric Acid (IBA)
  • Phenyl Acetic Acid (PAA)

Question 12.
Give the historial significance of Agent Orange
Answer:

  • Mixture of two phenoxy herbicides – 2.4. D and 2.4.5 T together known as Agent orange.
  • This Agent orange, was used by USA in Vietnam war as chemical warfare weapon to defoliate forests in Vietnam.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 13.
Does the trimming of plants in gardens have any scientific explanation?
Answer:

  • Yes, trimming of plants removes apical buds and hence apical dominance is prevented the lateral buds sprout and give a beautiful bushy appearance and aesthetic value.
  • Also in tea estates, this trimming develops more lateral branches and more tea leaves thus it has commercial significance.

Question 14.
Where do you find cytokinin hormone in plants?
Answer:
The distribution of cytokinin in plants is not as wide as those of auxin and gibberellins but found mostly in roots. Cytokinins appear to be translocated through xylem.

Question 15.
What is bolting?
Answer:

  • When treated with Gibberellins the rose the plants (genetic dwarf) exhibit excessive internodal growth.
  • This sudden elongation of a stem followed by flowering is called bolting.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 16.
What is Richmond Lang effect?
Answer:
Application of Cytokinin delays the process of aging by nuitrient mobilization.

Question 17.
Why do you call Abscisic acid (ABA) as stress hormone?
Answer:
It inhibits the shoot growth and promotes growth of root system. This character protect the plants from water stress. Hence, ABA is called as stress hormone.

Question 18.
Define photoperiodism & Critical day length.
Answer:

  • The physiological change on flowering due to relative length of light and darkness (Photoperiod) is called
    Photoperiodism.
  • The photoperiod required to induce flowering is called critical day length Eg.
    • Mary land mammoth (tobacco variety) requires 12 hours of light.
    • Cocklebur required 15.05 hours of light.

Question 19.
Write down the importance of photoperiodism in plants.
Answer:

  • The knowledge of photoperiodism plays an important role in hybridisation experiments.
  • Photoperiodism is an excellent example of physiological pre-conditioning that is using an external factor to induce physiological changes in the plant.

Question 20.
What is the importance of photoperiodism?
Answer:

  • The knowledge of photoperiodism an important role in hybridization experiments.
  • It is an excellent example of physiological preconditioning that is using an external factor to induce physiological changes in the plant.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 21.
What is meant by Epigeal germination?
Answer:
During epigeal germination, cotyledons are pushed out of the soil. This happens due to the elongation of the hypocotyl.
Eg: Castor and Bean.

Question 22.
Define Vernalization.
Answer:

  • It is a process by which many annuals and biennials are induced to flower when subjected to low-temperature exposure.
  • T.d. Lysenko first used the term.

Question 23.
Define the term phytogerontology.
Answer:
The branch of botany which deals with ageing, abscission and senescence is called Phytogerontology.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 24.
Distinguish between Epigeal and Hypogeal germination.
Answer:

Epigeal Hypogeal
Cotyledons pussed out of the soil Cotyledons remain below the soil due to rapid elongation of epicotyls.
Happens due to the elongation of the hypocotyl Eg. Castor & Bean Eg. Maize

Question 25.
Define seed dormancy and what are its types.
Answer:
The condition of a seed when it fails to germinate even in suitable environmental condition is called seed dormancy.
There are two types
(I) Innate dormancy (II) Imposed dormancy.

Question 26.
What is Scarification?
Answer:

  • By mechanical and chemical treatments like cutting or chipping of hard tough sed coat and use of organic solvents to remove waxy or fatty compounds are called scarification.
  • It is a method of breaking dormancy of the seeds.

Question 27.
Distinguish between Re differentiation and Devernalization.
Answer:

Redifferentiation Devernalization
Differentiated cells after multiplication again lose the ability to divide and mature to perform specific functions, is called Re differentiation.
Eg. Sec.Xylem & Sec.
Phloem The reversal of the effect of vernalization is called Devemalization.

Question 28.
Define Senescence.
Answer:

  • Ageing or getting old is called senescence.
  • It refers to all collective, progressive and deteriorative processes which ultimately lead to complete loss of organization and function (Eg. leaves turn yellow and fall off from plant).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 29.
What is impaction in seed dormancy.
Answer:

  • In some seeds water and oxygen are unable to penetrate micropyle due to blockage by cork cells.
  • These seeds are shaken vigorously to remove the plug
  • The process of removing the plug or block is called impactation.

Question 30.
What is called stratification in seed dormancy?
Answer:

  • The break dormancy, some plant seeds have to be exposed to well aerated, moist conditions under low temperature (0°c to 10°c) for weeks to months.
  • This kind of seed dormancy breaking treatment is known as stratification.
  • The stratified soil layers should be given a low-temperature treatment for a certain period so as to induce germination.
  • Eg. the Seeds of Rosaceae plants Apple, Plum, Peach, etc.

Question 31.
What are the 4 types of Senescence?
Answer:
Leopold (1961) explained 4 types they are

  1. Overall senescence
  2. Top senescence
  3. Deciduous senescence
  4. Progressive senescence.

Question 32.
What is the Abscission layer or Abscission Zone?
Answer:
Abscission is marked internally at the place of petiole by a distance zone of few layers of thin-walled cells arranged transversely. This zone is called Abscission Zone, which leads to Abscission of the leaf.

Question 33.
The photoperiodic response will not be possible in a defoliated plant. Give scientific reasons.
Answer:
Yes, a defoliated plant will not respond to photoperiodic change because the hormonal substance responsible for flowering is present in the leaves of the plant.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 34.
What is gas chromatography?
Answer:

  • It is a bioassay technique by which Ethylene can be measured.
  • It helps in the detection of the exact amount of ethylene from different plant tissues like lemon and orange.

Question 35.
Give the occurrence and precursors of Gibberellins and Cytokinins.
Answer:

Character Gibberellins Cytokinin
Occurrence Produced by plant parts like an embryo, roots, and young leaves near the tip. Immature seeds are rich in Gibberellins. Formed in root apex shoot apex like Auxin. Also formed in buds & young fruits.
Precursor Formed by 5C precursor, Iso prenoidunit called Iso Pentenyl Pyrophosphate (IPP) through a number of intermediates primary precursor – Acetate. Derived from purine-Adenine.

IV. 3 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Explain Arithmetic growth rate and Geometric growth rate by diagrams.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 6

Question 2.
Explain stages in growth by drawing the sigmoid curve.
Answer:

  • The total period from the initial to the final stage of growth is called the Grand period of growth.
  • The graph that is drawn by taking time and rate of growth is ‘S’ shaped. It is known as a sigmoid curve.

It has 4 stages:

  1. Lag phase
  2. Log phase
  3. Decelerating phase
  4. Maturation phase

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 7

Question 3.
Mention the internal factors, that affect the growth of plants.
Answer:

  • Genes are intracellular factors for growth.
  • Phytohormones are intracellular factors for growth, eg: auxin, gibberellin, cytokinin.
  • C/N ratio.

Question 4.
Mention the Agricultural role of Auxin.
Answer:

  • Eradicate weeds: Eg. 2.4 D and 2.4.5.7
  • Formation of seedless fruits: (Parthenocarpic fruits) Eg. Synthetic Auxin.
  • Break dormancy.
  • Induction of flowering: In pineapple NAA induce flowering
  • Increase the number of female flowers: Eg. Cucurbita.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 5.
List out the agricultural applications of auxins.
Answer:

  • It is used to eradicate weeds, eg: 2,4 – D and 2,4,5 – T.
  • Synthetic auxins are used in the formation of seedless fruits (Parthenocarpic fruit).
  • It is used to break the dormancy in seeds.
  • Induce flowering in Pineapple by NAA & 2,4 – D.
  • Increase the number of female flowers and fruits in cucurbits.

Question 6.
What are the Precursors of Gibberellins?
Answer:

  • Gibberellins are chemically related to terpenoids (natural rubber, Carotenoids, and steroids) formed by 5-C precursors and an Isoprenoid unit called Iso Pentenyl Pyrophosphate (IPP) through a number of intermediates.
  • The primary precursors are Acetate.

Question 7.
What are the uses of ethylene in agriculture?
Answer:

  • Ethylene normally reduces flowering in plants except in Pineapple and Mango.
  • It increases the number of female flowers and decreases the number of male flowers.
  • Ethylene spray in the cucumber crop produces female flowers and increases the yield.

Question 8.
Explain the mechanism of Vernalization by Hypothesis of hormonal involvement.
Answer:
I. Vernalization: According to Purvis

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 8

 

 

 

 

II. Devernalization
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 9

 

 

Question 9.
What are the practical applications of Vernalization?
Answer:

  • It shortens the vegetative period and induces the plant to flower earlier.
  • It increases the cold resistance of the plants.
  • It increases the resistance of plants to fungal disease.
  • Plant breeding can be accelerated.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 10.
What is meant by the viability of seeds?
Answer:

  • Viable means the living condition of the seed
  • The shelf life of the seed after which it cannot germinate is known as the viable period
  • It varies from plant to plant
Name of the plant Viability
1. Oxalis seeds Few days
2.  Lotus seeds More than 1000 years
3.  Judean Dale palm (Methuselah) More than 2000 years

Question 11.
Differentiate between climacteric and Non-climacteric fruits.
Answer:

Climacteric fruits Non-Climacteric fruits
1.There is a sharp rise in respiration rate near the end of the development of fruit.
2. The ripening on demand can be induced in these fruits by exposing them to normal air conditioning.
3. Epthan secrete Ethylene continuously about 1 ppm of ethylene Eg. Lemon, Apples, Banana, Mango
These fruits cannot be ripened by exposure to ethylene so-known as non-climacteric fruits.
Eg. Grapes, Watermelon orange.

Question 12.
Differentiate between scarification & Stratification in breaking seed dormacy
Answer:

Scarification Stratification
Mechanical and chemical treatment either by cutting, chipping or use of organic solvents to remove waxy or fatty compounds is called scarification. Rosaceous plants (Apple, Plum Peach, and Cherry) will not germinate until they have been exposed to well derated, moist conditions under low temperature (1°c to 10°c) for weeks to months and this treatment is known as stratification.

Question 13.
Mention the factors causing dormancy of seeds.
Answer:

  • Hard, tough seed coat causes barrier effect as impermeability of water, gas and restriction of the expansion of embryo prevents seed germination.
  • Many species of seeds produce imperfectly developed embryos called rudimentary embryos which promotes dormancy.
  • Lack of specific light requirement leads to seed dormancy.
  • A range of temperatures either higher or lower cause dormancy.
  • The presence of inhibitors like phenolic compounds which inhibits seed germination cause dormancy.

Question 14.
What are the factors that affect senescence?
Answer:

Name of the factor Effect of senescence
ABA & Ethylene Accelerates
Auxin & Cytokinin Nitrogen deficiency reduces increases
Nitrogen supply retards
High temperature in vernalized seeds Accelerates
Low temperature Retards
Water stress Accumulation of ABA leading to senescence

Question 15.
What are the morphological and Anatomical changes due to Abscission?
Answer:

  • Abscission Zone: formed at the base of petiole
  • Greenish grey in colour by rows of 2 to 15 cells thick primary wall and middle lamella
  • The dissolution of by pectinase & Cellulase
  • Formation tyloses – that block conduction of vessels
  • Degradation of chlorophyll – Colour of leaves changes and leaves fall off.
  • After Abscission – Suberization of outer layer of cells by the development of periderm.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 16.
Write down the significance of Abscission.
Answer:
1. Abscission separates dead parts of the plant like old leaves and ripe fruits.
2. Helps in dispersal of fruits and continuing the life cycle.
3. Abscission of leaves (in deciduous plants) helps in water conservation during summer.
4. Helps in vegetative propagation (Shedding of gemmae or plantlets) Eg. Bryophyta.

V. 5 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Describe an experiment to measure the growth of a plant or By lever Auxanometer measure the rate of growth in stem tip.
Answer:
Experiment:
1. Arc auxanometer:
The increase in the length of the stem tip can easily by measured by an arc auxanometer. If consists of a small pulley to the axis of which is attached a long pointer sliding over a graduated arc. A thread one end of which is tied to the stem tip and another and to a weight passes over the pulley tightly. As soon as the stem tip increases in length, the pulley moves and the pointer slide over the graduated arc (Refer Figure) The reading is taken. The acutal increase in the lengthwm stem is then calculated by knowing the length of the pointer and the radius of the pulley. If the radius of the pulley is 4 inches and the length of pointer 20 inches the actual growth is measured as follows:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 10

Actual growth in length\(=\frac{\text { Distance travelled by the pointer radius of the }}{\text { Length of the pointer }}\)
For example, actual growth in length \(=\frac{10 \times 4 \text { inches }}{20 \text { inches }}\) = 2 inches

Question 2.
Explain the physiological effect of Auxin? Add a note on its agricultural applications.
Answer:
Cell elongation:
Promotes cell elongation in stem & Coleoptile

Root growth:
At extremely low concentration – promote root growth, at high concentrations it inhibits elongation of roots, but induce more lateral roots

Apical dominance:
Suppression of growth of lateral buds – by apical bud is known as Apical dominance
Prevents Abscission

Secondary growth:
Promotion of cell division in the cambium, responsible for secondary growth this property is exploited in tissue culture. (Callus foundation)

Respiration Stimulates respiration Induces Vascular differentiation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 3.
Give the Agricultural application of Auxin.
Answer:
Weedicide
2.4.D & 2.4.5. T – Weedicides to remove weeds

Induce parthenocarpy
Synthetic auxins used to induce parthenocarpy (formation of seedless fruits).

Break dormancy
Used to break seed dormancy.

Induce flowering in Pineapple Eg. NAA & 2.4.D

Induce female flowers (numbers)
Eg. Cucumber.

Question 4.
Explain physiological effects of Gibberellins
Answer:

  • Induction of cell division & cell elongation – Extraordinary stem elongation.
  • Reversal of dwarfism & Bolting – Rosette (genetic dwarfism) plants when treated with Gibberellins exhibit excessive enter nodal growth – This sudden elongation of a stem followed by flowering is called Bolting.
  • Breaks dormancy – in Potato tubers.
  • Biennials flower in the 1 st year – Instead of cold exposure, if biennials treated with Gibberellins flower in the 1st year itself.

Question 5.
Write an essay on the role of ethylene on plant physiology and agriculture.
Answer:
Almost all plant tissues produce ethylene gas in minute quantities.
1. Discovery:
In 1924, Denny found that ethylene stimulates the ripening of lemons. In 1934, R. Gane found that ripe bananas contain abundant ethylene. In 1935, Cocken et al., identified ethylene as a natural plant hormone.

2. Occurrence:
Maximum synthesis occurs during climacteric ripening of fruits and tissues undergoing senescence. It is formed in almost all plant parts like roots, leaves, flowers, fruits and seeds.

3. Transport in plants:
Ethylene can easily diffuse inside the plant through intercellular spaces.

4. Precursor:
It is a derivative of amino acid methionine, linolenic acid and fumaric acid.

5. Bioassay (Gas Chromatography):
Ethylene can be measured by gas chromatography. This technique helps in the detection of exact amount of ethylene from different plant tissues like lemon and orange.

6. Physiological Effects:

  • Ethylene stimulates respiration and ripening in fruits.
  • It stimulates radial growth in sterft and roof and inhibits linear growth.
  • It breaks the dormancy of buds, seeds and storage organs.
  • It stimulates the formation of an abscission zone in leaves, flowers and fruits. This makes the leaves to shed prematurely.
  • Inhibition of stem elongation (shortening the internode).
  • In low concentration, ethylene helps in root initiation.
  • Growth of lateral roots and root hairs. This increases the absorption surface of the plant roots.
  • The growth of fruits is stimulated by ethylene in some plants. It is more marked in climacteric fruits.
  • Ethylene causes epinasty.

7. Agricultural role:

  • Ethylene normally reduces flowering in plants except in Pineapple and Mango.
  • It increases the number of female flowers and decreases the number of male flowers.
  • Ethylene spray in cucumber crops produces female flowers and increases the yield.

Question 6.
Explain the physiological Effects of Cytokinins.
Answer:

  • With IAA – Promotes cell division With IAA & GA – Induces cell enlargement
  • Breaks dormancy of light-sensitive seeds (tobacco) induces seed germination.
  • Promotes growth of lateral
  • buds even in the presence of apical bud.
  • Delays the process of aging by nutrient mobilization known as Richmond Lang effect.
  • Induces rate of protein synthesis.
  • Induces the formation of interfascicular cambium Overcomes apical dominance
  • Induces the formation of new leaves chloroplast and lateral shoots.
  • Induces Accumulation of solutes.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 7.
Write down the physiological effects of Ethylene
Answer:

  • Stimulates respiration and thereby ripening of fruits
  • Stimulates radial growth in stem and root and inhibits linear growth.
  • breaks dormancy of
    1. buds
    2. Seeds
    3. Storage Organs
  • Stimulates abscission 2 one formation in
    1. leaves
    2. flowers
    3. fruits (so leaves shed prematurely)
  • Prevents stem elongation by preventing internodal growth
  • Root growth in low concentration
  • Stimulates growth of lateral roots and root hairs and increase the absorptive surface
  • Ripening of fruits – Increases ripening in climacteric fruits (Mango, banana) etc.
  • It causes epinasty

Question 8.
Describe the methods of breaking the dormancy of seeds in plants.
Answer:
The dormancy of seeds can be broken by different methods. These are:
1. Scarification:
Mechanical and chemical treatments like cutting or chipping of hard tough seed coat and use of organic solvents to remove waxy or fatty compounds are called Scarification.

2. impaction:
in some seeds, water and oxygen are unable to penetrate micropyle due to blockage by cork cells. These seeds are shaken vigorously to remove the plug which is called Impaction.

3. Stratification:
Seeds of rosaceous plants (Apple, Plum, Peach, and Cherry) will not germinate until they have been exposed to well aerated, moist conditions under low temperature (0°C to 10°C) for weeks to months. Such treatment is called Stratification.

4. Alternating temperatures: Germination of some seeds is strongly promoted by alternating daily temperatures. An alternation of low and high temperature improves the germination of seeds.

5. Light:
The dormancy of photoelastic seeds can be broken by exposing them to red light.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 9.
Define photoperiodism – Classify plants based on photoperiodism
Answer:
a. The physiological change on flowering due to the relative length of light and darkness is called photoperiodism.

  • Gamer and Allard (1920) coined the term
  • They studied photoperiodism in Biloxi variety of soybean (Glycine max) and Many land mammoth varieties of tobacco.

b. Depending on photoperiodic responses plants are classified into several types.
1. L.D. Plants (Long Day) The photoperiod required to induce flowering is called critical day length depending on critical day length if it is long (more than 12 hours) and with short nights. Eg. Pea Barley and Oats
Short LD Plants: These are Long day plants but need short day length during the early period of growth for flowering Eg. Wheat, Rye

2. SD Plants: Plants requiring short critical day length for flowering or a long night.
Eg. Tobacco, Cocklebur, Soya, Rice, and Chrysanthemum.
Long SD Plants: Actually SD plants but need long days during the early period of growth for flowering Eg. Some SPS of Bryophyllum & Night Jasmine.

3. Intermediate day plants:
These require a photoperiod between a long day and a short day for flowering Eg. Sugarcane and coleus.

4. Day Neutral plants:
There are a number of plants which can flower in all possible photoperiods, known as photo neutral or hiterterminate plants. Eg. Potato, Rhododendron, Tomato & Cotton.

Question 10.
Describe the role of phytochrome in inducing Flowering
Answer:
Definition:
It is a bluish biliprotein responsible for the perception of light in the photophysiological process, existing in two different forms is mainly involved in flower induction, (i.e) Pr and PFr.

  • Butler et al(1959) named the pigment.
  • It exists in two interconvertible forms
Pr PFr
1. red light absorbing form
2. Absorbs red lgiht of wavelength 660 nm
3. Biologically inactive form & stable found in the diffused state in cytoplasm
4. Promotes flowering in SD plants and inhibits flowering LD plants.
1. Far-red light absorbing form
2. Absorbs far-red light of wavelength 730 nm
3. Biologically active and it is unstable Associated with a hydrophobic area of the membrane system
4. Promotes flowering in LD plants and inhibit flowering in SD plants.

Mechanism:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 14
Other functions:
Play a role in seed germination and changes in membrane conformation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 11.
Write an Essay on Vernalization
Answer:
Definition:

  • Many biennials and perennials are induced to flower by low-temperature exposure (O°c to 5°c) This process is called Vernalization.
  • T.D. Lysenko – Coined the term.

Mechanism of Vernalization:
2 theories explain the mechanism of vernalization.

1. Hypothesis of Phasic development (T.D. Lysenko),
The development of the annual plant has 2 phases.

  1. Thermostate-Vegetatine stage requiring low temperature and suitable moisture.
  2. Photo stage -high temperature needs to synthesize florigen.

2. Hypothesis of hormonal involvement (Purvis 1961)

Vernalization has several steps
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development 15

The technique of Vernalization:

  • Seeds soaked in water
  • Allowed to germinate at 10°C to 12°C
  • Transferred to low temperature for few days to 30 days (3°C to 5°C).
  • Germinated seeds after the low temp, treatment are allowed to dry & then sown.
  • Quickened flowering than untreated (control seedling)

Devernalization:
The reversal of the effect of vernalization is called Devemalization.

  • Practical Applications:
  • Vernalization shortens the vegetative period and induces the plant to flower earlier
  • It increases cold resistance
  • It increases fungal resistance
  • It accelerates Plant Breeding.

Question 12.
Define Senescence and give its types
Answer:
Definition:
Getting old or Ageing is call d senescence in plants.
It refers to all collective, progressive, and deteriorative processes which ultimately lead to complete loss of organization and function.
Types – 4 types (Leopold -1961)

  1. Overall senescence: When the entire plant gets affected and dies – Eg. Annuals – Wheat & Soybeans, Perennials – Agave & Bamboo
  2. Top senescence: Occur in aerial parts only Eg. Parrennials – Banana and Gladiolus
  3. Deciduous senescence: Occur only in leaves Eg. Decidual plants – Elm and Maple
  4. Progressive Senescence: Occur in Annuals occur in old leaves first followed by new leaves than stem and finally root system.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 15 Plant Growth and Development

Question 13.
Explain the physiology of senescence and Factors affecting senescence Physiology of Senescence :
Answer:

  • Change in the structure of cells
  • Vacuoles act like lysosome-secrete hydrolytic enzymes.
  • Reducation in photosynthetic rate (due to loss of chlorophyll & accumulation of anthocyanin)
  • The decrease in Starch content,  Protein content
  • Decrease in …………. r RNA level due to increased activity of enzyme RNA ase
  • Degeneration of DNA – by increased activity of enzyme DNA ase

Factors affecting senescence :

Name of the factor Effect of senescence
ABA & Ethylene Accelerates
Auxin & Cytokinin Nitrogen deficiency reduces increases
Nitrogen supply retards
High temperature in vernalized seeds Accelerates
Low temperature Retards
Water stress Accumulation of ABA leading to senescence

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Pdf Chapter 11 Transport in Plants Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

11th Bio Botany Guide Transport in Plants Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part – I

Question 1.
In a fully turgid cell:
(a) DPD = 10 atm; OP = 5 atm; TP = 10 atm
(b) DPD = 0 atm; OP =10 atm; TP = 10 atm
(c) DPD = 0 atm; OP = 5 atm; TP = 10 atm
(d) DPD = 20 atm; OP = 20 atm; TP = 10 atm
Answer:
(b) DPD = 0 atm; OP =10 atm; TP = 10 atm

Question 2.
Which among the following is correct?
i) apoplast is fastest and operate in nonliving part
ii) Transmembrane route includes vacuole
in) Symplast interconnect the nearby cell through plasma desmata
iv) Symplast and the transmembrane route is in the living part of the cell
a) i and ii
b) ii and iii
c) iii and iv
d) i, ii, iii, iv
Answer:
d) i, ii, iii, iv

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 3.
What type of transpiration is possible in the xerophyte Opuntia?
(a) Stomatal
(b) Lenticular
(c) Cuticular
(d) All the above
Answer:
(b) Lenticular

Question 4.
Stomata of a plant open due to
a) Influx of K+
b) Effrilx of K+
c) Influx of Cl
d) Influx of OH
Answer:
a) Influx of K+

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 5.
Munch hypothesis is based on:
(a) translocation of food due to TP gradient and imbibition force
(b) ranslocation of food due to TP
(c) translocation of food due to imbibition force
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) ranslocation of food due to TP

Question 6.
If the concentration of salt in the soil is too high and the plants may wilt even if the field is thoroughy irrigated. Explain
Answer:
High salt concentration results in high be osmotic potential of the soil solution, so the plant has to use more energy to absorb water. Under extreme salinity conditions, plants may be unable to absorb water and will wilt even if the surrounding soil is thoroughly irrigated. This is also referred to as the osmotic or water deficit effect of salinity.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 7.
How phosphorylase enzyme open the stomata in starch sugar interconversion theory?
Answer:

  • The discovery of enzyme phosphorylase in guard cells by Hanes (1940) greatly supports the starch-sugar interconversion theory.
  • The enzyme phosphorylase hydrolyses starch into sugar and high PH followed and the opening takes place during the night.

Day:

1.Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 1
2. Photosynthesis occur
3. pH – increased
4. Movement of water from
5. subsidiary cells to guard cells
6. Guard cells become turgid
7. Opening of stomata

Night:

1. Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 2

2. No Photosynthesis
3. pH – lowered
4. Movement of water from guard cells
5. Guard cells become flaccid
6. Closure of stomata

Question 8.
List out the non-photosynthetic parts of a plant that need a supply of sucrose?
Answer:
The non-photosynthetic parts of a plant that need a supply of sucrose:

  1. Roots
  2. Tubers
  3. Developing fruits and
  4. Immature leaves.

Question 9.
What are the parameters which control water potential?
Answer:
1. Slatyer and Taylor (1960) introduced the concept of water potential.
Definition – water potential is the potential energy of water in a system – compared to pure water when temperature and pressure are kept constant.

2. It is also a measure of how freely water molecules can move in a particular environment or system. Water potential is denoted by the Greek symbol  Ψ (psi) and measured in Pascal (Pa). At standard temperature, the water potential of pure water is zero

3. Addition of solute to pure water decreases the kinetic energy thereby decreasing the water potential, from zero to negative.

4. So, Comparatively a solution always has low water potential than pure water. In a group of cells with different water potential, a water potential gradient is generated.

5. Water will move from higher water potential to lower water potential.
When potential ( Ψ) can be determined by. Solute concentration or Solute potential ( Ψs) Pressure potential ( Ψp)
By correlating two factors, water potential is written as (Ψws)+Ψp

a) Solute potential (Ψs) or Osmotic potential

  • Denotes the effect of dissolved solute on water potential.
  • In pure water, the addition of solute reduces its free energy and lowers the water potential value from zero to negative.
  • Thus the value of solute potential is always negative. In a solution at standard atmospheric pressure, water potential is always equal to solute potential (Ψw = Ψs ).

b) Pressure Potential (Ψp)

  • Pressure potential is a mechanical force working against the effect of solute potential.
  • Increased pressure potential will increase water potential and water enters cells and cells become turgid.
  • This positive hydrostatic pressure within the cell is called Turgor, pressure likewise, withdrawal of water from the cell decreases the water potential and the cell becomes flaccid.

Question 10.
An artificial cell made of selectively permeable membrane immersed in a beaker (in the figure) Read the values and answer the following questions?
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 3
a) Draw an arrow to indicate the direction of water movement
b) Is the solution outside the cell isotonic, hypotonic or hypertonic?
c) Is the cell isotonic, hypotonic, or hypertonic?
d) Will the cell become more flaccid, more turgid or stay in original size?
e) With reference to artifical cell state, the process is endomosis or exomosis? Give reasons
Answer:
a)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 4
(b) Outside solution in hypotonic.
(c) The cell is hypertonic.
(d) The cell becomes more turgid.
(e) The process is endo – osmosis because the solvent (water) moves inside the cell.

Reason: Endomosis is defined as the osmotic entry of solvent into a cell when it is placed in pure water/Hypotonic solution. The solution in the beaker outside the cell is pure water. ( Ψw = 0), and water enters into the artificial cell which is placed inside the beaker of pure water, (i.e) from hypotonic to hypertonic solution.

Part II 

11th Bio Botany Guide Transport in Plants Additional Important Questions and Answers

I – Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
In plants, cell to cell transport is aided by:
(a) diffusion alone
(b) osmosis alone
(c) imbibition alone
(d) all the three above
Answer:
(d) all the three above

Question 2.
The smell from a lightened incense stick or mosquito coil or open perfume bottle in a closed room is due to
a) Osmosis
b) Facilitated diffusion
c) Simple diffusion
d) imbibition
Answer:
c. Simple diffusion

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 3.
Which of the following statements are correct?
(i) Cell membranes allow water and non-polar molecules to permeate by simple diffusion.
(ii) Polar molecules like amino acids can also diffuse through the membrane.
(iii) Smaller molecules diffuse faster than larger molecules.
(iv) Larger molecules diffuse faster than smaller molecules.

(a) (i) and (iv) only
(b) (i) and (iii) only
(c) (i) and (ii) only
(d) (ii) and (iv) only
Answer:
(b) (i) and (iii) only

Question 4.
Solute potential is also known as
a) Water potential
b) Pressure potential
c) Osmotic potential
d) Maic potential
Answer:
c. Osmotic potential

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 5.
The swelling of dry seeds is due to a phenomenon called:
(a) osmosis
(b) transpiration
(c) imbibition
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(c) imbibition

Question 6.
Cell A has an osmotic potential of -20 bars and a pressure potential of +6 bars. What will be its water potential?
a) -14 bars
b) +14 bars
c) -20 bars
d) +20 bars
Answer:
a. -14 bars

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 7.
The OP and TP of two pairs of cells A – B, and X-Y are under
a) Cell A: OP=-I0atm, TP=4atm
b) Cell B : OP = l0atm, TP = 6atm
c) Cell X: Op =-l0atm, TP = 4atm
d) CeIlY: OP = -Katm, TP = 4atm
The net movement of water shall be from
a) A toB and X to Y
b) A to B and Y toX
c) B to A and X to Y
d) B to A and Y to X
Answer:
d. B to A and Y to X

Question 8.
Water potential is influenced by which of the two factors among the given four
I) Concentration
II) Pressure
III) Temperature
IV) gravity
a) I & II
b) II & III
c) III & IV
d) I & IV
Answer:
a) I & II

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 9.
………………………. is equal to TP and is positive except plasmolysed cell and in xylem vessel where it is negative
a) Water potential
b) Pressure potential
c) Solute potential
d) Hydrostatic potential
Answer:
b. Pressure potential

Question 10.
Diffusion Pressure Deficit (DPD) was termed by Meyer in:
(a) 1928
(b) 1828
(c) 1936
(d) 1938
Answer:
(d) 1938

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 11.
Imbibants present in plants are generally
a) Hydrothermic
b) Hydrostatic
c) Hydrophilic
d) Hydrophobic
Answer:
c. Hydrophilic

Question 12.
Kramer (1949) recognised two distinct mechanisms, which independently operate in the absorption of water in plants are:
(a) osmosis and diffusion
(b) imbibition and diffusion
(c) diffusion and absorption
(d) active absorption and passive absorption
Answer:
(d) active absorption and passive absorption

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 13.
Root pressure is totally apsent in Gymnosperms because
a) Trachea absent
b) Tracheids absent
c) Trees are tall
d) Trees are comparatively short
Answer:
a. Trachea absent

Question 14.
When respiratory inhibitors like KCN, chloroform are applied:
(a) there is a decrease in the rate of respiration and an increase in the rate of absorption of water.
(b) there is an increase in the rate of respiration and a decrease in the rate of absorption of water.
(c) there is a decrease in the rate of respiration and also a decrease in the rate of absorption of water.
(d) there is an increase in the rate of respiration and also in the rate of absorption of water.
Answer:
(c) there is a decrease in the rate of respiration and also a decrease in the rate of absorption of water.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 15.
Find the DPD in a flaccid cell if its OP is 10
a) 20
b) 30
c) 10
d) 40
Answer:
c.10

Question 16.
Pulsation theory was proposed by:
(a) Strasburger
(b) Godsey
(c) J.C. Bose
(d) C.V. Raman
Answer:
(c) J.C. Bose

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 17.
When a cell is kept in 0.5m solution of sucrose it’s volume does not alter. If the same cell is placed in 0.5M solution of sodium chloride, the volume of the cell
a) Increase
b) Decrease
c) cell will be pIasrnoysed
d) Will does not show any change
Answer:
d. Will does not show any change

Question 18.
Indicate the correct statements:
(i) Root pressure is absent in gymnosperms.
(ii) Root pressure is totally absent in angiosperms.
(iii) There is a relationship between the ascent of sap and root pressure.
(iv) There is no relationship between the ascent of sap and root pressure.

(a) (i) and (ii)
(b) (ii) and (iii)
(c) (ii) and (iv)
(d) (i) and (iv)
Answer:
(d) (i) and (iv)

Match The Following & Find Out The Correct Order

Question 19.
I) Water potential – A) Turgor pressure
II) Solute potential – B) Osmotic potential + Pressure potential
III) Matric potential – C) Osmotic potential
IV) Pressure potential – D) Imbibition pressure
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 5
Answer:
b) B C D A

Question 20.
I) Leaves – A) Antitransport
II) Seed – B) Transpiration
III) Roots – C) Negative osmotic potential
IV) Aspirin – D) Imbibition
V) Plasmolyced cell – E. Absorption
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 6
Answer:
a) C B D E A

Question 21.
I) Transport of substance from a region of lower concentration to a region of higher concentration is with the expenditure of energy – A. Antiport
II) The movement of two types of molecules across the membrane in opposite direction – B. Symport The movement of a molecule across III) a membrane independent of other molecules – C. Active port
IV) The movement of two types of molecules across the membrane in the same direction – D. Uniport
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 7
Answer:
c) C D A B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 22.
I) Passive transport – A) Uphill transport
II) Active transport – B) Short distance transport
HI) Cell to cell transport – C) Long-distance transport
IV) Ascent of sap – D) Downhill transport
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 8
Answer:
b) D A B C

Question 23.
The length and breadth of stomata is:
(a) about 10 – 30μ and 2 – 10μ respectively
(b) about 10 – 14μ and 3 – 10μ respectively
(c) about 10 – 40μ and 3 – 10μ respectively
(d) about 5 – 30μ and 5 – 10μ respectively
Answer:
(c) about 10 – 40μ and 3 – 10μ respectively

Question 24.
A membrane that permits the solvent and not the solute to pass through it is termed is
a) Permeable,
b) impermeable
c) semipermeable
d) differentially permeable
Answer:
c. Semi permeable

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 25.
Who did observe that stomata open in light and close in the night:
(a) Unger
(b) Sachs
(c) Boehm
(d) Von Mohl
Answer:
(d) Von Mohl

Question 26.
The phosphorylase enzyme in guard cells supports the starch-sugar interconversion theory. The above reaction is:
(a) oxidation reaction
(b) hydrolyses reaction
(c) reduction reaction
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) hydrolyses reaction

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 27.
If a cell kept in a solution of unknown concentration gets deplasmolysed the solution is
a) hypotonic
b) hypertonic
c) isotonic
d) detonic
Answer:
a. hypotonic

Question 28.
A cell placed in a strong salt solution will shrink because
a) the cytoplasm will decompose
b) mineral salts will break the cell wall
c) salt will leave the cell
d) water will leave by exosmosis
Answer:
d. water will leave by exosmosis

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 29.
Phenyl Mercuric Acetate (PMA), when applied as a foliar spray to plants:
(a) induces partial stomatal closure for two weeks.
(b) induces partial stomatal opening for two weeks.
(c) induces partial stomatal closure for four weeks.
(d) induces stomatal closure permanently
Answer:
(a) induces partial stomatal closure for two weeks.

Question 30.
The osmotic pressure of cell sap is maximum in
a) Hydrophytes
b) Halophytes
c) Xerophytes
d) Mesophytes
Answer:
b. Halophytes

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 31.
Say true or false and on that basis choose the right answer.
I) In facilitated diffusion, molecules move across the cell membrane with the help of special proteins, with the expenditure of energy
II) Porin is a larger transport protein, facilitates smaller molecules to pass through.
III) Aquaporins are recognized to transport urea, CO2, NH3 metalloid & ROS
IV) The carrier proteins structure does not get modified due to its association with the molecules
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 9
Answer:
d. False True True False

Question 32.
I) Hypertonic is a strong solution (low solvent/high solute/ low Ψ )
II) Hypotonic is a weak solution (high solvent/low or zero solutes/ high Ψ)
III) Hypertonic is the weak solution (high solvent/low or zero solutes/high Ψ)
IV) Hypotonic is a strong solution (low solvent / high solute/low Ψ)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 10
Answer:
b. True True False False

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 33.
From sieve elements sucrose is translocated into sink organs such as root, tubers etc and this process is termed as:
(a) Xylem unloading
(b) Xylem uploading
(c) Phloem unloading
(d) Phloem uploading
Answer:
(c) Phloem unloading

Question 34.
The value of pure water is zero in which three aspects of the given options
I) Osmotic pressure
II) Osmotic potential
III) Water potential
IV) Pressure potential
a) I, II, & III
b) II, III & IV
c) I, Ill & IV
d) I, II & IV
Answer:
a. I, II & III

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 35.
Gases such as oxygen and carbon dioxide cross the cell membrane by
a) Passive diffusion through the lipid bilayer
b) Primary active transport
c) Specific gas transport proteins
d) Secondary active transport
Answer:

Question 36.
Hydathodes are generally present in plants that grow in:
(a) dry places
(b) moist and shady places
(c) sunny places
(d) deserts
Answer:
(b) moist and shady places

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 37.
Why sugars are transported in the form of su-crose in phloem?
a) It is inactive and highly soluble
b) It is active
c) It yields high ATP
d) It is lighter in weight.
Answer:
a. It is inactive and highly soluble

Question 38.
Unloading of pholem at sink includes
a) Passive transport
b) diffusio
c) Osmosis
d) Active transport
Answer:
d. Active transport

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 39.
The liquid coming out of the hydathode of grasses is:
(a) pure water
(b) not pure water
(c) a solution containing a number of dissolved substances
(d) saltwater
Answer:
(c) a solution containing a number of dissolved substances

Question 40.
In a flaccid cell
a) DPD = OP
b) DPD = TP
c) TP = OP
d) OP = O
Answer:
a. DPD = OP

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 41.
The pathway of water movement involving living part of a cell is
a) Apoplast pathway
b) symplast pathway
c) Transmembrane pathway
d) Lateral conduction
Answer:
b. Symplast pathway

Question 42.
The ascent of sap is
a) Upward movement of water in plants
b) downward movement of water in plants
c) upward and downward movement of water plants
d) None of the above
Answer:
a. upward movement of the water plants

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 43.
High tensile strength of water is due to
a) Adhesion only
b) cohesion only
c) Both (a) and (b)
d) None of these
Answer:
c. Both (a) and (b)

Question 44.
Maximum transpiration occur in
a) Mesophytes
b) Xerophytes
c) Hydrophytes
d) Epiphytes
Answer:
a. Mesophytes

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 45.
Supply ends in transport of solutes are
a) green leaves
b) root and stem
c) xylem and phloem
d) Hormones and enzymes
Answer:
c. Xylem and phloem

Question 46.
For guttation in plants, the process responsible is
a) Root pressure
b) Atmospheric pressure
c) Imbibition
d) None of these
Answer:
a. Root pressure

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 47.
Which of the following theories for Ascent of sap was proposed by famous Indian scientist. J.C. Bose.
a) Transpiration pull theory
b) Pulsation theory
c) Root pressure theory
d) Atmospheric pressure theory
Answer:
b. Pulsation theory

Question 48.
Which of the following plant material is an efficient water imbibant?
a) Lignin
b) Pectin
c) Cellulose
d) Agar
Answer:
d. Agar

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 49.
Which of the following helps in the Ascent of sap?
a) Root pressure
b) Transpiration
c) Capillarity
d) All the above
Answer:
d. All the above

Question 50.
In a girdled plant which of the following dies first?
a) Shoot
b) root
c) Both die simultaneously
d) None – the plant survives
Answer:
b. root

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 51.
Assertion:-A Imbibition is also diffusion
Reason -R The movement of water in the above process is along a concentration gradient.
a) Both A and Rare true and R is correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A
c) A true but R false
d) Both A and Rare false
Answer:
a) Both A and R are True and R is correct explanation of A

Question 52.
Assertion: – A In rooted plant, the transport of water and minerals in xylem is essentially multi-directional
Reason – R Organic compound and nuitrient undergoes undirectional transport only
Answer:
d) Both A and R are false

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 53.
Assertion: – A The adsorption of water by solid particles of an adsorbant with out forming a solution is known as imbibition
Reason: – R The liquid which is imbided is known as imbibate
Answer:
b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A

Question 54.
Assertion: – A In phloem loading, food is transported to the sink
Reason – R Food is transported from source to sink ‘
Answer:
d) Both Assertion ‘A’ and Reason ‘R’ are false

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 55.
Assertion – A: Xylem a principal water conducting ’
Reason -R: It has been recognised by girdling or ringing experiments
Answer:
a) Both A and R are True R is the correct explanation of A

Question 56.
Assertion: – A In phloem, sugar are translocated in non reducing form
Reason – R Non reducing sugars are most reactive sugars
Answer:
c) Assertion is true but Reason is false

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 57.
Assertion: AIn ringing experiment a narrow continuous band of tissues external to the phloem is removed
Reason: R Ringing experiment proves that phloem is involved in water transport ’
Answer:
d) Both A and R are false

II. Two Mark Questions

Question 1.
What is the need for the transport of materials in plants?
Answer:
Water absorbed from roots must travel up to leaves by xylem for food preparation by photosynthesis. Likewise, food prepared from leaves has to travel to all parts of the plant including roots.

Question 2.
What is osmosis
Answer:
It is a special type of diffusion almost same like simple diffusion but has a selectively permeable membrane is here, through which osmosis occur.
(OR)
It is the movement of water molecules from a place of its higher concentration, to the place of its lower concentration through a semipermeable membrane.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 3.
Define the term diffusion.
Answer:
The net movement of molecules from a region of their higher concentration to a region of their lower concentration along a concentration gradient until an equilibrium is attained.

Question 4.
The touch me plant closes its leaves at the touch – Explain.
Answer:

  • In the ‘Touch me not’ plant the touching act as stimulus, and it closes the leaves.
  • When we touch the plant, at that time the stem releases some chemicals, which force water to move out of the cell leading to the loss of Turgor pressure and the leaves droop down However after sometime they become normal.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 5.
What is meant by Porin?
Answer:
Porin is a large transporter protein found in the outer membrane of plastids, mitochondria and bacteria which facilitates smaller molecules to pass through the membrane.

Question 6.
Define water potential
Answer:

  • The potential energy of water in a system compared to pure water when both temperature and pressure are ketp same.
  • It is a measure of how freely water molecules can move in a given environment
  • Water potential of pure water is = 0

Question 7.
Define Diffusion Pressure Deficit.
Answer:

  • Termed by Meyer (1938)
  • The difference between the Diffusion pressure of the solution and its solvent at a particular temperature and atmospheric pressure of the solution and its solvent at a particular temperature and atmospheric pressure is called DPD.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 8.
Differentiate between short distance and Long Distance Transport.
Answer:

SDT LDT
1. Cell to cell Transport
Involve few cells ni lateral direction
Transport with in the network of xylem and
phloem
2. Connecting link to xylem bind phloem from root hairs to leaf tissues Direct vertical – main Transport
3. Eg. Diffusion, Osmosis etc 4. Eg. Ascent of sap & Translocation of solutes.

Question 9.
Differentiate between Passive & Active Transport
Answer:

PT AT
1. Down hill Transport (Phyical) Up hill Transport (Biological)
2. Occur According to concentration gradient Occur against concentration gradient
3. No expenditure of energy There is expenditure of energy obtained from Respiration
4. Eg. Diffusion – Facilitated Diffusion osmosis etc. Eg. Na+ K+ ATP are pump.

Question 10.
Give two examples of the phenomenon of Imbibition.
Answer:
two examples for the phenomenon of Imbibition:

  1. The swelling of dry seeds.
  2. The swelling of wooden windows, tables, doors due to high humidity during the rainy season.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 11.
Explain carbonic Acid Exchange theory.
Answer:

  • Soil solution act as a medium of ion-exchange
  • The CO2 released by roots combine with water to form carbonic acid (H2CO3)
  • Carbonic acid dissociates into H+ + HCO3 in the soil solution.
  • H+ ions exchange with cations adsorbed on clay particles and cations from micelles get released int c.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 11

Question 12.
Give Answer in a sentence or two Distinguish between (i) Exomosis & Endomosis (ii) Apoplast & Symplast (iii) Cohesion & Adhesion (v) Influx & Efflux
Answer:

I) Exomosis Endomosis
The osmotic outflow of water, when cell placed in hypertonic solution Osmotic inflow into the cell when placed in hypotonic solution or water
Eg. Preservation of Jam, Jellies, pickles Eg. Swelling of Dry grapes placed in water
II) Apoplast Symplast
System of adjacent cell walls – continuous throughout except at the asparian strips of endodermis in the roots System of interconnected protoplasts of neighbouring cells in plants
III) Cohesion Adhesion
Attraction between molecules of a similar kind The attraction between molecules of different kind
IV) Influx Efflux
The entry of ion into the cell is known as Influx The exit of ion from the cell into outside is known as Efflux
It can be active or passive It can be active or passive.

Question 13.
What is meant by osmotic pressure?
Answer:
When a solution and its solvent (pure water) are separated by a semipermeable membrane, the pressure is developed in the solution, due to the presence of dissolved solutes. This is called osmotic pressure (OP).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 14.
Define Root Pressure.
Answer:

  • Stephen Hales – coined the term
  • Stoking (1956) Defined the term.
  • A pressure developing in the tracheary elements of the xylem as a result of metabolic activities of the root.

Question 15.
Define the term osmosis.
Answer:
Osmosis (Latin: Osmos – impulse, urge) is a special type of diffusion. It represents the movement of water or solvent molecules through a selectively permeable membrane from the place of its higher concentration (high water potential) to the place of its lower concentration (low water potential).

Question 16.
Why plants transport sugars as sucrose and not as starch or Monosaccharide (Glucose & Fructose)
Answer:

Name Type Properties
1.Starch Polysaccharide (non reducing sugar) Insoluble in water cann’t be transport
2. Glucose & Fructose Monosaccharides (reducing sugar) Soluble in water but less efficient in energy storage & reactive
3. Sucrose Disaccharide(non reducing sugar) Soluble in water, even at high concentration, low viscosity, more efficient in energy storage no reducing ends make it inert than glucose & Fructose.

Question 17.
What are the three types of plasmolysis?
Answer:
Three types of plasmolysis occur in plants:

  1. Incipient plasmolysis
  2. Evident plasmolysis
  3. Final plasmolysis.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 18.
Identify the diagram and Neatly label the parts
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 12
The given diagram is the structure of Hydathode
A-Guard cell
B-Epithem
C-Tracheids

Question 19.
Identify the Diagram & Label the parts.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 13
The given diagram explain Reverse osmosis
A – Pressure
B – Pure water
C – Saltwater
D – Membrane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 20.
Differentiate between Ascent of sap and Translocation of solute.
Answer:

Ascent of sap Translocation of solute
The upward transport of water along with dissolved minerals from roots to the aerial parts is called as Ascent of sap. The transport of food from the site of synthesis to the site of utilization or from source to sink is known as Translocation of organic solutes (a dissolved substance)
Occur through Xylem Occur through Phloem

Question 21.
Give any two objections to starch-sugar interconversion theory.
Answer:
Two objections to starch – sugar interconversion theory:

  1. In monocots, the guard cell does not have starch.
  2. There is no evidence to show the presence of sugar at a time when starch disappears and stomata open.

Question 22.
Differentiate between cuticular and Lenticular Transpiration.
Answer:

Cuticular Transpiration Lenticular Transpiration
Loss of water through cuticle is known as cuticular Transpiration Some pores
It is only about 5 to 10% of the total Transpiration Present on the woody surface of stem (bark) are known as Lenticels
The thicker the cuticle, the lesser will be the Transpiration. Eg. xerophytes The loss of water from the lenticel is Lenticular Transpiration – It is only about 0.1 % of the total.

Question 23.
Mention any two uses of anti – transpirants.
Answer:
Two uses of anti – transpirants:

  1. Anti – transpirants reduce the enormous loss of water by transpiration in crop plants.
  2. Useful for seedling transplantations in nurseries.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 24.
Give notes an Aquaporin.
Answer:

  • Water pore – Aquaporin in KBC was discovered by Peter Agre (Nobel Prize for chemistry – 2003)
  • Water channel protein is present in PM.
  • Regulate the massive amount of water transport across PM
  • 30 types of Aquaporins are known from maize

They also transporter

  • glycerol
  • urea
  • CO2
  • NH
  • metalloids & Reactive oxygen species (ROS)

Function:

  • They increase the permeability of the membrane of water
  • They confer drought and salt, stress tolerance.

Question 25.
Define the term Ion – Exchange.
Answer:
Ions of external soil solution are exchanged with the same charged (anion for anion or cation for cation) ions of the root cells.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 26.
A. Differentiate between Cohesion and Adhesion and
B. Add a note on their significance.
Answer:
A.

Cohesion Adhesion
The strong mutual attraction between water molecules is called cohesion or cohesive force. The Attraction between a water molecule and the wall of the xylem element is called adhesion.

B. The cohesive and Adhesive forces work together to form an unbroken continuous water column in xylem.
The magnitude of cohesive force is much high (350 atm) and is more than enough to ascent sap in the tallest
trees.

III. 3 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Compare and Contrast Diffusion & Osmosis.
Answer:

Diffusion Osmosis
1. The net movement of molecules from a region of their higher concentration to a region of their lower concentration along a concentration gradient until an equilibrium is attained It is a special type of diffusion – There is movement of water or solvent molecules through a selectively permeable membrane from a place of its higher concentration to its lower concentration until an equilibrium is attained.
2. it is independent of the living system It is also independent of the living system
3. Passive process Passive process
4. Obvious in solids gases & liquids Only in liquid molecules Eg. diffusion of sugar in water Eg. Dry grapes, when kept in water swells, & becomes turgid.

Question 2.
Differentiate between osmotic pressure it and osmotic potential
Answer:

Osmotic pressure Osmotic potential
1. The hydrostatic pressure developed in a solution. due to the presence of dissolved solutes when it is separated from a pure solvent by a semi-permeable membrane. The ratio between the number of solvent particles and the number of solute particles in a solution or (lowering of free energy of water in a system due to the presence of solute particles
2. develops only in a confined system. develops in confined or an open system
3. The value is positive, though it is numerically equal to osmotic potential The value is negative though it is numerically opposite to osmotic pressure.

Question 3.
Do you have an R.O. Purifier ¡n your house? Explain the principle behind it.
Answer:

  • Yes / No – R.O. is working on the principle of osmosis. but in the reverse direction.
  • In regular osmosis water moves from its higher concentration to its lower concentration through the selectively permeable membrane but here water moves from lower concentration to higher concentration through selectively permeable membrane.
  • Since against concentration gradient, there is the expenditure of energy, to apply pressure, to force water in a reverse direction.
  • Eg- Desalination plants to purify seawater also work like R-O-Purifiers Movement of Water in house hold usage.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 14

Question 4.
Difference between various plasmolysis types
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 15

Question 5.
Define Antitranspirant.
Answer:
Antitranspirant is any material applied to plants to retard or reduce the rate of transpiration – without disturbing the process of gaseous exchange, for respiration and photosynthesis.
Eg. Colourless plastics silicone oil and low viscosity waxes.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 6.
What are the inducers of stomatal closure.
Answer:

  • Natural antitranspirants usually induce stomatal closure
    Eg. CO2 – inhibits photorespiration – thereby induces stomata! closure
  • Some chemicals, when applied as a foliar spray can induce stomatal closure for 2 – 3 weeks.
    Eg. (PMA) Phenyl Mercuric Acetate & (ABA) Abscisic Acid.

Question 7.
Fill in the blanks in the tabulations given below

The Study Year Scientist associated with it
1. The concept of water potential 1960 ………………………………….
2. Active and Passive absorptions 1949 …………………………………
3. Pulsation theory 1923 …………………………………….

Answer:
1) Slatyer & Taylor 2) Kramer 3) J.C. Bose

Question 8.

Nature of membrane Definition Example
1. Impermeable 1. …………………………….. suberized. cutinizedcell walls
2. ………………………………. Allow diffusion of solvent molecules, do not allow the passage of solute molecules Parched paper
3. Selectively permeable biomembranes allow some solutes to pass in addition to solvent molecules 3. ………………………………….

Answer:
1) Inhibit the movement of both solvent and solute molecules
2) Semipermeable
3) Tonoplast & plasmalemma

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 9.
Give the flow chart to cell to cell transport in plants.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 16

Question 10.
Explain the capillary theory of Boehm (1809).
Answer:
Capillary theory: Boehm (1809) suggested that the xylem vessels work like a capillary tube. This capillarity of the vessels under normal atmospheric pressure is responsible for the ascent of sap. This theory was rejected because the magnitude of the capillary force can raise water level only up to a certain height. Further, the xylem vessels are broader than the tracheid which actually conducts more water and against the capillary theory.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 11.
Explain Phloem loading?
Answer:
Definition:
The products of Photosynthesis from the Mesophyll of leaves to sieve elements of phloem is known as phloem loading. (Just like the cement sack manufactured in a factory being loaded in a vehicle to be transported the respective site)
It involves 3 steps.
Step I:

  1. The chloroplast has photosynthate in the form of starch or Trlose phosphate
  2. It is transported to the cytoplasm, where it is converted into Sucrose.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 17

Question 12.
Explain the theory of photosynthesis in guard cells observed by Von Mohl with its demerits.
Answer:
Von Mohl (1856) observed that stomata open in light and close in the night. According to him, chloroplasts present in the guard cells photosynthesize in the presence of light resulting in the production of carbohydrate (Sugar) which increases osmotic pressure in guard cells. It leads to the entry of water from other cells and the stomatal aperture opens. The above process vice versa in the night leads to the closure of stomata.

Demerits:

  1. The chloroplast of guard cells is poorly developed and incapable of performing photosynthesis.
  2. The guard cells already possess much amount of stored sugars.

IV. 5 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Explain ‘routes’ of Water Absorption in the roots.
Answer:

  • Introduction
  • Root hair & other epidermal cells – By imbibition absorb water from soil –
  • By osmosis moves radically & centripetally – across
    • cortex
    • Endodermis
    • Pencycle & Xylem

There are 3 Routes

  • Apoplast
  • Symplast
  • Transmembrane route

I. Apoplast ( GK – Apo – Away) Everything external to PM
1. Cell walls
2. Extra Cellular Space
3. Interior of dead cells (vessel elements Tracheids)
Movement is continuous exclusively through the cell wall or nonliving part of the plant without crossing any membrane.

II. Symplast (GK – Sym = within)
Entire mass of cytosol of all the living cells in a plant + plasmo desmata + inter connecting cytoplasmic channel.
In the movement water has to cross PM, to enter cytoplasm of outer root cell; then move within adjoining
cytoplasm through plasmodesmata around the vacuoles without the necessity to cross more membrane it reaches xylem.

III. Trans – Membrane Route

  • Water enters a cell on one side and exits from the other side.
  • It crusses 2 membranes for each cell (also through to no plast).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 18

Question 2.
Draw & Explain the structure of Stomata.
Answer:
1. Definition:
The epidermis of leaves and green stems possess many small pores called – Stomata

2. Length & Breadth
The length – 10- 40μ The Breadth – 3 – 10μ
Number Mature leaves contain 50- 500 stomata / mm2

3. Structure
a. Guard Cells – A pair of Kidney shaped cells (semilunar) surrounded a small opening called stoma
b. Subsidiary Cells – Guard cells attached to surrounding epidermal cells known as subsidiary cells or accessory cells.

  • The inner wall of guard cell is thicker
  • The stoma open into an interior substomatal cavity.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 19

Question 3.
Explain osmosis by Potato osmoscope Experiment.
Answer:
Aim : To demonstrate osmosis by Potato osmoscope
Apparatus used: Potato tuber, beaker containing water, sugar solution and pin.

Definition:
Diffusion of water or solvent from the region of higher water potential to a region of lower water potential
is known as osmosis.

Procedure:
Take a peeled potato tuber and make a cavity inside with the help of a knife fill the cavity with concentrated sugar solution and mark the initial level.
Place this set up in a beaker containing pure water After 10 minutes observe the sugar solution level and record your observation.

Observation:
There is rise in the level of the solution. in the cavity of the tuber due to osmosis
Inference: Osmosis has occured, through the potato osmoscope
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 20

Question 4.
Measure Transpiration with Ganong’s Photometer
Answer:
Aim: To measure the rate of Transpiration with Ganong’s Potometer
Apparatus needed: Ganong’s Potometer, a twig, beaker, water, split rubber cork, and vaseline.

Procedure:

  • Ganong’s Potometer is a horizontal graduated tube which is bent in opposite directions at the ends.
  • A reservoir is fixed to the horizontal tube hear the wider end Reservoir has stop cock to regulate water flow.
  • A twig is fixed to the wider arm through the split cork. The apparatus is filled with water with water from reservoir.
  • The apparatus is made air tight by applying vaseline.
  • The other bent end of the horizontal tube is dipped into a beaker containing coloured water.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 21

An air bubble is introduced into the graduated tube at the narrow end. Keep the apparatus in bright sunIght
and observe

Observation:
As the twig transpires, the air bubble move towards the twig.
This loss is compensated by water ohsorption from the beaker.

inference:
By the experiment we can study the rate of Transpiration and rate of transpiration is equal to the rate of water absorption.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 5.
Explain Mechanism of Translocation by Munch Mass flow Hypothesis
Answer:
Munch – Proposed it in 1930 Crafts – elaborated it in 1938
Definition: Organic substances (solute) move from a region of high osmotic pressure (mesophyll) to
region of low OP along TP gradient.

Example – Physical system :
Chamber ‘A’ & chamber ‘B’ made up of semi permeable membrane connected by a tube ‘T’
A – Contain highly concentrated sugar solution (hypertonic)
B – Contain dilute sugar solution (hypotonic)
A – draws water from the reservoir by Endosmosis – TP of chamber ‘A’ increased

  • Continuous entry of water in to A – TP increased
  • Flow of solute from chamber A to B thro TP gradient.
  • The movement continues till both Aand B attain isotonic condition (equilibrium)
    (However if new sugar solution added to A system will start to run again)
    Example (Biological system)
  • Chamber A (Source) – (Equivalent to) – Mesophyll cells of leaves (High concentration of soluble food)
  • Chamber B (Sink) – (Equivalent to) – Cells of stem & Roots (Consumption end)
  • TubeT – (Analogous to) – Sieve tube to phloem

Steps :
1. Xylem (Reservoir) – Movement of water (Endomosis) – Mesophyll cells (TP increase)
2. Mesophyll cells (High TP) Source – enmass movement of  organic solutes through Phloem by TP Gradient  – Cells of stem & Root (low TP) (Sink)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 22

Question 6.
Explain the theory of K+ transport – or Explain the mechanism of stomatal movement
Answer:
Introduction:
Levit (1974) – Proposed it
Raschke (1975) – Elaborated it
Steps:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 23

This process of exchange of ions is called Actie ion exchange ( consume ATP) or Energy

  • Increased K+ ions in the Guard cells – balanced by CP ions
  • Increase in solute concentration (Hypertonic) Decrease in water potential
  • Water enters into Guard cells from subsidiary cells
  • Wall pressure increase Turgor pressure, Turgid guard cells – fall apart & opens the stoma

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 18.2
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 24

  • Exit of H+
  • Intake of K+
  • Exit of K+
  • Loss of H2O
  • Uptake of H2O+
  • Turgidity of Guard Cells
  • Accumulation of CO2 – Lowering of pH
  • Opening of Stoma.
  • Activation of ABA
  • Closure of Stoma.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants

Question 7.
Explain Cytochrome Pump Theory (or) Explain Carrier concept of Active Absorption, through cytochrome Pump theory.
Answer:
Lunde gardth & Burstom (1933)- Proposed the Cytochrome

Pump theory:

  • There is correlation between Respiration & Anion absorption.
  • when a plant is transferred from water to salt solution, the rate of respiration increases – known as Anion respiration – or salt respiration

The Assumptions of Cytochrome pump theory:

  • The mechanism of anion and cation absorption is different.
  • Anion – absorption – through cytochrome pump or chain by Active process
  • An oxygen gradient is responsible for oxidation at outer surface of the membrane and reduction at the inner surface.

Explanation:

  • On the inner surface, the enzyme dehydrogenase Produces protons (W) and electrons (e)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 27

  • Anions are picked up by oxidized cytochrome oxidase and transferred to the other members of the chain.
  • Theory assumes the passive movement of cations (C+) along the electrical gradient created by the accumulation of anions (A) at the inner surface of the membrane.

Defects :

    • Cations also induce respiration
    • to fail to explain the selective uptake of ions
    • It explains absorption of anions only.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 25

Question 8.
Explain the opening and closing of stomata by a starch – sugar – Interconversion theory.
Answer:
i) Lloyd (1908)
According to him, turgidity of Guard cell is due to interconversion of starch → sugar

  • Day time:
    Guard cells have sugar → so turgid → opening of stomata
  • Nighttime:
    Guard cells have starch → so loose turgidity (become flaccid) → closure of stomata

ii) Sayre (1920)
According to him, the pH of Guard cell determine opening and closing of stomata

  • Day time: Guard cells have high pH →so turgid → opening of stomata
  • Nighttime: Guard cells have low pH → become flaccid → closure of stomata to be elaborate
  • Day time: Utilisation of CO2. in photosynthesis → Starch into sugar → high pH → high Turgor pressure→Opening of Stomata
  • Night Time: No photosynthesis, so the accumulation of CO2 → sugar to starch → low pH → decrease in TP → closure of stomata

iii) Hanes (1940)
According to Hanes – Enzyme phosphorylase is responsible for starch sugar conversion in the guard cells.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 11 Transport in Plants 27

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 14 Classes and Objects Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

11th Computer Science Guide Classes and Objects Text Book Questions and Answers

Book Evaluation

Part I

Choose The Correct Answer
Question 1.
The variables declared inside the class are known as data members and the functions are known as
a) data functions
b) inline functions
c) member functions
d) attributes
Answer:
c) member functions

Question 2.
Which of the following statements about member functions are True or False?
i) A member function can call another member function directly with using the dot operator.
ii) Member function can access the private data of the class.
a) i-True, ii-True
b) i-False, ii-True
c) i-True, ii-False
d) i-False, ii-False
Answer:
b) i-False, ii-True

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 3.
A member function can call another member function directly, without using the dot operator called as
a) sub function
b) sub member
c) nesting of member function
d) sibling of member function
Answer:
c) nesting of member function

Question 4.
The member function defined within the class behave like
a) inline functions
b) Non inline function
c) Outline function
d) Data function
Answer:
a) inline functions

Question 5.
Which of the following access specifier protects data from inadvertent modifications?
a) Private
b) Protected
c) Public
d) Global
Answer:
a) Private

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 6.
class x
{
inty;
public:
x(int z)
{
y=z;
}
} x1[4];
intmain( )
{
x x2(10);
return 0;
}
How many objects are created for the above program?
a) 10
b) 14
c) 5
d) 2
Answer:
c) 5

Question 7.
State whether the following statements about the constructor are True or False.
i) constructors should be declared in the private section.
ii) constructors are invoked automatically when the objects are created.
a) True, True
b) True, False
c) False, True
d) False, False
Answer:
c) False, True

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 8.
Which of the following constructor is executed for the following prototype ?
add display (add &); // add is a class name
a) Default constructor
b) Parameterized constructor
c) Copy constructor
d) Non Parameterized constructor
Answer:
c) Copy constructor

Question 9.
What happens when a class with parameterized constructors and having no default constructor is used in a program and we create an object that needs a zero- argument constructor?
a) Compile-time error
b) Domain error
c) Runtime error
d) Runtime exception
Answer:
a) Compile-time error

Question 10.
Which of the following create a temporary instance?
a) Implicit call to the constructor
b) Explicit call to the constructor
c) Implicit call to the destructor
d) Explicit call to the destructor
Answer:
b) Explicit call to the constructor

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Part – II

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What are called members?
Answer:
The class comprises members. Members are classified as Data Members and Member functions. Data members are the data variables that represent the features or properties of a class. Member functions are the functions that perform specific tasks in a class.

Question 2.
Differentiate structure and class though both are user-defined data types.
Answer:
The only difference between structure and class is the members of the structure are by default public whereas it is private in class.

Question 3.
What is the difference between the class and object in terms of oop?
Answer:
Object:

  • Object is an instance of a class.
  • Object is a real-world entity such as pen, laptop, mobile, chair, etc.
  • Object allocates memory when it is created.

Class:

  • Class is a blueprint or template from which objects are created.
  • Class is a group of similar objects.
  • Class doesn’t allocate memory when it is created.

Question 4.
Why it is considered a good practice to define a constructor though a compiler can automatically generate a constructor?
Answer:
A user-defined constructor is the best method of initialise array of objects and normal objects.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 5.
Write down the importance of the destructor.
Answer:
The purpose of the destructor is to free the resources that the object may have acquired during its lifetime. A destructor function removes the memory of an object which was allocated by the constructor at the time of creating an object.

Part – III

Short Answers

Question 1.
Rewrite the following program after removing the syntax errors if any and underline the errors:
#include<iostream>
#include<stdio.h>
classmystud
{ intstudid =1001;
char name[20];
public
mystud( )
{ }
void register ( ) {cin>>stdid;gets(name);
}
void display ( )
{ cout<<studid<<“: “<<name<<endl;}
}
int main( )
{ mystud MS;
register.MS( );
MS.display( );
}
Answer:
MODIFIED PROGRAM:
#include<iostream>
#include<stdio.h>
class mystud
{
int studid;
char name[20];
public:
mystud( )
{
studid=1001;
}
void register ( )
{
cin>>stdid;
gets(name);
}
void display ( )
{
cout<<studid<<“: “<<name<<endl;
}
};
int main( )
{
mystud MS;
MS.reqister( );
MS.display( );
}

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 2.
Write with an example of how will you dynamically initialize objects?
Answer:
Dynamic initialization of Objects:
When the initial values are provided during runtime then it is called dynamic initialization.
Program to illustrate dynamic initialization
#include
using namespace std;
class X
{
int n;
float avg;
public:
X(int p,float q)
{
n=p;
avg=q;
}
void disp( )
{
cout<<“\n Roll numbe:-” <<n;
cout<<“\nAverage :-“<<avg;
}
};
int main( )
{
int a ; float b;
cout<<“\nEnter the Roll Number”;
cin>>a; .
cout<<“\nEnter the Average”;
cin>>b;
X x(a,b); // dynamic initialization
x.disp( );
return 0;
}
Output
Enter the Roll Number 1201
Enter the Average 98.6
Roll number:- 1201
Average :- 98.6

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 3.
What are advantages of declaring constructors and destructor under public access ability?
Answer:

When constructor and destructor are declared under public:

  1. we can initialize the object while declaring it.
  2. we can explicitly call the constructor.
  3. we can overload constructors and therefore use multiple constructors to initialize objects automatically.
  4. we can destroy the objects at the end of class scope automatically (free unused memory).

However, some C++ compiler and Dev C++ do not allow to declare constructor and destructor under private section. So it is better to declare constructor and destructor under public section only.

Question 4.
Given the following C++ code, answer the questions (i) & (ii).
Answer:
class TestMeOut
{
public:
~TestMeOut( ) //Function 1
{
cout<<“Leaving the examination hall”<<endl;
}
TestMeOut( ) //Function 2
{
cout<<“Appearing for examination'<<endl;
}
void MyWork( ) //Function 3
{
cout<<“Attempting Questions//<<endl;
}
};
i) In Object-Oriented Programming, what is Function 1 referred to as and when does it get invoked/called?
Function 1 is called a destructor. It will be automatically invoked when the object goes out of scope (ie. at the end of a program).

ii) In Object-Oriented Programming, what is Function 2 referred to as, and when does it get invoked/called?
Function2 is called a constructor. It will be automatically invoked when an object comes into scope.(ie. at the time of object creation).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 5.
Write the output of the following C++ program code:
Answer:
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
class Calci
{
char Grade; .
int Bonus;
public:
Calci( )
{
Grade=’E’;
Bonus=0;
}//ascii value of A=65
void Down(int G)
{
Grade-=G;
}
void Up(int G)
{
Grade+=G;
Bonus++;
}
void Show( )
{
cout<<Grade<<“#”<<Bonus<<endl;
}
};
int main( )
{
Calci c;
c.Down(3);
c.Show( );
c.Up(7);
c.Show( );
c.Down(2);
c.Show( );
return 0;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Part – IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain nested class with example.
Answer:
When one class becomes a member of another class then it is called Nested class and the relationship is called containership. When a class is declared within another class, the inner class is called a Nested class (i.e. the inner class) and the outer class is known as the Enclosing class. The nested class can be defined in private as well as in the public section of the Enclosing class.

Classes can be nested in two ways:

  1. By defining a class within another class
  2. By declaring an object of a class as a member to another class
  3. By defining a class within another class

C++ program to illustrate the nested class
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
class enclose
{
private:
int x;
class nest
{
private :
int y;
public:
int z;
void prn( )
{
y=3;z=2;
cout<<“\n The product of”
< <y< <‘*'< <z<<“= “< <y*z< <“\n”;
}
}; //inner class definition over
nest m1;
public:
nest n2;
void square( )
{
n2.prn( ); //inner class member function is called by its object
x=2;
n2.z=4;
cout<<“\n The product of” <<n2.z<<‘*'<<n2.z<<“=”n2.z*n2.z<<“/n”;
cout<<“\n The product of” <<x<<‘*'<<x<<“= “<<x*x;
}
}; //outer class definition over
int main( )
{
enclose e;
e.square( ); //outer class member function is called
}
Output
The product of 3*2=6
The product of 4*4=16
The product of 2*2=4

In the above program the inner class nest is defined inside the outer class enclose, nest is accessed by enclose by creating an object of nest

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 2.
Mention the differences between constructor and destructor.
Answer:

CONSTRUCTOR

DESTRUCTOR

The name of the constructor must be same as that of the class. The destructor has the same name as that of the class prefixed by the tilde character
A constructor can have parameter list. The destructor cannot have arguments.
The constructor function can be overloaded. Destructors cannot be overloaded i.e., there can be only one destructor in a class.
Constructor cannot be inherited but a derived class can call the base class constructor. Destructor cannot be inherited.
The constructor is executed automatically when the object is created. The destructor is executed automatically when the control reaches the end of class.
Allocated memory space for the object. Destroy the object.

Question 3.
Define a class RESORT with the following description in C++ :
Answer:
Private members:
Rno // Data member to storeroom number
Name //Data member to store user name
Charges //Data member to store per day charge
Days //Data member to store the number of days
Compute ( ) // A function to calculate total amount as Days * Charges and if the
//total amount exceeds 11000 then total amount is 1.02 * Days *Charges

Public member:
getinfo( ) // Function to Read the information like name , room no, charges and days
dispinfo ( ) // Function to display all entered details and total amount calculated
//using COMPUTE function
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
class RESORT
{
private:
int Rno,Days,Charges;
char Rname[20];
int compute( )
{
if (Days * Charges >11000)
return (Days * Charges * 1.02);
else
return(Days * Charges);
}
public:
getinfo( )
{
cout<<“\nEnter customer name : “;
cin>>Rname;
cout<<‘nEnter charges per day : “;
cin>>Charges;
cout< <‘nEnter Number of days : “;
cin>>Days;
cout<<‘n Enter Room Number : “;
cin>>Rno;
}
dispinfo( )
{
cout<<‘nRoom Number :
“<<Rno;
cout<<‘nCustomer name :
“<<Rname;
cout<<‘nCharges per day :
“<<Charges;
cout<<‘nNumber of days :
“<<Days;
cout<<‘nTotal Amount :
“<<compute( );
}
int main( )
{
RESORT Obj;
Obj,getinfo( );
Obj.dispinfo( );
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 4.
WrIte the output of the following:
Answer:
#include<iostream>
#indude<stdio.h>
using namespace std;
class sub
{
int day, subno;
public :
sub(int,int); // prototype
void printsub( )
{
cout<<” subject number: “<<subno;
cout<<” Days : ” <<day;
}
};
sub::sub(int d=150,int sn=12)
{
cout<<endl<<“Constructing the object
“<<endl;
day=d;
sub no=sn;
}
class stud ‘
{
int rno;
float marks; public:
stud( )
{
cout<< “Constructing the object of
students “<<endl;
rno=0;
marks=0.0;
}
void getval( )
{
cout<<“Enter the roll number and the marks secured”; cin>>rno>>marks;
}
void printdet( )
{
cout<<“Roll no : “<<rno<<“Marks : “<<marks<<endl; .
}
};
class admission
{
sub obj;
stud objone;
float fees; ,
public :
admission ( )
{
cout<< “Constructing the object of admission “<<endl;
fees=0.0;
}
void printdet( )
{
objone.printdet( );
obj.printsub();
cout<<“fees : “<<fees<<endl;
}
};
int main( )
{
system (“cls”);
admission adm;
cout<<endl<< ?’Back in main ()”;
return 0;
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 5.
Write the output of the following.
Answer:
#indude<iostream>
#include<stdio,h>
using namespace std;
class P
{
public:
P( )
{
cout<< “\nConstructor of class P }
~P( )
{
cout< < “\nDestructor of class P
}
};
class Q
{
public:
Q( )
{
cout< <“\nConstructor of class Q “;}
~ Q( )
{
cout<< “\nDestructor of class Q
}
};
class R
{
P obj1, obj2;
Q obj3;
public:
R( )
{
cout<< “\nConstructor of class R “;}
~R( )
{
cout<< “\nDestructor of class R
}
};
int main ( )
{
R oR; :
Q oq;
Pop;
return 0;
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

11th Computer Science Guide Classes and Objects Additional Questions and Answers

Choose The Correct Answer (1 Mark)

Question 1.
The most important feature of C++ is ………………..
(a) object
(b) class
(c) public
(d) All the above
Answer:
(b) class

Question 2.
How many features are commonly present in OOP languages?
a) 3
b) 2
c) 4
d) 5
Answer:
c) 4

Question 3.
Calling a member function of an object is also known as ……………….. to object.
(a) call function
(b) call by value
(c) call by reference
(d) sending message
Answer:
(d) sending message

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 4.
……………… is a way to bind the data and its associated functions together,
a) Class
b) Array
c) Structure
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Class

Question 5.
When one class become a member of another class, the relationship is called ………………..
(a) containership
(b) partnership
(c) friendship
(d) all the above
Answer:
(a) containership

Question 6.
The body of the class is defined inside the ………………. brackets.
a) Angle < >
b) Square [ ]
c) Curly { }
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Curly { }

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 7.
……………….. can be defined either in private or in the public section of a class.
(a) Object
(b) Data type
(c) Memory
(d) constructor
Answer:
(d) constructor

Question 8.
The members of the structure are by default ………………..
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Public

Question 9.
There are ……………….. ways to create an object using the parameterized constructor.
(a) 3
(b) 2
(c) 1
(d) 4
Answer:
(c) 1

Question 10.
The class body contains ………………….
a) Data members
b) Member functions
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 11.
The class body has………………… access specifiers.
a) Three
b) Four
c) Two
d) Five
Answer:
a) Three

Question 12.
The class body has…………….. access specifiers.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 13.
…………………. is a visibility label.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 14.
……………….. allows preventing the functions of a program to access directly the internal representation of a class type.
a) Data Hiding
b) Data Capturing
c) Data Processing
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Data Hiding

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 15.
The access restriction to the class members is specified by ……………. section within the class
body.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 16.
A …………………. member is accessible from where outside the class but within a program.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Public

Question 17.
We can set and get the value of public data members using ………………… function.
a) Member
b) Nonmember
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 18.
A …………….. member cannot be accessed from outside the class.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Private

Question 19.
Only the class member functions can access ……………… members.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Private

Question 20.
……………….. members can be accessed in child classes.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Protected

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 21.
If all members of the class are defined as …………….. then the class become frozen.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Private

Question 22.
If all members of the class are defined as ………………….. then the object of the class can not access anything from the class,
a) Private
b) Public
c) Protected
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Private

Question 23.
………………. are the data variables that represent the features or properties of a class.
a) Data members
b) Member functions
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Data members

Question 24.
………………… are the functions that perform specific tasks in a class.
a) Data members
b) Member functions
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Member functions

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 25.
Member functions are called as …………………..
a) Methods
b) Attributes
c) Properties
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Methods

Question 26.
Data members are also called as ……………….
a) Methods
b) Attributes
c) Properties
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Attributes

Question 27.
Classes contain a special member function called as ……………………
a) Constructors
b) Destructors
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 28.
The member functions of a class can be defined in ……………….. ways.
a) Two
b) Three
c) Four
d) Five
Answer:
a) Two

Question 29.
The member functions of a class can be defined in ………………. way.
a) Inside the class definition
b) Outside the class definition
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 30.
When a member function is defined Inside a class, it behaves like ………………. functions.
a) Inline
b) General
c) Local
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Inline

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 31.
If a function is inline, the compiler places a copy of the code of that function at each point where the function is called at ………………….
a) Run Time
b) Compile time
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Compile time

Question 32.
When Member function defined outside the class, and then it is be called as ………………….
member function.
a) Outline
b) Non-inline
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 33.
When Member function defined outside the class using …………….. operator.
a) Scope resolution
b) Membership
c) Reference
d) Conditional
Answer:
a) Scope resolution

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 34.
The class variables are called ………………….
a) Object
b) Attributes
c) Procedures
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Object

Question 35.
Objects are also called as …………………. of class.
a) Instant
b) Instance
c) Attributes
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Instance

Question 36.
Objects can be created in ………………… methods.
a) Three
b) Four
c) Two
d) Five
Answer:
c) Two

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 37.
Objects can be created as ……………….
a) Global object
b) Local object
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 38.
…………….. objects can be used by any function in the program.
a) Global object
b) Local object
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Global object

Question 39.
If an object is declared outside all the function bodies or by placing their names immediately after the closing brace of the class declaration then it is called as ……………….
a) Global object
b) Local object
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Global object

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 40.
If an object is declared within a function then it is called ……………….
a) Global object
b) Local object
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Local object

Question 41.
……………….. object can not be accessed from outside the function.
a) Global
b) Local
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Local

Question 42.
No separate space is allocated for …………………. when the objects are created.
a) Member functions
b) Data members
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Member functions

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 43.
Memory space required for the ……………….
a) Member functions
b) Data members
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Data members

Question 44.
The members of a class are referenced (accessed) by using the object of the class followed by the ………………. operator.
a) Scope resolution
b) Conditional
c) Dot (membership)
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Dot (membership)

Question 45.
Calling a member function of an object is also known as ……………….
a) Sending a message to object
b) Communication with the object
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 46.
An array which contains the class type of element is called …………………
a) Array of objects
b) Structure Objects
c) Block of objects
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Array of objects

Question 47.
The ………………… of the outline member function given in a class specification, instructs the compiler about its visibility mode.
a) Name
b) Prototype
C) Data type
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Prototype

Question 48.
A member function can call another member function of the same class directly without using the dot operator is called ………………………
a) Nesting of the member function
b) Invariant Members
c) Variant Members
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Nesting of the member function

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 49.
A member function can call another member function of the same class for that you do not
need a(n) …………………..
a) Member function
b) Data Member
c) Object
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Object

Question 50.
A member function can access ………………. functions.
a) Public
b) Private
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 51.
…………………. operator will reveal the hidden file scope(global) variable.
a) Membership
b) Conditional
c) Scope resolution
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Scope resolution

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 52.
When an object is passed by ……………… the function creates its own copy of the object and works on it.
a) Value
b) Reference
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Value

Question 53.
When an object is passed by …………….. changes made to the object inside the function do not affect the original object.
a) Value
b) Reference
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Value

Question 54.
When an object is passed by ……………….. its memory address is passed to the function so the called function works directly on the original object used in the function call.
a) Value
b) Reference
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Reference

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 55.
When an object is passed by ………………………. any changes made to the object inside the function definition are reflected in the original object.
a) Value
b) Reference
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Reference

Question 56.
Member Functions can ………………….
a) Receive object as an argument
b) Return an object
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 57.
When one class become a member of another class then it is called ……………. class.
a) Nested
b) Inline
c) External
d) Global
Answer:
a) Nested

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 58.
When one class becomes a member of another class then the relationship is called ………………….
a) Containership
b) Nesting
c) Parent-Child
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Containership

Question 59.
Classes can be nested in ……………….. ways.
a) Three
b) Two
c) Four
d) Five
Answer:
b) Two
Question 60.
Classes can be nested in ………………..way.
a) By defining a class within another class
b) By declaring an object of a class as a member to another class
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 61.
When a class is declared within another class, the inner class is called a Nested class (ie the inner class) and the outer class is known as …………………… class.
a) Enclosing
b) Abstract
c) Transit
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Enclosing

Question 62.
The nested class can be defined in ………………….. section of the Enclosing class.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Either Private or Public
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either Private or Public

Question 63.
Whenever an object of a class is declared as a member of another class it is known as a _____ class.
a) Abstract
b) Container
c) Literal
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Container

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 64.
Instantiating object is done using ……………….
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Data abstraction
d) Data hiding
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 65.
A(n) ………………..in C++ can be initialized during the time of their declaration.
a) Array
b) Structure
c) Array or Structure
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Array or Structure

Question 66.
Member function of a class can access all the members irrespective of their associated …………………..
a) Access specifier
b) Data type
c) Return type
d) Argument
Answer:
a) Access specifier

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 67.
When an instance of a class comes into scope, a special function called the ……………. gets executed.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Data abstraction
d) Data hiding
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 68.
The constructor function name has the same name as the …………….. name.
a) Object
b) Class
c) Data member
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Class

Question 69.
The constructors return ………………
a) int
b) char
c) float
d) nothing
Answer:
d) nothing

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 70.
…………………. are not associated with any data type
a) Constructor
b) Data member
c) Data abstraction
d) Member functions
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 71.
……………… can be defined either inside class definition or outside the Class definition.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Data abstraction
d) Member functions
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 72.
A constructor can be defined in ……………… section of a class.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Either Private or Public
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either Private or Public

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 73.
If a constructor is defined in ………………… section of a class, then only its object Can be created in any function.
a) Private
b) Public
c) Either Private or Public
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Public

Question 74.
The main function of the constructor is ……………………….
a) To allocate memory space to the object
b) To initialize the data member of the class object
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 75.
A constructor that accepts no parameter is called …………………… constructor.
a) Null
b) Default
c) Empty
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Default

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 76.
Identify the correct statement from following with respect to constructor.
a) If a class does not contain an explicit constructor (user defined constructor) the compiler automatically generate a default constructor implicitly as an inline public member.
b) In the absence of user defined constructor the compiler automatically provides the default constructor. It simply allocates memory for the object.
c) Parameterized constructor is achieved by passing parameters to the function.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 77.
A constructor which can take arguments is called ……………….. constructor.
a) Parmeterized
b) Default
c) Empty
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Parmeterized

Question 78.
……………….. type of constructor helps to create objects with different initial values.
a) Parmeterized
b) Default
c) Empty
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Parmeterized

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 79.
Declaring a constructor with arguments hides the ……………………
a) Data members
b) Compiler generated constructor
c) Member functions
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Compiler generated constructor

Question 80.
………………… Constructor is used to creating an array of objects.
a) Default
b) Parameterized
b) Overloaded
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Default

Question 81.
There are ………………. ways to create an object using the parameterized constructor.
a) Three
b) Two
c) Four
d) Five
Answer:
b) Two

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 82.
……………… is a way to create an object using the parameterized constructor,
a) Implicit call
b) Explicit call
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 83.
In …………….. method, the parameterized constructor is invoked automatically
whenever an object is created.
a) Implicit call
b) Explicit call
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Implicit call

Question 84.
In the………………….. method, the name of the constructor is explicitly given to invoking the parameterized constructor.
a) Implicit call
b) Explicit call
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Explicit call

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 85.
………………… method is the most suitable method as it creates a temporary object
a) Implicit call
b) Explicit call
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Explicit call

Question 86.
The chance of data loss will not arise in ………………….. method.
a) Implicit call
b) Explicit call
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Explicit call

Question 87.
A ……………….. object lives in memory as long as it is being used in an expression.
a) Temporary
b) Nested
c) Inline
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Temporary

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 88.
A constructor having a reference to an already existing object of its own class is called ………………….. constructor.
a) Reference
b) Value
c) Copy
d) Move
Answer:
c) Copy

Question 89.
A copy constructor is called ……………..
a) When an object is passed as a parameter to any of the member functions
b) When a member function returns an object
c) When an object is passed by reference to an instance of its own class
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 90.
The constructors are executed in the …………………. of the object declared.
a) Order
b) Reverse order
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Order

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 91.
When the initial values are provided during runtime then it is called ………………….. initialization.
a) Static
b) Dynamic
c) Run time
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Dynamic

Question 92.
…………………. constructor can have parameter list.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 93.
No return type can be specified for ………………….
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 94.
The ……………….. function can be overloaded.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 95.
The compiler generates a ………………… in the absence of a user-defined.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 96.
Compiler generated constructor is ………………….. member function.
a) private
b) protected
c) public
d) None of these
Answer:
c) public

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 97.
The ………………. is executed automatically,
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 98.
The ……………. is executed automatically when the object is created.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Constructor

Question 99.
When a class object goes out of scope, a special function called the ………………. gets executed.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Destructor

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 100.
The destructor has the same name as the class tag but prefixed with a …………………
a) ~ (tilde)
b) #
c) @
d) None of these
Answer:
a) ~ (tilde)

Question 101.
A …………………… is a special member function that is called when the lifetime of an object ends.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Destructor

Question 102.
The ………………… cannot have arguments,
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Destructor

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 103.
There can be ……………… destructor in a class.
a) Two
b) Three
c) Only one
d) Four
Answer:
c) Only one

Question 104.
_____ cannot be inherited.
a) Constructor
b) Destructor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Very Short Answer (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Define methods of a class and write its types.
Answer:
The class comprises members. Member functions are called methods. The member functions of a class can be defined in two ways.

  1. Inside the class definition
  2. Outside the class definition

Question 2.
Why classes are needed?
Answer:
Classes are needed to represent real-world entities that not only have data type properties but also have associated operations. It is used to create user-defined data types.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 3.
What is called as nesting of member functions?
Answer:
Only the public members of a class can be accessed by the object of that class, using the dot operator. However, a member function can call another member function of the same class directly without using the dot operator. This is called as nesting of member functions.

Question 4.
What are the visibility labels of a class body?
Answer:
The class body has three visibility labels viz., private, public, and protected. The Visibility labels are also called as access specifiers.

Question 5.
What is a parameterized constructor?
Answer:
A constructor which can take arguments is called a parameterized constructor. This type of constructor helps to create objects with different initial values. This is achieved by passing parameters to the function.

Question 6.
What happened if all the members of a class are defined as private?
Answer:
If all members of the class are defined as private, then the class becomes frozen.
The object of the class can not access anything from the class.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 7.
Write about objects.
Answer:
A class specification just defines the properties of a class. To make use of a class specified, the variables of that class type have to be declared. The class variables are called objects. Objects are also called an instance of the class.

For example:
student s;
In the above statement ‘s’ is an instance of the class student.

Question 8.
How many ways objects can be created for a class? Give its types.
Answer:
Objects can be created in two methods:

  1. Global object
  2. Local object

Question 9.
What do you mean by an array of objects?
Answer:
An array which contains the class type of element is called an array of objects. It is declared and defined in the same way as any other type of array.

Example:
class stock
{
int itemno;
float price; public:
}s[5];
Here s[5] is an array of objects.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 10.
What is a nested member function?
Answer:
A member function can cal! another member function of the same class directly without using the dot operator. This is called as nesting of member functions.

Question 11.
How many ways objects can be passed to function argument?
Answer:
Objects can also be passed in both ways

  • Pass By Value
  • Pass By Reference

Question 12.
What is a container class?
Answer:
Whenever an object of a class is declared as a member of another class it is known as a container class. In the container-ship, the object of one class is declared in another class.

Question 13.
What is the need for a constructor in a class?
Answer:
Instantiating object is done using constructor. An array or a structure in C++ can be initialized during the time of their declaration using constructor. The constructor function initializes the class object.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 14.
What are the functions of a constructor?
Answer:
The main functions of the constructor are:

  • To allocate memory space to the object and
  • To initialize the data member of the class object.

Question 15.
What is a default constructor?
Answer:
Default constructor:
A constructor that accepts no parameter is called the default constructor.
For example in the class Data program Data::Data( ) is the default constructor.
Using this constructor objects are created similar to the way the variables of other data types are created.

Example:
int num; //ordinary variable declaration
Data d1; // object declaration
If a class does not contain an explicit constructor the compiler automatically generates a default constructor implicitly as an inline public member.

Question 16.
What is the significance of default constructor?
Answer:
Default constructors are very useful to crate objects without having specific initial value. It is also used to create array of objects.

Question 17.
How many ways a constructor can be invoked?
Answer:
There are two ways to create an object using parameterized constructor:

  1. Implicit call
  2. Explicit call

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 18.
What is copy constructor?
Answer:
A constructor having a reference to an already existing object of its own class is called copy constructor.
In other words Copy Constructor is a type of constructor which is used to create a copy of an already existing object of a class type.

Question 19.
What is the order of constructor invocation?
Answer:
The constructors are executed in the order of the object declared. (If it is in same statement left to right)

For example:
Test t1;
Test t2; // the order of constructor execution is first for t1 and then for t2.
Consider the following example
Sample s1,s2,s3 ; //The order of construction is s1 then s2 and finally s3

Question 20.
What do you mean by dynamic initialization of Object?
Answer:
When the initial values are provided during runtime then it is called dynamic initialization.

Question 21.
Write a note on the destructor.
Answer:

  • When a class object goes out of scope, a special function called the destructor gets executed.
  • The destructor has the same name as the class tag but prefixed with a ~(tilde).
  • The destructor function also returns nothing and it does not associate with any data type

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 22.
What is the need for a destructor in a class?
Answer:
The purpose of the destructor is to free the resources that the object may have acquired during its lifetime. A destructor function removes the memory of an object which was allocated by the constructor at the time of creating an object

Question 23.
Define destructor.
Answer:
A destructor is a special member function that is called when the lifetime of an object ends and destroys the object constructed by the constructor. Normally it is declared under the public visibility of a class.

Short Answers (3 Marks)

Question 1.
Explain the local object with an example.
Answer:
If an object is declared within a function then it is called a local object.
It cannot be accessed from outside the function.
# include
# include
using namespace std
class add  //Global class
{
int a,b; public:
int sum; void
getdata()
{
a = 5; b = 10; sum
= a + b;
}
} a1;
add a2;
int main()
{
add a3;
a1.getdata();  //global object
a2.getdata();  //global object
a3.getdata();
cout << a1 .sum;  //Local object for a global class
cout << a2.sum;
cout << a3.sum;
return 0;   //public data member accessed from outside the class
}
Output:
151515

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 2.
Write about private, protected, and public members of a class.
Answer:
The Public Members:
A public member is accessible from anywhere outside the class but within a program.

The Private Members:
A private member cannot be accessed from outside the class. Only the class member functions can access private members. By default, all the members of a class would be private.

The Protected Members:
A protected member is very similar to a private member but they can be accessed in child classes which are called derived classes (inherited classes).

Question 3.
What is a constructor?
Answer:
The definition of a class only creates a new user-defined data type. The instances of the class type should be instantiated (created and initialized). Instantiating objects is done using the constructor. An array or a structure in C++ can be initialized during the time of their declaration.

The initialization of a class type object at the time of declaration similar to a structure or an array is not possible because the class members have their associated access specifiers (private or protected or public). Therefore Classes include special member functions called constructors. The constructor function initializes the class object.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 4.
Explain memory allocation of objects.
Answer:
Memory allocation of objects:
All the objects belonging to that class use the same member function, no separate space is allocated for member functions when the objects are created.
Memory space required for the member variables are only allocated separately for each object because the member variables will hold different data values for different objects.
Memory for Objects for p1 and p2 is illustrated:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 5

Question 5.
Explain the default constructor with an example.
Answer:
A constructor that accepts no parameter is called the default constructor. For example in the class data program Data::Data() is the default constructor. Using this constructor objects are created similar to the way the variables of other data types are created.

Example:
int num; //ordinary variable declaration
Data d1; // object declaration

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 6.
How will you refer members of the class? Give its syntax and an example.
Answer:
The members of a class are referenced (accessed) by using the object of the class followed by the dot (membership) operator and the name of the member.

The general syntax for calling the member function is:
Object_name.function_name (actual parameter); For example consider the following illustration:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 6

Question 7.
Explain the different methods of passing an object to the function argument.
Answer:
Pass By Value:
When an object is passed by value the function creates its own copy of the object and works on it. Therefore any changes made to the object inside the function do not affect the original object.

Pass By Reference:
When an object is passed by reference, its memory address is passed to the function so the called function works directly on the original object used in the function call. So any changes made to the object inside the function definition are reflected in the original object.

Question 8.
Write about constructor.
Answer:
When an instance of a class comes into scope, a special function called the constructor gets executed. The constructor function name has the same name as the class name. The constructors return nothing. They are not associated with any data type. It can be defined either inside class definition or outside the class definition.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 9.
What is a parameterized constructor?
Answer:
Parameterized Constructors:
A constructor which can take arguments is called a parameterized constructor. This type of constructor helps to create objects with different initial values. This is achieved by passing parameters to the function.

Example:
class simple
{
private:
int a,b;
public:
simple(int m, int n)
{
a= m ;
b= n;
cout< < “\n Parameterized Constructor of class-simple
}
};

Question 10.
What do you mean by the implicit and explicit call of a constructor?
Answer:
Implicit call:
In this method, the parameterized constructor is invoked automatically whenever an object is created.
For example, simple s1(10,20); in this for creating the object si parameterized constructor is automatically invoked

Explicit call:
In this method, the name of the constructor is explicitly given to invoking the parameterized constructor so that the object can be created and initialized.

For example:
simple s1=simple(10,20); //explicit call

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 11.
When copy constructor Is executed? Give examples.
Answer:
A copy constructor is called

  • When an object is passed as a parameter to any of the member functions
    Example: void simple: :putdata(simple x);
  • When a member function returns an object
    Example: simple get data( ) { }
  • When an object is passed by reference to an instance of its own class
    For example: simple1, s2(s1); // s2(s1) calls copy constructor

Explain in Detail (5 Marks)

Question 1.
Explain how to define class members?
Answer:
Definition of class members:
Class comprises of members. Members are classified as Data Members and Member functions.

  • Data members are the data variables that represent the features or properties of a class.
  • Member functions are the functions that perform specific tasks in a class.
  • Member functions are called methods, and data members are also called attributes.

Example:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 7
Defining methods of a class:
Without defining the methods (functions), class definition will become incomplete. The member functions of a class can be defined in two ways.

  • Inside the class definition
  • Outside the class definition

Inside the class definition:
When a member function is defined inside a class, it behaves like inline functions. These are called Inline member functions.

Outside the class definition:
When Member function defined outside the class just like normal function definition (Function definitions you are familiar with) then it is being called as an outline member function or non-inline member function. Scope resolution operator (::) is used for this purpose.

The syntax for defining the outline member function is:
return_type class_name :: function name (parameter list)
{
function definition
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 8

Class using Inline and Outline member function:
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
class Box
{
// no access specifier mentioned
double width;
public:
double length;
//inline member function definition
void printWidth( )
{
cout<<“\n The width of the box is…”<<width;
}
//prototype of the function
void setWidth(double w);
};
// outline member function definition
void Box :: setWidth(double w)
{
width=w;
}
int main( )
{
// object for class Box
Box b;
// Use member function to set the width.
b.setWidth(10.0);
//Use member function to print the width.
b.printWidth( );
return 0;
Output
The width of the box is… 10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 2.
What are the ways to create an object using the parameterized constructor with an example?
Answer:
There are two ways to create an object using the parameterized constructor:
1. Implicit call: In this method, the parameterized constructor is invoked automatically whenever an object is created. For example, simple s1( 10,20); in this, for creating the object s1 parameterized constructor is automatically invoked.

2. Explicit call: In this method, the name of the constructor is explicitly given to invoking the parameterized constructor so that the object can be created and initialized.

#include
using namespace std;
class simple
{
private:
int a, b;
public:
simple(int m,int n)
{
a = m;
b = n;
cout << “\n Constructor of class – simple invoked for implicit and explicit call” << endl;
}
void putdata()
{
cout << “\n The two integers are…” << a << ‘\t’ << b << endl;
cout << “\n The sum of the variables” << a << “+” << b << “=” << a + b;
}
};
int main()
{
simple s1(10,20); //implicit call
simple s2 = simple(30,45); //explicit call
cout << “\n\t\tObject 1\n”;
s1.putdata();
s2.putdata();
return 0;
}
Output:
Constructor of class – simple invoked for the implicit and explicit call
Constructor of class-simple invoked for the implicit and explicit call

Object 1
The two integers are… 10 20
The sum of the variables 10 + 20 = 30

Object 2
The two integers are… 30 45.
The sum of the variables 30 + 45 = 75

Question 3.
What are the characteristics of a destructor?
Answer:
Characteristics of destructors:

  • The destructor has the same name as that of the class prefixed by the tilde character
  • The destructor cannot have arguments.
  • It has no return type.
  • Destructors cannot be overloaded i.e., there can be only one destructor in a class.
  • In the absence of a user-defined destructor, it is generated by the compiler.
  • The destructor is executed automatically when the control reaches the end of the class scope to destroy the object.
  • They cannot be inherited.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Evaluate Yourself

Question 1.
Define a class in general and in C++’s context.
Answer:
Classes represent real-world entities that not only have data type properties but also have associated operations.
In C++ class is a way to bind the data and its associated functions together. It is a user-defined data type.

Question 2.
What is the purpose of a class specifier?
Answer:
Data hiding is one of the important features of Object Oriented Programming which allows preventing the functions of a program to access directly the internal representation of a class type.
The access restriction to the class members is specified by class specifies like public, private, and protected sections within the class body.

Question 3.
Compare a structure and a class in C++ context.
Answer:
The only difference between structure and class is the members of structure are by default public where as it is private in class.

Question 4.
Compare private and public access specifier.
Answer:
Public members:
A public member is accessible from anywhere outside the class but within a program. We can set and get the value of public data members even without using any member function.

Private members:
A private member cannot be accessed from outside the class. Only the class member functions can access private members. By default all the members of a class would be private.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 5.
What is a non-inline member function? Write its syntax.
Answer:
When Member function defined outside the class just like normal function definition (Function definitions you are familiar with) then it is being called as an outline member function or non-inline member function. Scope resolution operator (::) is used for this purpose.
The syntax for defining the outline member function is:
Syntax:
return_type class_name :: function_name (parameter list)
{
function definition
}
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 9

Activity – 1
State the reason for the invalidity of the following code fragment.

(i)

(ii)

class count
{
int first
int second;
public:
int first
};
class item
{
int prd;
};
int prdno;

Answer:

  • Data member first is duplicated and it is defined with two scopes( both private and public). It is invalid.
  • Object name prefix with the only class name. No data type allowed in between class name and object name.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Activity – 2
class area
{
int s;
public:
void calc( );
};
Write an outline function definition for calc( ); which finds the area of a square
Answer:
int area :: calc( ) .
{
return(s * s);
}

Activity – 3
Identify the error in the following code fragment
class A
{
float x;
void init( )
{
Aa1;
X1.5=1; .
}
};
void main( )
{
A1.init( );
}
Answer:
Error:
Local object can not be accessed from outside the function. Al is the local object, so it can not be accessed in main( );

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Activity – 4
What is the size of the objects s1, s2?
class sum
{
int n1,n2;
public:
void add( )
{
int n3=10;n1=n2=10;
}
} s1,s2;
Answer:
The size of the object SI and S2 is 8 bytes each in Dev C++, In Turbo C++ 4 bytes each.
Program to test the memory requirement:
class sum
{
int n1,n2;
public:
void add( )
{
int n3-10;
n1=n2=10;
}
} s1,s2;
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
int main( )
{
cout<<sizeof(s1)<< “”<<sizeof(s2);
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Activity – 5
i) Write member function called display with no return.
class objects.
ii) Try the output of the above coding with the necessary modifications.
PROGRAM
#indude<iostream>
using namespace std;
class compute
{
int n1, n2;
public :
void init (int a, int b)
{
n1 = a;
n2 = b;
}
int n;
int add ( )
return (n1+n2);;
{
int prd ( )
{
return (n1*n2);
}
};
compute c1, c2;
void display(compute &objl,compute &obj2)
{
c1.init(12,15);
c2.init(8,4);
objlm = obj1.add( );
obj2.n = obj2.add( );
cout<<“\n Sum of object-1 “<<obj1.n;
cout<<“\n Sum of object-2 “<<obj2.n;
cout<<“\n Sum of the two objects are”<<obj1.
n+obj2.n;
c1.init(5,4);
c2.init(2,5);
obj1.n = obj1.prd( );
obj2.n = obj2.prd( );
cout<<“\n Product of object-1 “<<objl.n;
cout<<“\n Product of object-2 “<<obj2.n;
cout<<“\n Product of the two objects are “<<objl.n*obj2.n;
}
int main( )
{
display(c1,c2);
return 0;
}
output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Activity – 6
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
class Sample
{
int i,j;
public :
int k;
Sample( )
{
i=j=k=0;//constructor defined inside the class
}
};
int main( )
{
Sample s1;
return 0;
}
Output
In the above program justify your reason for no output.
Answer:
Constructor alone is defined without output statement. When the above program is executed, the constructor executed. But no output on the screen because of missing cout

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Hands-On Practice

Question 1.
Define a class employee with the following specification.
Answer:
private members of class Employee
empno- integer
ename – 20 characters
basic-float
netpay, hra, da, – float
calculate ( ) – A function to find the basic+hra+da with float return type

public member functions of class employee
havedata( ) – A function to accept values for empno, ename, basic, hra,
da and call calculate( ) to compute netpay
dispdata( ) – A function to display all the data members on the screen
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<iomanip>
class Employee
{
private :
int empno;
char ename[20];
float basic,hra,da,netpay;
float calculate( )
{
return (basic+hra+da);
}
public:
void have data( )
{
cout<<setw(35)<<“Enter Employee number :”;
cin>>empno;
cout<<setw(35)<<“Enter Employee name :”;
cin>>ename;
cout<<setw(35)<<“Enter Basic pay :”;
cin>>basic; ,
cout<<setw(35)<<“Enter House Rent Allowance (HRA):”;
cin>>hra; .
cout<<setw(35)<<“Enter Dearness Allowance (DA):”;
cin>>da;
netpay = calculate( );
}
void dispdata( )
{
cout<<“\nEMPLOYEE DETAILS\n\n”;
cout<<setw(35)<<“Employee number :”<<empno<<endl;
cout<<setw(35)<<“Employee name :”<<ename<<endl;
cout<<setw(35)<<“Basic pay :”<<basic<<endl;
cout<<setw(35)<<“House Rent Allowance (HRA) :”<<hra<<endl; cout<<setw(35)<<“Dearness Allowance (DA) :”<<da<<endl;
cout<<setw(35)< <“Netpay :”<<netpay<<endl;
}
};
int main( )
{
Employee e;
e.havedata( );
e.dispdata( );
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 12

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 2.
Define a class MATH with the following specifications.
Answer:
private members:
num1, num2, result – float
init( ) function to initialize num1, num2 and result to zero .

protected members:
add( ) function to add num1 and num2 and store the sum in result
diff( ) function to subtract num1 from num2 and store the difference in the result

public members:
getdata( ) function to accept values for num1 and num2
menu( ) function to display menu
1. Add…
2. Subtract…
invoke add() when the choice is 1 and invoke prod when the choice is 2 and also display the result.
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<iomanip>
class MATH
{
private:
float num1,num2,result;
init( )
{
num1=0;
num2=0;
result=0;
}
protected: void add( )
{
result = num1+num2;
}
void diff( )
{
result = num1 – num2;
}
public:
getdata( )
{
cout<<“\nEntertwo numbers “;
cin>>num1>>num2;
} ‘ menu( )
{
int choice;
cout<<“\n1.Add …”;
cout<<“\n2.Subtract …….”;
cout<<“\nEnter your choice :”; cin>>choice;
switch(choice)
{
case 1: getdata( );
add( );
cout<<“\nAdded value is”<<result;
break;
case 2: getdata( );
diff( );
cout<<“\nSubtracted value is “<<result;
break;
default: cout<<“\End”;
}
}
};
int main( )
{
MATH m;
m. menu( );
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 13

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 3.
Create a class called Item with the following specifications.
Answer:
private members:
code, quantity- Integer data type
price – Float data type
getdata( )-function to accept values for all , data members with no return

public members:
taxt – float
dispdata( ) member function to display code,quantity,price and tax .The tax is calculated as if the quantity is more than 100 tax is 2500 otherwise 1000.
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<iomanip>
class Item
{
private:
int code,quantity;
float price;
void getdata( )
{
cout<<“\nEnter product code “; cin>>code;
cout<<“\nEnter quantity “; cin>>quantity;
cout<<“\nEnter price “; cin>> price;
}
public:
float tax;
void display( )
{
getdata( );
if(quantity>100)
tax = 2500;
else
tax = 1000;
cout<<endl<<setw(25)<< “Product code : “<<code<<endl<<endl;
cout<<setw(25)<<“Quantity : ” <<quantity<<endl<<endl;
cout<<setw(25)<<“Unit price :” <<price<<endl<<endl;
cout<<setw(25)<<“Total Amount: ” < cout<<setw(25)<<“Net Bill amount : ”
<<quantity* price+tax<<endl<<endl;
}
};
int main( )
{
Item i; i.display( );
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 14

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 4.
Write the definition of a class FRAME in C++ with the following description.
Answer:
Private members:
FramelD – Integer data type
Height, Width, Amount – Float data type
SetAmount( ) -Member function to calculate and assign amount as 10*Height*Width

Public members:
GetDetail( ) Afunction to allow user to entervalues of FramelD, Height, Width. This function should also call SetAmount() to calculate the amount.
ShowDetail( ) A function to display the values of all data members.
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<iomanip>
class FRAME
{
private:
int FrameId;
float Height, Width, Amount;
void SetAmount()
{
Amount = 10 * Height * Width;
}
public:
void Getdetails( )
{
cout<<“\nEnter Frame Id : “; cin>> FrameId;
cout<<“\nEnter Frame Height: cin>> Height;
cout<<“\nEnter Frame Width : “; cin>>Width;
SetAmount( );
}
void ShowDetaiis( )
{
cout<<endl<setw(25)<<“Frame Id :” <<FrameId<<endl<<endl; cout<<setw(25)<<“Frame Height:” <<Height<<endl<endl;
cout<<setw(25)<<“Frame Width :”<<Width<<endk<endl;
cout<<setw(25)<<“Total Amount:”
<<Amount< <endl< <endl;
}
int main( )
{
FRAME F;
F.Getdetails( );
F.ShowDetails( );
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 15

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 5.
Define a class RESORT in C++ with the following description:
Answer:
Private Members:
Rno //Data member to store Room No
RName //Data member to store customer name
Charges //Data member to store per day charges Days //Data member to store a number of days of stay
COMPUTE( ) //A function to calculate and return Amount as
//Days*Chagres and if the value of Days*Charges is more than 5000 then as 1.02*Days*Charges

Public Members:
Getinfo( ) //A function to enter the content Rno, Name, Charges //and Days Displayinfo( ) //A function to display Rno, RName, Charges, Days and
// Amount (Amount to displayed by calling function COMPUTE())
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
class RESORT
{
private:
int Rno,Days,Charges;
char Rname[20];
int compute( )
{
if (Days * Charges >5000)
return (Days * Charges * 1.02);
else
return(Days * Charges);
}
public:
getinfo( )
{
cout<<“\nEnter customer name :”;
cin>>Rname;
cout<<“\nEnter charges per day :”;
cin>>Charges;
cout<<“\nEnter Number of days :”;
cin>>Days;
cout<<“\nEnter Room Number :”;
cin>>Rno;
}
dispinfo( )
{
cout<<“\nRoom Number : “<<Rno;
cout<<“\nCustomer name :
“<<Rname;
cout«”\nCharges per day :
“<<Charges;
cout<<“\nNumber of days :
“<<Days;
cout<<“\nTotal Amount :
“<<compute( );
}
};
int main( )
{
RESORT Obj;
Obj.getinfo( );
Obj.dispinfo( );
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 16

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 7.
Answer:
struct pno
{
int pin;
float balance;
}
Create a BankAccount class with the following specifications

protected members
pno_obj //array of 10 elements
init(pin) // to accept the pin number and initialize it and initialize
// the balance amount is 0

public members
deposit(pin, amount):
Increment the account balance by accepting the amount and pin. Check the pin number for matching. If it matches increment the balance and display the balance else display an appropriate message withdraw(self, pin, amount):
Decrement the account balance by accepting the amount and pin. Check the pin number for matching and balance is greater than 1000 and amount is less than the balance. If it matches withdraw the amount and display the balance else display an appropriate message
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<iomanip>
struct pno
{
int pin;
float balance;
};
class BankAccount
{
public:
pno pno_obj[10];
void deposit(int pn,float amt)
{
for(int i=0;i<10;i++)
if(pno_obj[i].pin == pn)
{
pno_obj[i].balance = pno_obj[i].balance + amt;
cout<<“\nTransaction successful!
cout<<“\nBalance amount in your account is”<< pno_obj[i].balance; break;
}
void withdraw(int self,int pn,float amt)
{
for(int i=0;i<10;i++)
{
if(pno_obj[i].pin== pn)
{
if (pno_obj[i].balance>1000 && amt < pno_obj[i].balance)
{
pno_obj[i].balance=pno_obj[i]. balance- amt;
cout<<“\nTransaction successful”;
cout<<“\nBalance amount in your account is “<< pno_obj[i].balance; break;
}
} }
}
};
int main( )
{
int pin_no, tamt;
BankAccount b;
// initialization of objects with pin and balance amount as 0
for(int i=0;i<10;i++)
{
b.pno_obj[i].pin=i+l;
}
int choice;
while(choice !=3)
{
cout <<“\n1. Deposit”;
cout <<“\n2.Withdrawal”;
cout<<“\n3.Exit”;
cout<<“\nEnter your choice “; cin >>choice;
switch(choice)
{
case 1:
cout<<“\nEnter PIN
cin>>pin_no;
cout<<“\nEnter Deposit amount”;
cin>>tamt;
b.deposit(pin_no,tamt); break;

case 2:
cout<<“\nEnter PIN cin>>pin_no;
cout<<“\nEnter Withdrawal amount”;
cin>>tamt;
cout<<“\nEnter 1 for Self 2 for Others :”;
int type;
cin>>type;
b.withdraw(type,pin_no,tamt); break;
default: cout<<“\nTransaction completed”;
}
}
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 17

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 8.
Define a class Hotel in C++ with the following description:
Answer:
Private Members:
Rno //Data member to store Room No
Name //Data member t store customer name
Charges //Data member to store per day charges
Days //Data member to store number of days of stay
Calculate() //A function to calculate and return Amount as
//Days*Chagres and if the value of Days*Charges is more than 12000 then as 1.2*Days*Charges

Public Members:
Hotel( ) //to initialize the class members
Getinfo( ) //A function to enter the content Rno, Name, Charges //and Days
Showinfo( ) //A function to display Rno, RName, Charges, Days and
//Amount (Amount to displayed by calling function CALCULATE( ))
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<string.h>
class Hotel
private:
int Rno,Days,Charges;
char Name[20];
1 int Calculate( )
{
if (Days * Charges >12000)
return (Days * Charges * 1.02);
else
return(Days * Charges);
}
public:
Hotel( )
{
Rno=0;
Days=0;
Charges=0;
strcpy(Name,””);
}
void Getinfo( )
{
cout<<“nEnter customer name :”;
cin>>Name;
cout<<“nEnter charges per day : “;
cin>>Charges;
cout<<“\nEnter Number of days :”;
cin>>Days;
cout<<“\nEnter Room Number :”;
cin>>Rno;
}
void Showinfo( )
{
cout<<“\nRoom Number: “<<Rno;
cout<<“\nCustomer name : “<<Name;
cout<<“\nCharges per day : “<<Charges;
cout<<“\nNumber of days : “<<Days;
cout<<“\nTota! Amount: “<<Calculate( );
}
};
int main( )
{
Hotel obj;
obj.Getinfo( );
obj.Showinfo( )
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 18

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 9.
Define a class Exam in C++ with the following description:
Answer:
Private Members:
Rollno – Integer data type
Cname – 25 characters
Mark – Integer data type

public:
Exam(int,char[],int) //to initialize the object ~Exam() // display message “Result will be intimated shortly”
void Display( ) // to display all the details if the mark is above 60 other wise display “Result Withheld”
PROGRAM
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<string.h>
class Exam
{
private:
int Rollno,Mark;
char Cname[25];
public:
Exam(int r,char n[25],int m)
{
Rollno = r;
Mark = m;
strcpy(Cname,n);
}
~Exam( )
{
cout<<“\n\nResult will be intimated shortly”;
}
void Display( )
{
if (Mark>60)
{
cout<<“\n\nRoll Number : “<<Rollno;
cout<<“\nCandidate name : “<<Cname;
cout<<“\nMark :”<<Mark;
}
else
{
cout<<“\n\nRoll Number : “<<Rollno;
cout<<“\nCandidate name : “<<Cname;
cout<<“\nResult Withheld”;
}
}
};
int main( )
{
Exam obj 1(1011,”SURYA”,78),obj2( 1012,”JOHN”,44);
objl.Display( );
obj2. Display( );
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 19

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Question 10.
Define a class Student in C++ with the following specification:
Answer:
Private Members:
A data member Rno(Registration Number) type long
A data member Cname of type string A data member Agg_marks (Aggregate Marks) of type float
A data member Grade of type char
A member function setGrade () to find the grade as per the aggregate marks obtained by the student. Equivalent aggregate marks range and the respective grade as shown below.
Aggregate Marks -Grade
>=90 – A
Less than 90 and >=75 – B
Less than 75 and >=50 – C
Less than 50 – D
Public members:
A constructor to assign default values to data members:
A copy constructor to store the value in another object
Rno=0, Cname=”N.A” Agg_marks=0,0
A function Getdata ( ) to allow users to enter values for Rno.Cname, Aggjnarks and call functionsetGrade ( ) to find the grade.
A function dispResult( ) to allow user to view the content of all the data members.
A destructor to display the message “END”
PROGRAM .
using namespace std;
#include<iostream>
#include<string.h>
#include<iomanip>
class Student
{
private:
long Rno;
char Cname[25],Grade;
float Agg_marks;
void Setgrade()
{
if (Ag g_ma rks >=90)
Grade = ‘A’;
else if(Agg_marks>=75)
Grade = ‘B’;
else if(Agg_marks>=50)
Grade = ‘C’;.
else
Grade = ‘D’;
}
public:
Student( )
{
Rno = 0;
Agg_marks = 0;
strcpy(Cname,””);
Grade=”;
}
Student(Student &s) .
{
Rno = s.Rno;
Agg_marks = s.Agg_marks;
strcpy(Cname,s.Cname);
Grade=s.Grade;

~Student( )
{
cout<<“\nEND”; >
void Getdata( )
{
cout<<“\nEnter Register Number”;
cin>>Rno;
cout<<“\nEnter Candidate Name
cin>>Cname;
cout<<“\nEnter Aggrigate Mark”;
cin>>Agg_marks;
Setgrade( );
}
void dispResult( )
{
cout<<setw(30)<<“Candidate Register Number
“<<Rno<<endl<<endl;
cout< <setw(30)<< “Candidate Name : “<<Cname<<endk<endI;
cout<<setw(30)<<“Aggrigate Mark : “<<Agg_marks«endk<endl;
cout<<setw(30)<<“Grade :
“<<Grade<<endk<endl;
}
};
int main( )
{
Student s1;
s1.Getdata( );
Student s2(s1);
COut<<“\nFIRST CANDIDATE DETAIL \n\n”; s1.dispResult( );
cout<<“\nSECOND CANDIDATE DETAIL \n\n”;
s2.dispResult( );
}
Output
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects 20

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 14 Classes and Objects

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Pdf Chapter 1 The Living World Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

11th Bio Zoology Guide Living World Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part I

Question 1.
A living organism is differentiated from a non-living structure based on
a. Reproduction
b. Growth
c. Metabolism
d. All the above
Answer:
d. All the above

Question 2.
A group of organisms having similar traits of a rank is
a. Species
b. Taxon
c. Genus
d. Family
Answer:
b. Taxon

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 3.
Every unit of classification regardless of its rank is
a. Taxon
b. Variety
c. Species
d. Strain
Answer:
a. Taxon

Question 4.
Which of the following is not present in the same rank?
a. Primata
b. Orthoptera
c. Diptera
d. Insecta
Answer:
a. Primata

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 5.
What taxonomic aid gives comprehensive information about a taxon?
a. Taxonomic Key
b. Herbarium
c. Flora
d. Monograph
Answer:
a. Taxonomic Key

Question 6.
Who coined the term biodiversity?
a. Walter Rosen
b. AG Tansley
c. Aristotle
d. AP de Candole
Answer:
a. Walter Rosen

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 7.
Cladogram considers the following characters
a. Physiological and Biochemical
b. Evolutionary and Phylogenetic
c. Taxonomic and systematic
d. None of the above
Answer:
b. Evolutionary and Phylogenetic

Question 8.
The molecular taxonomic tool consists of
a. DNA and RNA
b. Mitochondria and Endoplasmic reticulum
c. Cell wall and Membrane proteins
d. All the above
Answer:
a. DNA and RNA

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 10.
Differentiate between probiotics and pathogenic bacteria
Answer:

Probiotics Pathogenic bacteria
1. It converts the milk into curd (Eg.) Lactobacillus It causes diseases in plants and animals
2. It decomposes debris. Tomato – bacterial species
3. By the action of fermentation vinegar is produced. (Eg.) Acetobacter Anthrax, Tuberculosis Pneumonia Tetanus,

Question 11.
Why mule is sterile?
Answer:
Mule gets one set of chromosomes (32) from male parent, horse and one set of chromosomes (31) from female parent, donkey. These two sets of chromosomes do not match with each other and cannot produce gametes by meiosis. Hence mule is sterile in nature.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 12.
What is the role of Charles Darwin in relation to the concept of species?
Answer:
Charles Darwin’s book on Origin of Species explains the evolutionary connections of species by the process of natural selection.

Question 13.
Why elephants and other wild animals are entering the human living areas?
Answer:

  • For the construction of houses, dams, and factories forests are destroyed. The area surface of forests is also getting reduced.
  • As the bull elephant is hunted for their tusks the cow elephant during breeding season enters in to the dwelling area of people.

Question 14.
What is the difference between a Zoo and a wildlife sanctuary?

Zoo Wildlife Sanctuary
1. They have formed artificially. It’s a place of nature.
2. Animals are in houses within the enclosure. Animals roam freely in their natural surrounding.
3. They are formed for the purpose of free time enjoyment of people. They are not formed for the purpose of enjoyment.

Question 15.
Can we use recent molecular tools to identify and classify organisms?
Answer:
The recent molecular taxonomical tools can be used to identify and classify the organism. The following molecular techniques and approaches are used in molecular tools.

  1. DNA barcoding – Short genetic marker in an organism’s DNA to identify whether it belongs to a particular species.
  2. DNA hybridization – Measures the degree of genetic similarity between pools of DNA sequences.
  3. DNA fingerprinting – to identify an individual from a sample of DNA by looking at unique patterns in their DNA.
  4. Restriction Fragment Length Polymorphism (RFLP) Analysis- the difference in homologous DNA sequences can be detected by the presence of fragments of different lengths after digestion of DNA samples.
  5. Polymerase chain reaction (PCR) sequencing- to amplify a specific gene or portion of a gene.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 16.
Explain the role of Latin and Greek names in Biology.
Answer:
Aristotle (384 to 322 BC) was the first to classify all animals in his Historia Animalium in Latin. He classified the living organisms into plants and animals. Animals were classified as walking (terrestrial), flying (birds), and swimming (aquatic) based on their locomotion.

He classified the animals with red blood cells as Enaima and those without red blood cells as Anaima. Though his method of classification had limitations, his contribution to biology was remarkable. Theophrastus did his research on the classification of plants. He was known as the Father of Botany.

Part II 

11th Bio Zoology Guide The Living World Additional Important Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The smallest taxon among the following is ………. (PMT-94)
(a) class
(b) order
(c) species
(d) genus
Answer:
(c) species

Question 2.
Aristotle has classified organisms based on the following category of locomotion.
a. Walking & bore dwellers
b. Flying & arboreal
c. Swimmers & aquatic
d. All the above.
Answer:
c. Swimmers & aquatic
d. All the above.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 3.
Species is
(a) not related to evolution
(b) specific class of evolution
(c) specific unit of evolution
(d) fertile specific unit in the evolutionary history of a race
Answer:
(d) fertile specific unit in the evolutionary history of a race

Question 4.
Whose researchers confirm that species is a fundamental unit of classification.
a. John Ray
b. R.H. Whittaker
c. CarlWoese
d. Cavalier-Smith
Answer:
a. John Ray

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 5.
A group of plants or animals with similar traits of any rank is kept under ………. (PMT-96)
(a) species
(b) genus
(c) order
(d) taxon
Answer:
(d) taxon

Question 6.
Who has developed binomial nomenclature.
a. Carolus Linnaeus
b. Augustin
c. Aristotle
d. Ernst Haeckel
Answer:
a. Carolous Linnaeus

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 7.
New systematic and the concept of life was given by ……….. (BHU-98)
(a) Huxley
(b) Odom
(c) Elton
(d) Linnaeus
Answer:
(c) Elton

Question 8.
The three domains classification is based on the difference in the gene.
a. 60s rRNA
b. 70s rRNA
c. l6s rRNA
d. m RNA
Answer:
c. l6s rRNA

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 9.
Which of the following will form a new species? (PMT-98)
(a) inter breeding
(b) variations
(c) differential reproduction
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) variations

Question 10.
Find out the correct sequence by matching.
A. Augustin Pyramus de Candole – Father of Botany
B. Aristotle – Father of Modern Taxonomy
C. Carolus Linnaeus – Father of Taxonomy
D. Theophrastus – Introduces Taxonomy
Answer:
D. Theophrastus – Introduces Taxonomy

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 11.
Crosses between animals – Match.
A. Male Horse + Female Donkey – Tigon
B. Male Donkey + Female Horse – Tiger
C. Male Lion + Female Tiger – Mule
D. Male Tiger + Female Lion – Hinny
a) A-II, B -1, C – IV, D – III
b) A-IV, B -1, C – II, D – III
c) A-I, B-II, C-III, D-IV
d) A-IV, B-I, C-II, D-III
Answer:
A-II, B -I, C – IV, D – III

Question 12.
In classification, the category below the level of family is ……….. (CET-98)
(a) class
(b) species
(c) phylum
(d) genus
Answer:
(d) genus

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 13.
Find out the wrong pair
a. Peacock – Pavocristatus
b. Tiger – Pantheratigeris
c. Man -Homosapiens
d. Domestic crow – Salcopopsindica
Answer:
d. Domestic crow – Salcopopsindica

Question 14.
Find the correct match.
1. John ray -a. Five kingdom concept
2. Linnaeus -b. Cladogram
3. Ernest Haeckel -c. Binomial nomenclature
4. R.H. Whittaker – d. Methodus Plantarum
a. 1 -d,2-c,3-b,4-a
b. 1-a,2-b,3-c,4-d
c. 1 – c, 2 – a, 3 – b, 4 – d
d. 1 – d, 2 – c, 3 – a, 4 – b
Answer:
a. 1 -d,2-c,3-b,4-a

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World
Question 15.
Which of the following taxons cover a greater number of organisms?(PMT-2001)
(a) order
(b) family
(c) genus
(d) phylum
Answer:
(d) phylum

Question 16.
Which class of protozoa is totally parasitic? (BHU 1994)
(a) Sporozoa
(b) Mastigophora
(c) Ciliate
(d) Sarcodina
Answer:
(a) Sporozoa

Question 17.
Reproduction in Paramecium is controlled by ………. (BHU 1999).
(a) flagella
(b) cell wall
(c) micronucleus
(d) macronucleus
Answer:
(c) micronucleus

Question 18.
In the life cycle of Plasmodium, exflagellation occurs in ……….. (BHU 2007)
(a) sporozoites
(b) microgametes
(c) macrogametes
(d) signet ring
Answer:
(b) microgametes

Question 19.
Excretion in Amoeba occurs through ………… (DPMT 1997)
(a) lobopodia
(b) plasma membrane
(c) uroid portion
(d) contractile vacuole
Answer:
(d) contractile vacuole

Question 20.
Method of dispersal in Amoeba is ……….. (DPMT 1995)
(a) locomotion
(b) encystment
(c) sporulation
(d) binary fission
Answer:
(b) encystment

(2 marks)

II. Very Short Questions

Question 1.
Define ecosystem.
Answer:
The ecosystem is defined as a community of living organisms (plants and animals), non-living things (minerals, climate, soil, sunlight, and water), and their interrelationships, e.g. Forest and grassland.

Question 2.
What are the unique characteristic features of living organisms?
Answer:

  • Cellular organization
  • Nutrition
  • Respiration
  • Metabolism
  • Movement
  • Reproduction
  • Excretion
  • Homeostasis

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 3.
The mating between different species produces sterile offsprings.
Answer:
The maternal and paternal chromosomes of the offsprings produced by the mating between different species are not identical and hence gametes are not produced by meiotic division.

Question 4.
What is the need for classification?
Answer:
The basic need for classification are:

  • To identify and differentiate closely related species.
  • To know the variation among the species.
  • To understand the evolution of the species.
  • To create a phylogenetic tree among the different groups.
  • To conveniently study living organisms.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 5.
Why are molecular tools used now to study taxonomy?
Answer:
Molecular tools are accurate and authentic. Hence they are used to study taxonomy.

Question 6.
What are the features of systematics?
Answer:

  • Identifying, describing, naming, arranging, preserving, and documenting the organisms.
  • Investigating the evolutionary history of the species, their adaptations to the environment, and the interrelationship among species.

Question 7.
What is the phylogenetic tree?
Answer:
It’s a method of representing evolutionary relationships with the help of a tree diagram known as a cladogram.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 8.
What are the limitations of Aristotle’s classification?
Answer:
Many organisms were not fitting into his classification. Frogs have lungs and they are amphibians while their larva, the tadpole is aquatic and respires through gills. It is difficult to classify frogs according to his method. All flying organisms such as birds, bats, flying insects were grouped together. Ostrich, emu, and penguin are flightless birds and hence they cannot be classified by his method.

Question 9.
What are the three domains of life indicate?
Answer:
This system emphasizes the separation of prokaryotes into two domains.

Question 10.
What is numerical taxonomy?
Answer:
The evaluation of resemblances and differences of organisms through statistical methods followed by computer analysis to establish the numerical degree of relationship among them is known as numerical taxonomy.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 11.
What is the seven taxonomic hierarchy?
Answer:

  1. Kingdom
  2. Phyla
  3. Class
  4. Order
  5. Family
  6. Genus
  7. Species

Question 12.
Define species?
Answer:
It is a group of animals having similar morphological features and is reproductively isolated to produce fertile offspring.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 13.
What is cladistic classification?
Answer:
Cladistic classification is the method of classifying organisms based on genetic differences among all species in a phylogenetic tree.

Question 14.
Define order?
Answer:
Order is an assemblage of one or more related families which show few common features. (Eg) Family Candiae and Felidae are placed in the order Carnivora.

Question 15.
Define class.
Answer:
Class includes one or more related orders with some common characters.

Question 16.
Define Phylum.
Answer:
The group of classes with similar distinctive characteristics constitute phylum.

Question 17.
Define animal kingdom.
Answer:
All living animals belonging to various phyla are included in the kingdom.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 18.
What are the features that we have to keep in mind in naming them scientifically?
Answer:

  • Morphology
  • Genetic information
  • Habitat
  • Feeding pattern
  • Adaptations
  • Evolutions

Question 19.
Define species.
Answer:
A species is a group of organisms that have similar morphological and physiological characters which can interbreed to produce fertile offsprings.

Question 20.
What are taxonomical keys?
Answer:
Keys are based on a comparative analysis of the similarities and dissimilarities of organisms. There are separate keys for different taxonomic categories.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 21.
Distinguish between species and genus.
Answer:
Species:

  • A species is a group of interbreeding populations having similar characters.
  • It is the basic unit of classification e.g. Felis Domestica, genus species.

Genus:

  • Genus is a group of related species.
  • It is the second level in classification, e.g., Felis margarita genus species.

Question 22.
Define Zoological parks.
Answer:
These are places where wild animals are kept in protected environments under human care.
It enables us to study their food habits and behaviour.

Question 23.
What is binomial system of nomenclature?
Answer:
The system of naming the organism with two names, generic name, and specific (species) name is known as the binomial system of nomenclature, e.g. Pavo cristatus – Indian pea fowl.

Question 24.
What is printed taxonomical tools?
Answer:

  • Identification cards
  • Description
  • Field guides
  • Manuals

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 25.
What is the phylogenetic tree?
Answer:
It is the inferred evolutionary relationships upon similarities and differences in their physical or genetic characters.

Question 26.
What is trinomial system of nomenclature?
Answer:
The system of naming the organism with three names, generic name, specific name (species), and sub-species name is known as the trinomial system of nomenclature, e.g. Corvus splendens -Indian house crow.

Question 27.
What are shared characters?
Answer:
A shared character is one that two lineages have in common.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 28.
What are derived characters?
Answer:
Derived character is one that evolved in the lineage leading up to a clade.

Question 29.
Vandaloor Zoological park.
Answer:

  • It is situated in the South-Western Part of Chennai.
  • It spreads over an area of 1500 acres.
  • It is one of the largest zoological parks in India.
  • The Zoo houses 2553 species of both flora and fauna.

(3 marks)

III. Short Questions

Question 1.
Define ecosystem.
Answer:
The ecosystem is defined as a community of living organisms (plants and animals), non-living things (minerals, climate, soil, sunlight, and water), and their interrelationships, e.g. Forest and grassland.

Question 2.
On which criteria the systematic classification is done?
Answer:

  • Evolutionary history.
  • Environmental adaptations.
  • Environmental relationship.
  • The interrelationship between species.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 3.
Give an account of Aristotle’s classification?
Answer:

  •  In his book ‘History of Animals,’ he classifies plants and animals into two categories.
  • Based on locomotion walking, flying, swimming,
  • He classifies the organisms on the basis of blood.
  • He classifies the animals into two as ‘Enaima’ with blood and those without blood as’ Anaima’

Question 4.
Who has developed the five-kingdom classification?
Answer:

  1. R.H. Whittaker proposed the five-kingdom classification.
  2. It is based on cell structure.
  3. Mode of nutrition.
  4. Mode of reproduction.
  5. Phylogenetic relationships.

The kingdoms are

  • Monera
  • Protista
  • Fungi
  • Plantae
  • Animalia

Question 5.
What are the special features of frogs that are identified in Western Gauts?
Answer:

  • This frog has shiny purple skin.
  • There is a light blue ring around the eyes.
  • It has a pointy big nose.
  • It’s Zoological name Nasikabatrachus Bhupathi.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 6.
What are the rules to be followed in the nomenclature of organisms?
Answer:
The scientific name should be italicized in printed form and the generic name and specific name should be underlined separately if it is handwritten.

  • The first alphabet of the generic name should be of uppercase.
  • The specific name (species) should be in lower case letters.
  • The name or abbreviated name of the scientist who first published the scientific name may be written after the specific (species) name along with the year of publication, e.g. Felis Leo Linn., 1958.
  • If the specific (species) name is framed after any person’s name, the name of the species shall end with i, ii or ae. e.g. Ground – dwelling lizard Cyrtodactylus varadgiri.

Question 7.
Name some Automated species identification tools or cyber tools.
Answer:
ALIS: Automated Leafhopper Identification System.
DAISY: Digital Automated Identification System.
ABIS: Automatic Bee Identification System.
SPIDA: Species Identified Automatically (spiders, wasp, bee wing characters).
Draw wing: Honey bee wing identification.

 (5 marks)

V. Essay Questions

Question 1.
List the defects of Aristotle’s classification.
Answer:

  • Aristotle’s classification system had limitations and many organisms were not fitting into his classification.
  • The tadpoles of frogs are born in water and have gills but when they metamorphosed into adult frogs they have lungs and can live both in water and on land. There is no answer to this question.
  • Based on locomotion birds bats and flying insects were grouped either just by observing one single characteristic feature the flying ability.
  • On the contrary to the above-said example, the ostrich emu and penguin are all birds but cannot fly. He did not classify them as birds.

Question 2.
What is special about the Domain Archaea?
Answer:

  • This domain includes single-celled organisms the prokaryotes.
  • They have the ability to grow in extreme conditions like volcano vents hot springs and polar ice caps hence are called extremophiles.
  • They are capable of synthesizing their food without sunlight and oxygen by utilizing hydrogen sulphide and other chemicals from the volcanic vents.
  • Some of them produced methane.
  • Few live in salty environments and called Halophiles.
  • Some thrive in acidic environments and are called thormoacidophiles.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 3.
What is special about the domain bacteria?
Answer:

  1. Bacterias are prokaryotic.
  2. They do not have a definite nucleus and do not have histones.
  3. They have circular DNA.
  4. They do not possess membrane-bound organelles except for 70s ribosomes.
  5. Their cell wall contains peptidoglycans.
  6. Many are decomposers. Some are photo-synthesizers and few cause diseases.
  7. There are beneficial probiotic bacteria. (Eg.) Cyanobacteria produce oxygen.

Question 4.
What is the significance of cladistic classification?
Answer:
Cladistic classification takes into account ancestral characters (traits commons for the entire group) and derived characters (traits whose structure and function differ from the ancestral characters). The accumulation of derived characters resulted in the formation of new subspecies.

Question 5.
What are the basic roles to be followed in naming the animals?
Answer:

  • The scientific name should be italicized in printed form and if handwritten it should be underlined separately.
  • The generic name’s first alphabet should be in uppercase.
  • The specific name should be in lower case.
  • The scientific names of any two organisms are not similar.
  • The name of the scientist who first publishes the scientific name may be written after the species name along with the year of publication.
  • (Eg.) Lion – Felis Leo Linn. 1758 (or) Felis Leo L. 1758

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 1 The Living World

Question 6.
What are the rules to be followed in the nomenclature of organisms?
Answer:
The scientific name should be italicized in printed form and the generic name and specific name should be underlined separately if it is handwritten.

  • The first alphabet of the generic name should be of uppercase.
  • The specific name (species) should be in lower case letters.
  • The name or abbreviated name of the scientist who first published the scientific name may be written after the specific (species) name along with the year of publication, e.g. Felis Leo Linn., 1958.
  • If the specific (species) name is framed after any person’s name, the name of the species shall end with i, ii, or ae. e.g. Ground – dwelling lizard Cyrtodactylus varadgirii.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Pdf Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

11th Bio Zoology Guide Trends in Economic Zoology Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part I

Question 1.
Which one of the following is not related to vermiculture?
a) Maintains soil fertility
b) Break down of inorganic matter
c) Gives porosity, aeration and moister holding capacity
d) Degradation of non biodegradable solid waste

a) a and b is correct
b) c and d is correct
c) b and d is not correct
d) a and c is not correct
Answer:
c) b and d is not correct

Question 2.
Which one of the following is not an endemic species of earthworm?
a) Perionyx
b) Lampito
c) Eudrillus
d) Octochaetona
Answer:
c) Eudrillus

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 3.
Match the following
1) Bombyxmori-
a) Champa – I) Muga
2) Antheraeaassamensis
b) Mulberry – II) Eri
3) Antheraeamylitta-
c) Arjun – III) Tassar
4) Attacus ricini –
d) Castor – IV) Mulberry

Select the correct one
a) 1-b-IV
b) 2-a-I
c) 3-c -III
d) 4-d-II
Answer:
c) 3-c -III

Question 4.
Silk is obtained from
a) Laccifer lacca
b) Nosema bombycis
c) Attacus ricird
d) Attacus mylitta
Answer:
c) Attacus ricird

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 5.
Assertion: Nuptial flight is a unique flight taken by the queen bee followed by serveral drones.
Reason: The queen bee produces a chemical substance called pheromone. The drones in that area are attracted to the pheromone and then mating takes place.
a) Assertion and reason is correct but not related
b) Assertion and reason is incorrect but related
c) Assertion and reason is correct but related
d) Assertion and reason is incorrect but not related
Answer:
c) Assertion and reason is correct but related

Question 6.
Rearing of honey bee is called
a) Sericulture
b) Lac culture
c) Vermiculture
d) Apiculture
Answer:
d) Apiculture

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 7.
Which of the statement regarding Lac insect
a) A microscopic, resinous crawling scale insect
b) Inserts its proboscis into plant tissue suck juices and grows
c) Secretes lac from the hind end of body.
d) The male lac insect is responsible for large scale production of lac.
Answer:
d) The male lac insect is responsible for large scale production of lac.

Question 8.
Aquaponics is a technique which is
a) A combination of aquaculture and fish culture
b) A combination of aquaculture and hydroponics
c) A combination of vermiculture and hydroponics
d) A combination of aquaculture and prawn culture
Answer:
b) A combination of aquaculture and hydroponics

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 9.
Prawn belongs to the class
a) Crustacea
b) Annelida
c) Coelenterata
d) Echinodermata
Answer:
a) Crustacea

Question 10.
Pearl oyster belongs to the class
a) Gastropoda
b) Cephalopoda
c) Scaphapoda
d) Pelecypoda
Answer:
d) Pelecypoda

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 11.
Inland fisheries are
a) deep sea fishing
b) capturing fishes from sea coast
c) Raising and capturing fishes in fresh water
d) oil extraction from fish
Answer:
c) Raising and capturing fishes in fresh water

Question 12.
Induced breeding technique is used in
a) Marine fishery
b) Capture fishery
c) Culture fishery
d) Inland fishery
Answer:
d) Inland fishery

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 13.
Isinglass is used in
a) Preparation
b) Clearing of wines
c) Distillation of wines
d) Preservation of wines
Answer:
b) Clearing of wines

Question 14.
Animal husbandry is the science of rearing, feeding and caring, breeding and disease control of animals. It ensures supply of proper nutrition to our growing population through activities like increased production and improvement of animal products like milk, eggs, meat, honey etc.
a) Poultry production depends upon the photoperiod. Discuss
b) Polyculture of fishes is of great importance.
Answer:
(a) Light is an important aspect of poultry production. Light stimulates the secretion of FSH and LH. A wavelength between 400 and 700 nm is required. The decrease in the photoperiod will affect egg production.

(b) A few selected fishes belonging to different species are stocked together in proper proportion in a pond. This mixed farming is termed composite fish farming or polyculture. It is of great importance because

  1. All available riches are fully utilized
  2. Compatible species do not harm each other
  3. There is no competition among different species

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 15.
Assertion: The best quality of pearl is known as lingha pearl and obtained from marine oysters.
Reason: Nacre is secreted continuously by the epithelial layer of the mantle and deposited around the foreign particle
a) Assertion is true Reason is false
b) Assertion and Reason is false
c) Asserion is false but Reason is true
d) Assertion and Reason are true
Answer:
d) Assertion and Reason are true

Question 16.
Choose the correctly matched pair
a) Egg layers-Brahma
c) Dual purpose-White Plymouth rock
b) Broiler types -Leghorn
d) Ornamental breeds -Silkie
Answer:
d) Ornamental breeds -Silkie

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 17.
Write the advantages of vermicomposting.
Answer:

  1. Vermicomposting provides excellent organic manure for sustainable agro-practices.
  2. Marketing of vermicompost can provide a supplementary income.
  3. Vermicompost is rich in essential plant nutrients.
  4. It improves soil structure, texture, aeration, and water holding capacity and prevents soil erosion.
  5. It is rich in nutrients and an eco-friendly amendment to soil for farming and terrace gardening,
  6. It enhances seed germination and ensures good plant growth.

Question 18.
Name the three castes in a honey bee colony.
Answer:

  1. Queen bee
  2. Drone
  3. Worker bee

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 19.
Name the following

  1. The largest bee in the colony:
  2. The kind of flight which the new virgin queen takes along with the drones out of the hive:

Answer:

  1. The queen.
  2. Nuptial flight.

Question 20.
What are the main duties of a worker bee?
Answer:
Each worker has to perform different types of work in her lifetime. During the first half of her life, she becomes a nurse bee attending to indoor duties such as secretion of royal jelly, prepares bee- bread to feed the larvae, feeds the queen, takes care of the queen and drones, secretes beeswax, builds combs, cleans and fans the beehive. Then she becomes a soldier and guards the beehive. In the second half of her life lasting for three weeks, she searches and gathers the pollen, nectar, propolis, and water.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 21.
What happens to the drones after the mating flight?
Answer:
They die after copulation.

Question 22.
Give the economic importance of silkworm?
Answer:

  1. The rearing of silkworm on a commercial scale is called sericulture.
  2. It is an agro-based industry comprising of
    • Cultivation of food plants for the silkworms.
    • Rearing of silkworms.
    • Reeling and spinning of silk.
  3. Silk fibers are utilized in preparing silk clothes.
  4. Silk is used in industries and for military purposes.
  5. Silk is used in the manufacture of fishing fibres, parachutes, cartridge bags, insulation coils for telephone, wireless receivers, tyres of racing cars, filter fibres, in medical dressings and suture materials.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 23.
What are the nutritive values of fishes?
Answer:
Economic importance of fish:-
Fishes form a rich source of protein food and provide a good staple food to tide over the nutritional needs of man. Fish species such as sardines, mackerel, tuna, herrings have high amino acids concentration particularly histidine which is responsible for the meaty flavor of the flesh. It is rich in fat such as omega 3 fatty acids. Minerals such as calcium, magnesium, phosphorus, potassium, iron, manganese, iodine and copper.

Some of the fish by-products are: Fish oil is the most important fish by-product. It is derived from fish liver and from the fish body.

Fish liver oil is derived from the liver which is rich in vitamin A and D, whereas fish body oil has high content of iodine, not suitable for human consumption, but is used in the manufacture of laundry soaps, paints and cosmetics. Fish meal is prepared from fish waste after extracting oil from the fish.

The dried wastes are used to prepare food for pig, poultry and cattle. The wastes obtained during the preparation of fish meal are widely used as manure.

Isinglass is high-grade collagen produced from dried air bladder or swim bladder of certain fishes viz. catfish and carps. The processed bladder which is dissolved in hot water forms gelatin having adhesive property. It is primarily used for clarification of wine, beer and vinegar.

Question 24.
Give the economic importance of prawn fishery?
Answer:
The flesh of prawns is palatable and rich in glycogen, a protein with low-fat content.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 25.
Give the economic importance of lac insect.
Answer:
Economic importance of Lac:

  1. Lac is largely used as a sealing wax and adhesive for optical instruments.
  2. It is used in the electric industry, as it is a good insulator.
  3. It is used in preparations of shoe and leather polishes and as a protective coating of wood.
  4. It is used in laminating paper board, photographs, engraved materials and plastic moulded articles.
  5. Used as a filling material for gold ornaments.

Question 26.
List any three common uses of shellac.
Answer:

  1. Shellac with denatured alcohol is used to remove dust on the walls.
  2. Coating of metals with shellac prevents rusting.
  3. Shellac coating on citrus fruits increases their shelf life.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 27.
Name any two trees on which lac insect grows?
Answer:

  1. Acacia catechu
  2. Acacia nilotica

Question 28.
What is seed lac?
Answer:
The lac after grinding the dust particles are removed. The resultant lac is called ‘seed lac’.

Question 29.
Define cross-breeding?
Answer:
Breeding between a superior male of one breed with a superior female of another breed is known as cross-breeding.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 30.
What are the advantages of artificial insemination?
Answer:
Advantages of artificial insemination:

  1. It increases the rate of conception
  2. It avoids genital diseases
  3. Semen can be collected from injured bulls which have desirable traits
  4. Superior animals located apart can be bred successfully.

Question 31.
Discuss the various techniques adopted in cattle breeding?
Answer:
There are two methods of animal breeding, namely inbreeding and outbreeding.
1. Inbreeding:
Breeding between animals of the same breed for 4-6 generations is called inbreeding.

2. Outbreeding:
The breeding between unrelated animals is called outbreeding. It is done in three ways;

  • Outcrossing: It is the breeding between unrelated animals of the same breed but having no common ancestry. The offspring of such a cross is called an outcross.
  • Crossbreeding: Breeding between a superior male of one breed with a superior female of another breed. The cross-bred progeny has superior traits (hybrid vigour or heterosis).
  • Interspecific hybridization: In this method of breeding mating is between male and females of two different species.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 32.
Mention the advantages of MOET.
Answer:
Multiple Ovulation Embryo Transfer Technology (MOET) is a method of propagation of animals with desirable traits. This technology is used to produce high milk-yielding females and high-quality meat-yielding bulls in a short time.

Question 33.
Write the peculiar characters of the duck.
Answer:
The peculiarity of ducks:
The ducks body is fully covered with oily feathers. They have a layer of fat under their skin which prevents it from getting wet. They lay eggs at night or in the morning. The ducks feed on rice bran, kitchen wastes, waste fish and snails.

Part – II

11th Bio Zoology Guide Trends in Economic Zoology Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose The Best Options

Question 1.
During the process of vermiculture which of the following does not happen?
(a) Decomposition of organic food waste
(b) Supplying nutrients to the soil
(c) Use of earthworms in the process
(d) Synthesis of organic substances
Answer:
(d) Synthesis of organic substances

Question 2.
Who has proposed the term vermi tech?
a) Sultan Ismail
b) Darwin
c) Linnaeus
d) Albert William
Answer:
a) Sultan Ismail

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 3.
The technology of composting and bioremediation of soils and other activities by application of earthworm is called? …………………
(a) Vermitech
(b) Vermicast
(c) Vermicompost
(d) Vermiculture
Answer:
(a) Vermitech

Question 4.
Which of the following is the earthworm of the native soil?
a) Periyonx Eisenia
b) Eudrilus eugeniae lampito mauritii
c) Periyonyx excavatus, octohaetona
d) all the above
Answer:
c) Periyonyx excavates, octohaetona

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 5.
Which of the following is the exotic species used for vermicomposting?
(a) Eudrilus eugeniae
(b) Lampito mauritii
(c) Periyonyx excavatus
(d) Octochaetona serrata
Answer:
(a) Eudrilus eugeniae

Question 6.
Who has known the utility of silk even before 3000 years?
a) Europe
b) African’s
c) China
d) India
Answer:
c) China

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 7.
Attacus ricini produces ……………. silk?
(a) Muga
(b) Tassar
(c) Mulberry
(d) Eri
Answer:
(d) Eri

Question 8.
Match and find the correct sequences.
I. Bombyx mori – a) Erisilk
II. Antheraea assamensis – b) Tisaarsilk
III. Antheraea mylitta – c) Mugasilk
IV. Attacus ricini – d) Mulberry silk
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 1
Answer:
a) I – d, II – c, III – b, IV – a

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 9.
Match the silk moth with their respective leaves.
I. Bombyx mori – a) Castor
II. Antheraea assamensis – b) Arjun
III. Antheraea mylitta – c) Champa
IV. Attacus ricini – d) Mulberry
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 2
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 3
Answer:
a) I -d, II – c, III – b, IV – a

Question 10.
Muscardine is a- disease of silkworms caused by a …………………..
(a) Bacterium
(b) Virus
(c) Protozoan
(d) Fungus
Answer:
(d) Fungus

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 11.
Name the branches that involve agriculture and industry.
a) Vermiculture
b) Pisciculture
c) Sericulture
d) Poultry
Answer:
c) Sericulture

Question 12.
Life span of Bombyxmori
a) 2-3 days
b) 2 – 4 days
c) 2-5 days
d) 4 – 7 days
Answer:
a) 2 – 3 days

Question 13.
What is the number of eggs laid by Bombyx mori once?
a) 500 – 800
b) 400 – 500
c) 400 – 450
d) 600-700
Answer:
b) 400 – 500

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 14.
What is the length of matured silkworm?
a) 7.5 cm
b) 7cm
c) 8.5 cm
d) 8 cm
Answer:
a) 7.5 cm

Question 15.
What would be the length of silk fibre in a cocoon?
a) 1000-1100 m
b) 1000-1200 m
c) 1000-1500m
d) 1000 – 1300m
Answer:
b) 1000 – 1200m

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 16.
What is meant by mariculture?
a) Rearing of mulberry plants
b) Rearing of castor plants
c) Vermiculture
d) Apiculture
Answer:
a) Rearing of mulberry plants

Question 17.
What is meant by voltinism?
a) No of broods raised
b) Cocoon
c) Spinneret
d) None of the above
Answer:
a) No of broods raised

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 18.
What is the ideal period for mulberry culture?
a) January, February, and November, December
b) March, April and June, July
c) June, July, and Nov, December
d) October, November and December, January
Answer:
c) June, July, and November, December

Question 19.
Find the odd one out.
a) Healthy silk moths are allowed to mate for 4 hours
b) Female lays about 400 eggs in 24 hours
c) The small larvae hatch between 7-10 days after incubation
d) The optimum temperature for rearing silk moth is 25°C – 30°C
Answer:
d) The optimum temperature for rearing silk moth is 25°C – 30°C

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 20.
Silkmoth matured in about days
a) 40 days
b) 45 days
c) 50 days
d) 35 days
Answer:
b) 4 5 days

Question 21.
The cocoon is soaked in hot water at a temperature for minutes.
a) 95°C – 97°C -10 -15 minute
b) 95°C – 97°C – 5 -10 minutes
c) 90°C – 95°C – 7 -10 minutes
d) 100°C – 105°C – 2 – 5 minutes
Answer:
a) 95°C – 97°C -10 -15 minute

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 22.
The areas where a lot of beehives can be placed.
a) Honey culture
b) Apiculture
c) Apiaries
d) all the above
Answer:
c) apiaries

Question 23.
The nectar got from the flowers is converted into honey by the enzyme.
a) Invertase
b) Zymase
c) Lipase
d) None of the above
Answer:
a) Invertase

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 24.
Find whether the following is true or false and find the correct sequence.
I) There is only one queen bee in a colony
II) Worker bees are around 5000 – 10000
III) The queen bee in its lifetime in 2 – 4 years lays 20 lakhs eggs.
IV) When the queen loses its fertility another worker bee becomes a queen by taking royal Jelly.
a) I – true, II – False, III – False, IV – true
b) I – true, II – False, III – true, IV – True
c) I – false, II – true, III – true, IV – true
d) I – false, II – true, III – false, IV – false
Answer:
a) I – true, II – false, III -false, IV – true.

Question 25.
How many days are needed for the worker bee to becoming mature done?
a) 15 days
b) 21 days
c) 20 days
d) 18 days
Answer:
b) 21 days

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 26.
What is the life span of worker bees?
a) 6 weeks
b) 5 weeks
c) 7 weeks
d) 3 weeks
Answer:
a) 6 weeks

Question 27.
What are drones?
a) a male bee from unfertilised egg
b) a female bee from fertilised egg
c) a queen bee from fertilised egg
d) a worker bee after eating royal jelly becomes a queen
Answer:
a) a male bee from unfertilised egg

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 28.
Find the wrong pair?
a) Drone cell – Comb queen bee
b) King of honeycomb – Drone
c) Swarming – Worker bee flying with the queen bee
d) Male bee – After mating it will die
Answer:
a) Drone cell – Comb queen bee

Question 29.
Read the following statement and find the correct sequence.
I) The honeycomb is built from the abdominal secretion of a worker bee
II) The chamber of the honeycomb are hexagonal in shape
III) The young stages of honey bees accommodate the lower and central cells of the hive
IV) In Apis dorsata the brood of hive cells are similar in size and shape
a) I – false, II – false, III – true, IV – true
b) I – true, II – true, III – false, IV – false
c) I – true, II – true, III – true, IV – true
d) I – false, II – true, III – true, IV – false
Answer:
c) I – true, II – true, III – true, IV – true

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 30.
Assertion A: The pure wax is white in colour.
Reason: B The pure wax contains carotenoids pigments.
a) Assertion A true Reason B true
b) Assertion A false, Reason B false
c) Assertion A true Reason B false
d) Assertion A false, Reason B true
Answer:
c) Assertion A true Reason B false.

Question 31.
Find the correct sequence in the following.
I) Bee wax is secreted by the abdomen of the worker bees.
II) The resinous chemical substance present in the wax is called propolis.
III) The pure wax is white in colour.
IV) The yellow of the wax is due to the carotenoid pigments.
a) I – true, II – true, III – true, IV – false
b) I – false, II – false, III – true, IV – true
c) I – true, II – false, III – true, IV – true
d) I – true, II – true, III – true, IV – true
Answer:
d) I – true, II – true, III – true, IV – true

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 32.
Find whether the statement regarding Lac insect is true or false
I) Tachardia lacca produces lac.
II) The Lac insect is a parasite on host plant karanagalli, karuvelai
III) The female lac insects are small
IV) The female lac insects after fertilisation lays about 200 to 500 eggs
a) I – true, II – false, III – false, IV – true
b) I – true, II – true, III – true, IV – false
c) I – true, II – true, III – false, IV – true
d) I – true, II – false, III – true, IV – false
Answer:
c) I – true, II – true, III – false, IV – true

Question 33.
What is the ideal salinity for fish culture in brackish water?
a) 0.5-30ppt
b) 0.1-25ppt
c) 0.1-30ppt
d) 1-10ppt
Answer:
a) 0.5 – 30 ppt

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 34.
Which one of the following is the correct pair?
a) Exotic breed – Cyprinus carpiols
b) Apiculture – Reeling
c) Seri culture – Propolis
d) Milch breed – Malvi
Answer:
a) Exotic breed – Cyprinus Carpio

Question 35.
Name the exotic fishes of India.
a) Catlacatla
b) Lapeorohita
c) Cirrhina mirgala
d) Cyprinus carbeo
Answer:
d) Cyprinus carbeo

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 36.
Name the vitamin found in fish oil?
a) A and E
b) A and D
c) A and C
d) A and K
Answer:
b) A and D

Question 37.
Ising glass is received from the part of the fish
a) Dried gills
b) Dried stomach
c) Dried air sacs
d) Dried liver
Answer:
c) Dried air sacs

Question 38.
What is the nutritive value of crustaceans?
a) Rich in glycogen protein with low-fat content
b) Rich in protein low in glycogen
c) Rich in glycogen low in fat content
d) Rich in protein and fat
Answer:
a) Rich in glycogen protein with low-fat content

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 39.
These are freshwater prawns.
a) Penaeus indicus
b) Macrobrachium rosenbergi
c) Penaeus monodon
d) Metapenaeus
Answer:
b) Macrobrochium rosenbergi

Question 40.
What is the optimum temperature and PH for prawn culture in a hatching tank
a) 24°C – 30°C PH – 7 – 8
b) 20°C – 22°C PH -10 -12
c) 20°C – 23°C PH – 5 – 6
d) 19°C – 20°C PH – 9 -10
Answer:
a) 24°C – 30°C – PH – 7 – 8

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 41.
Find the correct statement regarding the preparations of prawn form.
I) For algal growth, and for the subsequent stocking of prawns, it is essential to drain off the water and sundry the bottom.
II) Lime should be applied to absorb excess C02 and to supply calcium which is required for moulting.
III) Fertilizers like rice, bran, poultry, and cattle dung are used to increase the fertility of the soil.
IV) Preservation of prawns is done by peeling and deveining or by cooking and peeling
a) I – true, II – true, III – false, IV – false
b) I – false, II – true, III – true, IV – true
c) I – true, II – true, III – true, IV – true
d) I – true, II – false, III – true, IV – false
Answer:
c) I – true, II – true, III -true, IV – true

Question 42.
Where is pearl cultured in India for the first time?
a) Thoothukudi 1973
b) Visahapattinum 1974
c) Rameshwaram 1975
d) Kulchall973
Answer:
a) Thoothukudi 1973

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 43.
Where are pearl oysters seen?
a) Kanyakumari coastal region a Bay of Kutch
b) Rameshwaram coastal area and Bay of Mannar
c) Nagapatinum coastal area and Thoothukudi
d) Visahapatinum coastal area and Chennai
Answer:
a) Kanyakumari coastal region a Bay of Kutch

Question 44.
The pearl oysters belong to the ‘L’ genus produce Quality pearls.
a) Gastropoda
b) Pinctada
c) Pelecypoda
d) Cephalopoda
Answer:
b) Pinctada

Question 45.
……………………….. ulturing pearl in freshwater.
a) Lamellidens
b) Mytilus
c) Loligo
d) Dentalium
Answer:
a) Lamellidens

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 46.
The marine oysters are composed of
a) Calcium carbonate
b) Sodium carbonate
c) Potassium carbonate
d) Magnesium carbonate
Answer:
a) Calcium carbonate

Question 47.
The process of killing the silkworm cocoons is called
a) Reeling
b) Stifling
c) Spinning
d) rearing
Answer:
b) Stifling

Question 48.
Assertion A: The pearl oysters got from the sea are valuable
Reason B: The pearl oysters got from freshwater is not valuable
a) Assertion A true, B false
b) Assertion A and B reason all true
c) Assertion A false, Reason B true
d) Assertion A and Bare false
Answer:
b) Assertion A and B reason all true

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 49.
What is the name of the breed that produces mule?
a) Outbreeding
b) Crossbreeding
c) Interspecific hybridization
d) Outbreeding
Answer:
c) Interspecific hybridization

Question 50.
Assertion X: 6 – 8 eggs can be produced by induction in an artificial method
Reason Y: The embryos at 8 – 32 celled stages are transferred to a surrogate mother.
a) Assertion x false y true
b) Assertion X true, Y false
c) Assertion X false, Y false
d) Assertion X and Y are true
Answer:
d) Assertion X and Y are true

Question 51.
Which of the cattle breed yields more milk than what they eat?
a) Vechur
b) Kankeyem
c) Gir
d) Ongole
Answer:
a) Vechur

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 52.
Which of the following is not a milch breed?
a) Sindhi
b) Malvi
c) Jersey
d) Gir
Answer:
b) Malvi

Question 53.
Which of the following belongs to America?
a) Silkie
b) White Plymouth rock
c) Chittagong
d) Aseel
Answer:
b) White Plymouth rock

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 54.
Name the poultry which is noted for its pugnacity?
a) Leghorn
b) Silkie
c) Brahma
d) Aseel
Answer:
d) Aseel

Question 55.
Find the odd one out
a) Leghorn – Italy
b) Chittagong – good egg yielder
c) White Plymouth rock – American breed
d) Aseel-ornamental breed
Answer:
d) Aseel – ornamental breed

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 56.
Which among the following is a wild duck?
a) Syhlet
b) Muscori
c) Pekin
d) Mallard
Answer:
d) Mallard

Question 57.
Find the wrong statement about Duck.
a) The body is covered with oily feathers.
b) The fat layer beneath their skin prevents it from getting wet
c) They lay eggs at mid-day
d) The ducks feed on rice bran kitchen wastes and snails
Answer:
c) They lay eggs at midday

(2 marks)

II. Very Short Answer

Question 1.
What is Economic Zoology?
Answer:
Economic zoology is a branch of Science that deals with economically useful animals. It involves the study of the application of animals for human welfare.

Question 2.
How are animals classified on the basis of their economic importance?
Answer:

  • Animals for food and food products.
  • Economically beneficial animals.
  • Animals of aesthetic importance.
  • Animals for scientific research.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 3.
Name the endemic earthworms of India.
Answer:

  1. Periy only x excavatus
  2. Lampito Mauritius
  3. Octo chactona serrata

Question 4.
Name the exotic species of an earthworm?
Answer:

  • Eiseniafetida,
  • Eudrilus eugeniae

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 5.
Why are earthworms called ‘friends of farmers’?
Answer:
Earthworms play a vital role in maintaining soil fertility. Hence, they are called ‘friends of farmers’.

Question 6.
What decides the economic success of the industries?
Answer:

  • It depends on the animals and their products.
  • It depends on the proper production management and development of the next generation of farm animals.

Question 7.
What is meant by vermiculture?
Answer:
It is the process of using earthworm to decompose organic food waste into a nutrient-rich material capable of supplying necessary nutrients which help to sustain plant growth.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 8.
What is meant by vermicast?
Answer:
The organic matter of soil is decomposed by earthworm and becomes nutritious rich manure for plant growth.

Question 9.
What is meant by vermicompost?
Answer:
Vermicompost is composed of vermicast which contains nutrients plant growth promoters and organic matters.

Question 10.
What is meant by vermitech?
Answer:
The application of earthworm in the technology of composting and bioremediation of soil and other activities is called vermitech.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 11.
What are the pests of earthworms?
Answer:
Ants, springtails, centipedes, slugs, mites, certain beetle larvae, birds, rats, snakes, mice, toads and other insects or animals which feed on worms.

Question 12.
What are the special characters of vermicompost?
Answer:

  • Aeration
  • draining of water
  • retains water.

Question 13.
What is meant by vermiwash?
Answer:

  • Vermi wash is a liquid collected after the passage of water through a column of vermibed.
  • It is useful as a foliar spray to enhance plant growth and field.

Question 14.
What is sericulture?
Answer:
Sericulture is an agro-based industry which denotes the commercial production of silk through silkworm rearing.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 15.
What is meant by sericulture?
Answer:
Sericulture denotes the commercial production of silk through silkworm rearing.

Question 16.
What is meant by mariculture?
Answer:
The cultivation of mulberry is called as Moriculture.

Question 17.
Which is the suitable period for mulberry cultivation?
Answer:
June, July, November, and December

Question 18.
What are the stages involved in the rearing process of silkworms?
Answer:
Disinfection of rearing house Incubation of eggs Brushing, young larval rearing Late age larval rearing.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 19.
What is meant by stifling?
Answer:
The process of killing the cocoons is called stifling,

Question 20.
What is meant by reeling?
Answer:
The process of removing the threads from the killed cocoon is called reeling.

Question 21.
What is cooking?
Answer:
The process of soaking cocoons in hot water (95° – 97°) for 10 – 15 minutes to soften the gum that binds the silk threads together is called cooking.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 22.
What are Uzi files?
Answer:
These files which can attack silkworm.

Question 23.
What is meant by cooking?
Answer:
The cocoons are soaked in hot water at 95° – 97°c for 10 -15 minutes to soften the gum that binds, the silk threads together are called cooking.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 24.
What is spun silk?
Answer:
The silk produced from silk wastes used for producing spun silk.

Question 25.
What are apiaries?
Answer:
They are areas where a lot of beehives can be placed.

Question 26.
Name the bees used for Apiculture.
Answer:

  • Apis dorsata – Rock bee
  • Apis florea – Little bee
  • Apis indica – Indian bee
  • Apismellifera – European bee
  • Apis adamsoni – African bee

Question 27.
Name the types of beehives which are in practice in India?
Answer:

  • Langstroth
  • Newton

Question 28.
What is meant by swarming?
Answer:
The mass emergence of larvae of Lacinsect from the egg in search of a host plant is called swarming.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 29.
What is meant by nuptial flight?
Answer:
During the breeding season in winter, a unique flight taken by the queen bee followed by , several drones is called nuptial flight.

Question 30.
Which is called as king of the colony? Why is called so?
Answer:
The king of colony is drone hence the sole duty of the drone is to fertilize the vergin queen.

Question 31.
Name the sugar component present in the honey?
Answer:
levulose, dextrose maltose.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 32.
What are the uses of honey?
Answer:

  • It is used as an antiseptic
  • Laxative
  • Sedative
  • It is used in the preparation of cakes bread and biscuits.

Question 33.
What is meant by Lac culture?
Answer:
The culture of lac insect using techniques for the procurement of Lac on large scale is known as Lac culture.

Question 34.
Name the host plants on which Lac insects live?
Answer:
Karanagalli – Acacia catechu Karuvelai – Acacia nilotica Kumbadiri – Schleichera oleosa.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 35.
What is meant by hyper parasitism?
Answer:

  • Hyper parasitism is a condition in which a secondary parasite develops within a previously existing parasite.
  • The caterpillars feed upon lac insects showing hyper – parasitism.

Question 36.
What is meant by inoculation?
Answer:
The process of introducing lac insects to the host plant is called inoculation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 37.
What is meant by Harvesting?
Answer:
The collection of Lac from the host plant is known as harvesting.

Question 38.
What is meant by ‘Arilac’?
Answer:
The Immature lac insects produce a lac which is called ‘arilac’.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 39.
What is meant by sticklac?
Answer:
Lac cut from the host plant is called ‘stick lac’.

Question 40.
What is seed Lac?
Answer:
The Lac scraped collected grounded and the dust particles are removed to produce a lac called seedlac.

Question 41.
What is meant by Shellac?
Answer:
The seedlac is sundried and then melted to produce “Shellac”.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 42.
What is meant by aqua ponies?
Answer:
Aquaponics is a technique which is a combination of aquaculture and growing plants in non – soil media and nutrient-laden water.

Question 43.
What are the organisms farming through aquaculture?
Answer:
Fish mollusks crustaceans and aquatic plants are farming through aquaculture.

Question 44.
How aquaculture is classified on the basis of it source?
Answer:

  • Freshwater aquaculture
  • Brackish water aquaculture
  • Marine water aquaculture.

Question 45.
What is meant by Brackish water culture?
Answer:
Culturing of animals in the water having salinity range 0.5 – 30ppt are called brackish water cultures.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 46.
Name the fishes cultured through brackish water culture?
Answer:
Milkfish, Sea bass, Grey mullet Kari meen.

Question 47.
What is meant by metahaline culture?
Answer:
Culturing of animals in the salinity ranges from 36 – 40o% is called metahaline culture (eg) Artemia salina.

Question 48.
What are the organisms rearing through aquaculture?
Answer:

  1. Molluscs
  2. Aquatic plants
  3. Crustaceans

Question 49.
Give notes on fishes of brackish water?
Answer:
Brackish water fishes spend most of its life in river mouths backwaters mangrove swamps and coastal lagoons.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 50.
What is meant by mariculture?
Answer:
Culturing of animals in the water salinity ranges from 35- 35% is called mariculture.

Question 51.
Give short notes on Artemia salina?
Answer:
It is a metahaline organism. It lives in high saline waters because of its high osmoregulatory capacity.

Question 52.
What is meant by composite fish culture?
Answer:
Few selected fishes belonging to different species are stocked together in proper proportion in the pond is called composite culture.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 53.
What are the organisms cultured through composite fish culture?
Answer:

  • Catla Catla
  • Labeo rohita
  • Cirrhina mirgala.

Question 54.
What is meant by exotic fish culture?
Answer:
The fishes imported in to a country for fish culture are called exotic fishes and such fish culture is known as exotic fish culture.

Question 55.
Name the exotic fishes cultured in India?
Answer:

  • Cyprinus carpio
  • Oreochromis mossambicus.

Question 56.
What is meant by fish meal?
Answer:
Fish meal is prepared from fish waste after extracting oil from the fish.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 57.
What is meant by Ising glass?
Answer:

  • Ising glass is high-grade collagen produced from dried air bladder.
  • It is used for clarification of wine beer and vinegar.

Question 58.
What is meant by outbreeding?
Answer:
It is the breeding of unrelated animals. They do not have common ancestry for 4-6 generations.

Question 59.
What is the use of outbreeding?
Answer:
Outbreeding helps to produce hybrids with superior qualities and helps to create new breeds. New and favourable genes can be introduced into a population through outbreeding.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 60.
What is meant by outcrossing?
Answer:
It is the breeding between unrelated animals of the same breed but having no common ancertry.

Question 61.
What is meant by artificial insemination?
Answer:
Artificial insemination is a technique in which the semen collected from the male is injected into the reproductive tract of the selected female.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 62.
What is meant by the recovery period?
Answer:
Nucleated oysters are attached with floating rafts suspended into a depth of 2 to 3 metres for about 6 to 7 days is called the recovery period.

Question 63.
What is the composition of pearl?
Answer:

  • Water-2-4%
  • Calcium carbonate-90%
  • Organic matter-3.5-5.9%
  • residue-0.1-0.8%

Question 64.
Name the species of prawn?
Answer:
Penaues indicus, Penaeus monodon, Metapenaeus dobsoni, Macrobrachium rosenbergil.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 65.
Where are pearl oysters cultured?
Answer:
Kanyakumari Bay of Kutch.

Question 66.
What is meant by Linga pearl or best quality pearl?
Answer:
The pearl oysters in habit the ridges of rock-forming extensive pearl banks. These pearl beds produce the best quality of pearl or Linga pearl.

Question 67.
What are the types of cultivable fish?
Answer:

  • Indigenous or native freshwater fish. (cg) Catla, Labeo
  • Saltwater fishes acclimatized for freshwater.
  • Exotic fishes or imported from other countries. (eg) Common Carps.

Question 68.
What is Hapa?
Answer:
Hatching hapas are rectangular through shaped tanks made up of mosquito net cloth supported by bampoo poles and fixed in the river.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 69.
What are the advantages of composite fish farming?
Answer:

  •  All available niches are fully utilized.
  • Compatible species do not harm each other.
  • No competition among different species.

Question 70.
What is meant by animal husbandry?
Answer:
Animal husbandry is the practise of breeding and raising livestock cattle like cows, buffaloes goats and birds that are useful to human beings.

Question 71.
What is meant by breed?
Answer:
A group of animals related by descent and with similar characters like general appearance features size etc as said to belong to a breed.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 72.
How can we classify cattle on the basis of their utility?
Answer:

  1. Milch breeds
  2. Draught purpose breeds
  3. Dual-purpose breeds.

Question 73.
What are characteristic features of healthy cattle?
Answer:

  • They appear bright
  • Alert
  • Active
  • Shiny coat.

Question 74.
What are the characteristic features of unhealthy cattle?
Answer:

  • They appear dull
  • Restless
  • Change posture frequently with a drop in milk yield.

Question 75.
Name the important cattle disease?
Answer:

  • Rinder pest
  • Cowpox
  • Anthrax
  • hemorrhagic fever.

Question 76.
What is meant by poultry?
Answer:
It is the rearing and propagation of chicken ducks turkeys geese quail and guinea fowls.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 77.
What are the types of chicken breeds based on their utility?
Answer:

  • They are egg layers
  • Broiler type
  • Dual type
  • Games and
  • ornamental types.

Question 78.
Name the native ducks.
Answer:

  • Indian Runner
  • Syhletmeta.

Question 79.
Name the exotic ducks.
Answer:

  • Muscari
  • Pekin
  • Aylesbury
  • Campbell

Question 80.
What are the three stages of sericulture?
Answer:

  1. Cultivation of food plants for the silkworm.
  2. rearing of silkworm.
  3. reeling and spinning of silk.

Question 81.
What is meant by apiculture?
Answer:
Care and management of honey bees on a commercial scale for the production of honey is called apiculture.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 82.
What is the importance of aquaponics?
Answer:
It maintains the ecosystem balance by recycling the waste and excretory products produced by the fish.

Question 83.
What is meant by aquaponics?
Answer:
Aquaponics is a technique which is a combination of aquaculture and growing plants in non-soil media and nutrient-laden water.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 84.
Based on the water resources where are aquatic organisms cultured? Give examples.
Answer:

  1. Freshwater culture
  2. Brackish water culture, Marine culture, Cultured organism, Fishes, Prawns, Crabs and oysters.

Question 85.
What are the objectives of animal breeding?
Answer:

  • To improve growth rate
  • enhancing the production of milk meat egg etc.
  • Increasing the quality of the animal products
  • Improved resistance to disease.
  • Increased reproductive rate.

3 marks

III. Short answers

Question 1.
What is meant by vermiculture?
Answer:
It is the process of using earthworm to decompose organic food waste into a nutrient-rich material capable of supplying necessary nutrients which help to sustain plant growth.

Question 2.
What is meant by worm casting?
Answer:
The worm castings are pure worm waste and nutrient-rich organic soil and composed of castings, bits of bedding, and other organic matter.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 3.
What are the characteristics of cultivable fishes?
Answer:
Characteristics of cultivable fishes.
The special characteristic features of cultivable fishes are:

  1. Fishes should have a high growth rate in a short period of culture.
  2. They should accept a supplementary diet.
  3. They should be hardy enough to resist some common diseases and infections of parasites.
  4. Fishes proposed for polyculture should be able to live together without interfering or attacking other fishes.
  5. They should have high conversion efficiency so that they can effectively utilize the food.

Question 4.
What are the three main components of sericulture?
Answer:

  1. Cultivation of food plants for the silkworms.
  2. Rearing of silkworms.
  3. Reeling and spinning of silk.

Question 5.
Name the predators of earthworms?
Answer:

  • Ants
  • centipedes
  • Slugs
  • Birds
  • Rats
  • Snakes

Question 6.
Name the honey bees used in apiculture.
Answer:

  • Apis dorsate,
  • Apis florea
  • Apis indica
  • Apis mellifera
  • Apisadamsoni

Question 7.
What are the external factors affecting fish culture?
Answer:
External factors affecting fish culture. The factors that affect fish culture are temperature, light rain, water, flood, water current, turbidity of the water, pH hardness, salinity and dissolved O2. Light and temperature also play an important role in fish breeding.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 8.
What are the uses of silk?
Answer:
Uses of Silk:-
1. Silk fibers are utilized in preparing silk clothes. Silk fibers are now combined with other natural or synthetic fibers to manufacture clothes like Teri-Silk, Cot-Silk etc. Silk is dyed and printed to prepare ornamented fabrics. They are generally made from Eri-silk or spun silk.

2. Silk is used in industries and for military purposes.

3. It is used in the manufacture of fishing fibers, parachutes, cartridge bags, insulation coils for telephone, wireless receivers, tyres of racing cars, filter fibres, medical dressings, and suture materials.

Question 9.
Describe the structure of Beehive?
Answer:

  • The house of honey bees is a beehive.
  • The hive consists of hexagonal cells made up of wax secreted by the abdomen of a worker bee.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 4

  • These hives are found hanging vertically from the rocks. building or branches of trees.
  • The young stages of the honey bee accommodate the lower and central cells of the hive.
  • In the rock beehives, there are separate cells for queens, workers, and drones.

Question 10.
What are the types of Prawn fishery?
Answer:
Types of prawn fishery

  1. Shallow water prawn fishery – located on the west coast restricted to shallow waters.
  2. Estuaries and backwaters or saline lake prawn fishery – The area of production of prawns are the backwaters seen along the Western coast, Ennur, Pulicat, Chilka lake, and Estuaries of Ganga and Brahmaputra rivers.
  3. Freshwater prawn fishery – Prawns are caught from the rivers and lakes throughout India.
  4. Marine prawn fishery – Most of the marine prawns are caught along the Indian coast belonging to the family Penaeidae.

Question 11.
What is meant by inbreeding? What are its effects?
Answer:
Breeding between animals of the same breed for 4 – 6 generations is called inbreeding.
Effects:

  1. It increases homozygosity.
  2. Exposes the harmful recessive genes.
  3. Reduces fertility.
  4. It produces inbreeding depression.

Question 12.
How animals are classified based on their economic importance.
Answer:

  • Animals for food and food products.
  • Economically beneficial animals.
  • Animals of aesthetic importance.
  • Animals for scientific research.

Question 13.
Give an account of earthworm based on their habitat.
Answer:
First group:

  • The humus formers dwell on the surface and feed on organic matter.
  • They are darker in colour.
  • These worms are used for vermicomposting.

Second group:
The humus feeders are burrowing worms that are useful in making the soil porous and mixing and distributing humus throughout the soil.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 14.
What are the uses of honey wax?
Answer:

  • It is used for making candles.
  • It is used for making waterproofing materials.
  • It is used for making home appliances polishes for leather.
  • It is used in pharmaceutical industries.

Question 15.
What is meant by Hyper parasitism?
Answer:
A condition in which a secondary parasite develops within a previously existing parasite.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 16.
What are the economic importance of Lac?
Answer:

  • It is used as sealing wax.
  • It is used as a good insulator.
  • It is used in the preparation of shoes and leather polishes.
  • It is a protective coating of wood.
  • It is used in the preparation of plastic moulded articles.
  • It is used as a filling material for gold ornament.

Question 17.
Name the breeds of cattle?
Answer:

  • Milch breeds – Sindhi Jersey
  • Draught breeds – KangeyamMalvi
  • Dual-purpose breeds – Ongole Hariana

Question 18.
What is meant by Milch breed?
Answer:
They are high milk yielders with extended lactation. (eg) Sindhi, brown swiss.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 19.
What is Dual purpose?
Answer:
Cows are meant for yielding more milk and bullocks are used for better drought purpose, (eg) Ongole Hariana

Question 20.
What is draught purpose breeds?
Answer:
Bullocks are good for draught purposes (eg) Malvi.

Question 21.
What are the characteristic features of healthy cattle?
Answer:

  • A healthy animal eats drinks and sleeps well regularly.
  • Healthy cattle appear bright.
  • Alert and active in their movement with a shiny coat.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 22.
What are the external factors affecting fish culture?
Answer:

  1. Temperature
  2. Light
  3. Rain
  4. Flood
  5. Water current
  6. Turbidity of water
  7. pH

Question 23.
What is Aquaponics?
Answer:
Aquaponics is a technique which is a combination of aquaculture (growing fish)’ and hydroponics (growing plants in non-soil media and nutrient-laden water).

Question 24.
Name the species of prawn.
Answer:

  • Penaeus indicus,
  • Penaeus monodon,
  • Metapenaeus dobson,
  • Macrobrachium rosenbergii.

Question 25.
What are the three types of aquaculture on the basis of the source?
Answer:
On the basis of source, aquaculture can be classified into three categories. They are

  1. Freshwater aquaculture
  2. Brackish water aquaculture
  3. Marine water aquaculture.

Question 26.
What are the benefits of poultry farming?
Answer:

  • It does not require high capital for the construction and maintenance of poultry farming.
  • It does not require a big space.
  • It ensures a high return on investment.
  • It provides fresh and nutritious food and has a huge global demand.
  • It provides employment opportunities for the people.

Question 27.
What are the uses of dairy products?
Answer:

  • Milk is a rich source of vitamin A, B2, B1
  • It is a complete food for infants.
  • Dairy products such as yoghurt cheese butter ice cream condensed milk, milk powder are produced from milk.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 28.
What is the importance of meat?
Answer:

  • Meat is rich in protein.
  • It also contains minerals like iron zinc vitamins and selenium.

Question 29.
What is Mariculture?
Answer:
Culturing of animals in the water salinity ranges from 30 – 35% is called Mariculture. Some fishes like Chanos sp, Mugil cephalus are cultured here.

Question 30.
What are poultry diseases?
Answer:
Ranikhet, Coccidiosis, Fowl pox.

5 Marks

IV. Give Detailed Answers

Question 1.
How are vermicompost produced?
Answer:
Types of Movements:

  • Vermicompost is the compost produced by the action of earthworm in association with all other organisms in the compost unit.
  • Vermicompost bed may be selected on upland or an elevated level.
  • We have to construct a cement pit of 3 x 2 x 1m size over the ground surface using bricks.
  • The vermibed should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
  • The first layer of vermibed contains gravel at about 5 cm in height followed by coarses and to a thickness of 3.5 cm which will facilitate the draniage of excess water.
  • The unit can now be loaded with digested biomass or animal dung.
  • Earthworms such as periyonyx excavatus Eisenia fetida or Eudrilus eugeniae are introduced on the top.
  • Earthworms release their castings on the surface.
  • Vermiwash is a liquid collected after the passage of water through a column of vermibed. It is useful as a foliar spray to enhance plant growth.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 5

Question 2.
Describe the life cycle of bombyx mon?
Answer:

  • This moth is unisexual.
  • Just after emergence male moth copulates with females for 2-3 hours.
  • Just after copulation female starts laying about 400-500 eggs.
  • The eggs after ten days of incubation hatch into larva called a caterpillar.
  • The newly hatched caterpillar is about 3mm in length and is pale yellowish-white colour.
  • The mandibulate type of mouthparts adapted to feed easily on the mulberry leaves.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 6

  • After 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th moulting caterpillars get transformed into 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th instars respectively.
  • It develops salivary glands, stops feeding and undergoes pupation.
  • The cafter pillars stop feeding and moves towards the comer among the leaves and secrete a sticky fluid through their silk gland.
  • The secreted fluid comes out through spinnerret which hardens on exposure to air and is wrapped around the body of cater pillar in the forms of a covering called a cocoon.
  • The length of continous thread secreted a caterpillar for the formation of cocoon is about 1000 -1200 metres.
  • The pupal period lasts for 10-12 days and the pupae cut through the cocoon and emerge into adult moth.
  • In larvel stages the larvae moults for 3 or 4 times or 5 times and become a matured moth.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 3.
What are the uses of vermicompost?
Answer:

  • Vermicompost is rich in essential plant nutrients.
  • It improves soil structure texture aeration and water holding capacity and prevents soil erosion.
  • Vermicompost is rich in nutrients and an eco-friendly amendment soil for farming and terrace gardening.
  • It enhances seed germination and ensures good plant growth.

Question 4.
What are the steps of insertion of the nucleus into the oyster?
Answer:
Following steps are taken for the insertion of the nucleus:

a. Fitness of oyster for operation:
The selected oysters for the insertion of the nucleus should be healthy and strong enough to overcome the stress during operation.

b. Preparation of graft tissues:
The piece of tissue which is inserted inside the mantle is called as ‘GRAFT’ tissue. The outer edges of these graft squares must be known because nacre secreting cells are found only on the outer surface of the mantle so it is essential to keep the outer surface in contact with the inserted nucleus.

c. Preparation of the nucleus:
Any small particle may function as a nucleus to initiate the pearl formation but it is reported that the calcareous nucleus is the best because the deposition of nacre was found to be more on the calcareous nucleus.

d. Insertion of the nucleus:
For the insertion of the nucleus, oysters are fixed in a desk clamp in the position of the right valve facing upward. Mantle folds are smoothly touched to expose the foot and the main body mass, followed by an incision into the epithelium of the foot and a slender channel into the main mass of one graft tissue which functions as a bed for the nucleus.

e. Post-operation care:
Nucleated oysters are placed into cages and suspended into seawater and attached with floating rafts to a depth of 2 to 3 meters for about 6 to 7 days to recover from the shocks due to operation. This period of 6 to 7 days is known as the ‘Recovery period’. About 3000 to 3600 nucleated oysters are kept in different cages suspended in seawater at 2 to 3 meters depth for 3 to 6 years and undisturbed except at the time of clearing and inspection.

f. Harvesting of pearl:
Pearls are harvested in the month of December to February which may slightly vary according to climatic conditions. After the completion of 3 years of the insertion of the nucleus, pearl oysters are harvested from the sea and the pearls are taken out from the shell.

g. Clearing of pearls:
After taking out the pearls from the oyster’s shell they are washed properly, cleared with the soap solution.

Question 5.
What are the uses of silk?
Answer:

  • Silk fibres are utilized in preparing silk cloths.
  • Silk fibres are combined with natural or synthetic fibres to manufacture Teri – silk and cot silk.
  • Silk is dyed and printed to prepare ornamental fabrics.
  • Silk is used in industries and for military purposes.
  • It is used in the manufacturing of fishing fibres, parachutes insulation coils for telephones.
  • They are used in the preparation of tyres for racing cars, filter fibres in medical dressings and as suture materials.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 6.
Name the pests and diseases of the silkworm.
Answer:
1. Predators:
They feed on silkworms.

  • Birds
  • ants
  • crows
  • kites
  • rats.

2. Diseases:

  • Pebrin – It is a disease caused by protozoa Nosema bombycis.
  • Flacherie – It occurs in the mature larvae caused by bacteria like streptococcus and staphylococcus.
  • Grasserie – It is aviral disease caused by Bombyx mori nuclear polyhedrosis virus.
  • White Muscardine – It is caused by the fungus Beauveria bassiana.

Question 7.
Describe the social organization of the honey bee.
Answer:

  • In the honey bee, a highly organized division of labour is found.
  • There are three types of honey bees seen in the colony.
  • There are one queen 10000 – 30000 workers and a few hundred drones in a colony.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 7

Queen bee:

  • It feeds on royal Jelly.
  • It is only function is to lay eggs throughout its life span.
  • During breeding season in winter, a unique flight takes place by the queen bee followed by several drones is called nuptial flight.
  • After mating the queen bee lays about 15 lakh eggs in two to four years.

Worker bee:

  • These are sterile females.
  • Worker bee lives in a worker well and it takes, about 21 days to develop from the egg to adult, and its life span is about six weeks.

Works:

  • It secretes royal Jelly.
  • Prepares bee – bread to feed the larvae.
  • Takes care of the queen and drones.
  • Secretes bee wax.
  • In the last three weeks, she searches and gathers the pollen nectar.

Drones:

  • The drone develops from an unfertilized egg.
  • It lives in a chamber called a drone cell.
  • The only duty of the drone is to fertilize the queen and it is called the king of the colony.

Question 8.
Describe the structure of the Langstroth beehive?
Answer:

  • Stand – It is a basal part of the hive and is adjusted to make a slope for rainwater to drain.
  • Bottom board – It is situated above the stand. It has two gates one gate is an entrance the other acts as an exit.
  • Brood chamber – It is an important part of the hive. It is provided with 5 to 10 frames arranged one above the other through which the workers can easily pass.
  • The frame is composed of a wax – sheet which is held in a vertical position up by a couple of wires.
  • It is strong that can be used repeatedly.
  • Super – It is a chamber without cover and base. It is provided with many frames to provide additional space for expansion of the hive.
  • Inner cover – It is a wooden piece used for covering the super with many holes for proper ventilation.
  • Top cover – It is meant for protecting the colonies from rains. It is covered with a sheet which is plain and sloping.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 8

Question 9.
What are the methods of animal breeding?
Answer:
Methods of Animal breeding:
There are two methods of animal breeding, namely inbreeding and outbreeding:

1. Inbreeding:
Breeding between animals of the same breed for 4-6 generations is called inbreeding. Inbreeding increases homozygosity and exposes the harmful recessive genes.

Continuous inbreeding reduces fertility and even productivity, resulting in “inbreeding depression”. This can be avoided by breeding selected animals of the breeding population and they should be mated with superior animals of the same breed but unrelated to the breeding population. It helps to restore fertility and yield.

2. Outbreeding:
The breeding between unrelated animals is called outbreeding. Individuals produced do not have common ancestors for 4-6 generations.

Outbreeding helps to produce new and favourable traits, to produce hybrids, with superior qualities, and helps to create new breeds. New and favourable genes can be introduced into a population through outbreeding.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 10.
Describe the process of rearing silkworms?
Answer:

  • A typical rearing house 6 m x 4m x 3.5m is constructed on an elevated place under shade to accommodate 100 days.
  • The windows and ventilators should be covered with a nylon net to restrict the entry of uziflies and other insects.
  • The selected healthy silk moths are allowed to mate for 4 hours.
  • The female moth is kept in a dark plastic bed it lays about 400 eggs in 24 hours.
  • The small larvae hatch between 7 – 10 days.
  • The larvae are kept in trays at a temperature of about 20°C-25°C.
  • As the larvae grow they are transferred to fresh leaves on clean trays.
  • Their maturity is achieved in about 45 days.
  • At this stage, the salivary glands start secreting silk to spin cocoons.

Question 11.
What is meant by aquaponics? Describe its methods?
Answer:
1. Deepwater culture – Aquaponics is a technique which is a combination of aquaculture and growing plants in non – soil media.

  • It is a raft-based method.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 9

  • In this method, the raft floats in water plants are kept in the holes of the raft, and the root floats in water. Fast-growing plants are cultivated.

2. Media-based method – It involves growing plants in inert planting media likely pellets or shales.
This method is applicable for home and hobby scale systems. A large number of fruiting plants leafy green plants herbs can be cultivated.

3. Nutrient film technique – It involves the passage of nutrient-rich water through a narrow trough or pvc pipe.
Plants are kept in the holes of the pipe to allow the roots to be in free contact with the water stream.

4. Aquavertica or vertical aquaponics – Plants are stacked in top of each other in tower systems.
This method is suitable for growing leafy green, strawberries and crops that do not need supporting solid substratum to grow.

Question 12.
What are the groups of cattle?
Answer:
(I) Dairy breeds or Milch breeds:
They are high milk yielders with extended lactation. Eg., Sindhi, Gir, Sahiwal, Jersy, Brown Swiss, Holstein cattle.

(II) Draught purpose breeds:
Bullocks are good for draught purposes. Eg. Kangayam, Malvi.

(III) Dual Purpose breeds:
Cows are meant for yielding more milk and bullocks are used for better drought purposes Eg. Ongole, Hariana.

Question 13.
What is the Natural breeding of fishes?
Answer:
Natural breeding (Bundh breeding): These are special types of ponds where natural riverine conditions or any natural water resources are managed for the breeding of culturable fishes. These bundhs are constructed in large low-lying areas that can accommodate large quantity of rainwater. The shallow area of such bundhs is used as a spawning ground.

Question 14.
Write a note on milk products?
Answer:
Milk products:
Milk is produced by dairy animals which is an emulsion of fat and lactose. Milk also contains enzymes which are destroyed during pasteurization.

Milk is a rich source of vitamin A, B„ Bp and deficient in Vitamin C. Due to its high nutrition value, it serves as a . complete food for infants. Dairy products such as yoghurt, cheese, butter, ice cream, condensed milk, curd, and milk powder processed from milk make dairy, a highly farming attraction.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 15.
Why carps have proved to be best suited for culture in India?
Answer:

  • Feed on zooplankton and phytoplanktons decaying weeds debris and other aquatic plants.
  • They can survive in turbid water with slightly higher temperatures.
  • Can tolerate O2 variations in water.
  • Can be transported from one place to another easily.
  • They are highly nutritive and palatable.

Question 16.
Give an account of induced breeding.
Answer:

  • To improve the quality of fish seed by the artificial method of fertilization is developed.
  • The gonadotrophin (FSH+ LH) secreted by the pituitary gland influences the maturation of gonads and spawning in fishes.
  • The pituitary gland is removed from a healthy mature fish.
  • The pituitary extract is prepared by homogenizing in 0.3% saline and centrifuged for 15 minutes at 8000rpm.
  • The supernatant is injected at the base of the caudal fin.
  • Male and Female fishes start to releasing gametes and are fertilized.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 17.
Write a short note on Game breeds?
Answer:
(I) Game breeds:
Since ancient times, special breed of roosters have been used for the sport of cockfighting.

(II) Aseel:
This breed is white or black in colour. The hens are not good egg layers but are good in the incubation of eggs. It is found in all states of India. Aseel is noted for its pugnacity, high stamina, and majestic gait and dogged fighting qualities. Although poor in productivity, this breed is well-known for its meat qualities.

Question 18.
Give an account of the culture of freshwater prawns?
Answer:

  • Macrobrachium rosenbergii is seen in rivers fields and low – saline estuaries.
  • For fertilization, one pair of prawn are kept in a separate tank.
  • After mating the eggs are laid.
  • Temperature 24°C – 30°C and PH 7-8 should be maintained in the hatching tank.
  • The hatched larvae are supplied with artificial feed.
  • Young ones 5cm length can be reared in fresh or slightly brackish water ponds and harvesting of prawns can be done twice a year.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 10

Question 19.
What are the benefits of Poultry farming?
Answer:
The benefits of Poultry farming are:

  1. It does not require high capital for the construction and maintenance of poultry farming.
  2. It does not require a big space.
  3. It ensures the high return of investment within a very short period of time.
  4. It provides fresh and nutritious food and has a huge global demand.
  5. It provides employment opportunities for the people.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 20.
What are the types of cultivable fish Types of cultivable fishes?
Answer:
Types of Cultivable fishes:

  • Indigenous / Native freshwater fishes, (eg) Major Carps Catla Labeo Clarias.
  • Saltwater fishes acclimatized for freshwater. (eg)Chanos, Mullet
  • Exotic fishes. Imported from other countries, (eg) Common Carps.

Characteristic features of Carps:

  • Feed on Zooplanktons and phytoplanktons decaying weeds debris and other aquatic plants.
  • They can survive in turbid water with slightly higher temperatures.
  • Can tolerate 02 variations in water.
  • Can be transported from one place to another.
  • They are highly nutritive and palatable easily

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 11

Question 21.
Give an account of the management of fish farms?
Answer:
To culture fish, one should have an idea about different stages of fish culture such as topographic situation quality source physical-chemical and biological factors of water.
Stages of fish farming:
Breeding Pond:
The first step in fish culture is the breeding of fishes therefore for proper breeding special types of ponds are prepared called breeding ponds. These ponds are prepared near the rivers of natural water resources.
a) Natural breeding:
These bundhs are constructed in large low-lying areas that can accommodate a large quantity of rainwater.
b) Induced breeding:

  • This involves the removal of ova and sperm from female and male by artificial mechanical process and the eggs are fertilized.
  • The fertilized eggs are removed from the spawning place and kept in hatching hapas. Fish seeds: The fish seed is collected from breeding ponds and transferred to the hatching pits.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 12

3. Hatching Pit:
The fertilized eggs are kept in hatching pits. The hatching pits should be nearer to the breeding grounds should be smaller in size with good quality water.
There are two types of hatching pits:

  1. Hatcheries: These are small-sized ponds in which unfertilized eggs are transferred and hatching happens.
  2. Hatching hapas: These are rectangular trough-shaped tanks made up of mosquito net cloth supported by bamboo poles and fixed in the river.

4. Nursery Pond:
The newly hatched fries are transported from the hatching happa to nursery ponds where they grow into fingerlings.

5. Rearing Pond:
This pond is long and narrow and this pond should be free from toxicants and predators. The fingerlings are transferred to the stocking ponds.

6. Stocking Ponds:

  • This pond should be devoid of weeds and predatory fishes.
  • Proper organic manuring should be done to the production with cow dung.

7. Harvesting:

  • Well-grown fishes are taken out for marketing is harvesting.
  • Small-sized fishes are again released into the stocking ponds for further growth.
  • The harvested fishes are preserved and then marketed.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 22.
a) What is meant by composite fish farming?
b) What is the significance?
c) What are the fishes cultured through composite fish farming.
Answer:
a. Composite fish farming: Few selected fishes belonging to different species are stocked together in proper proportion in a pond is called composite fish farming.

b. Merits :

  • All available niches are fully utilized.
  • Compatible species do not harm each other.
  • No competition among different species is found.

c. Fishes that are cultured :

  • Catla Catla
  • Labeo rohita
  • Cirrhinus mrigala

Question 23.
Give an account of the economic importance of fish.
Answer:
1. Fishes form a rich source of protein food the sardines, mackerel tuna herrings have high amino acid concentrations.
2. These fishes have histidine and omega fatty acids.
3. Minerals such as calcium magnesium phosphorus potassium and copper and present.
a) Fish Oil:

  • It is an important fish product it is derived from fish liver and from the fish body.
  • This is rich in vitamin A and O and iodine.
  • It is used in the manufacture of laundry soap paints and cosmetics.

b) Fish Meal:

  • It is prepared from fish waste after extracting oil from the fish.
  • These dried wastes are used to prepare food for pigs, poultry, and cattle.
  • The wastes obtained during the preparation of fish meals are used as manure.

c) Ising glass:

  • It is high-grade collagen produced from the dried air bladder of catfish and carps.
  • It is used for clarification of wine beer and vinegar.

Question 24.
Give notes on
a) Pearl Culture
b) Formation of pearl.
Answer:
a) Pearl Culture:

  • Pearl is a white shining globular concretion found within the shell of an oyster.
  • In India, it was cultured for the first time in 1973 at Thoothukudi.
  • High-quality pearls are obtained from Genus Pinctada that can be cultured in the salinity range of 30 ppt in racks raft and long-line method.
  • The pearl oysters inhabit the ridges of rocks or dead coral forming the best quality pearl.

b) Pearl Formation:

  • When a foreign particle accidentally enters into the space between the mantle and shell of the oysters it adheres to the mantle.
  • The mantle epithelium encloses its likes sac and starts to secrete concentric layers of nacre around it as a defensive mechanism.
  • The repeated layers of calcium carbonate make the hard and glossy pearl that are separated and graded.

Question 25.
Give an account of artificial pearl culture?
Answer:

  • Oysters are caught by a special type of cages.
  • This cage is dipped into a sand cement mixture providing a rough surface to the cages and are suspended at a depth of 6 meters.

2. Rearing of oysters:

  • The collected oysters are placed into the culture cages for a period of 10 – 20 days.
  • These cages are protected from enemies like octopus, Eel, and devil fishes.

3. Insertion of the nucleus:
a) Fitness of oysters for operation:
The selected oysters for the insertion of the nucleus should be healthy and strong enough to overcome the stress during operation.

b) Preparation of graft tissues:

  • The piece of tissue which is inserted inside the mantle is called “graft” tissue.
  • It is essential to keep the outer surface in contact with the inserted nucleus as nacre secreting cells are found only on the outer surface.

c) Preparation of nucleus:

  • Any small particle may function as a nucleus to initiate pearl formation.
  • If it is calcareous the deposition of nacre was found to be more on the calcareous nucleus.

d) Insertion of the nucleus:
For the insertion of the nucleus, oysters are fixed in a desk clamp and mantle folds are smoothly touched to expose the foot followed by an incision into the epithelium of the foot and the nucleus is inserted.

e) Post Operation Care:

  • Nucleated oysters are placed into cages and suspended into 2-3 metres of depth for 6-7 days.
  • These periods are known as the “Recovery Period”.
  • These oysters are kept for 3-6 years undisturbed.

f) Harvesting of Pearl:
After the completion of 3 years, pearl oysters are harvested. It is usually done from December to February.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 13
g) Clearing of Pearls:
After taking out the pearls from the oyster’s shell. They are washed properly cleared with the soap solution.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 26.
What is inbreeding? What are its merits and demerits?
Answer:
Breeding between animals of the same breed for 4-6 generations is called inbreeding.
Merits:

  • It increases homozygosity.
  • It exposes the harmful recessive genes. Demerits:

1. Continuous inbreeding reduces fertility
2. And results in inbreeding depression. Avoiding inbreeding depression:
This can be avoided by breeding selected animals be mated with superior animals of the same breed but unrelated to the breeding population.

Question 27.
What is Dairying and Dairy Operation?
Answer:
Dairying is the production and marketing of milk and its products. The dairy operation consists of proper maintenance of cattle, the collection, and processing of milk, and its by-products.

Question 28.
What are the types of outbreeding?
Answer:
1. Out Crossing:
It is the breeding between unrelated animals of the same breed but having no common ancestry.
Out Cross: This method is suitable for breeding animals that are below average in productivity.

2. Crossbreeding:

  • Breeding between a superior male of one breed with a superior female of another breed.
  • The cross-breed progeny has superior traits. This is called hybrid vigour or heterosis.

3. Interspecific hybridization:

  • Mating between male and female of two different species.
  • The progeny obtained from such crosses are different from their parents.
  • Mule is produced by the crosses between a male donkey and a female horse.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 14

Question 29.
Give an account of Multiple Ovulation embryo transfer technology? MOET.
Answer:
MOET:

  • This method is applied when the success rate of crossing is low even after artificial insemination.
  • In this method, the follicle-stimulating hormone is administered to cows for inducing follicular maturation and superovulation.
  • Instead of one egg per cycle, 6-8 eggs can be produced.
  • The eggs are carefully recovered non-surgically from the genetic mother and fertilized artificially.
  • The embryos at the 8 – 32 celled stage are recovered and transferred to a surrogate mother.
  • This technology can be applied to cattle sheep and buffaloes.
  • It can produce high milk-yielding females and high-quality meat-yielding bulls in a short time.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 30.
a) What is meant by dairying?
b) Classify them on the basis of their utility.
c) Give an account of dairy products.
Answer
a) Dairying:

  • It is the production and marketing of milk and its products.
  • The dairy operation consists of maintenance of cattle the collection, processing of the milk, and its by-products.
  • These are 26 well-defined breeds of cattle and 6 breeds of buffaloes in India.

b) Classification of Cattle

  1. Dairy breeds: They are high milk yielder with extended lactation, (eg) Sindhi, Jersey Sahiwal
  2. Drought breed: Bullocks are good for draught purposes, (eg) Kangeyam Malvi.
  3. Dual-purpose breeds: Cows are meant for yielding more milk and bullocks are used for better drought purposes (eg) Ongole Hariana.

c) Uses of dairy product:
1. Milk: Milk is a rich source of vitamin A, B2, B and deficient in Vitamin C.
Dairy products such as yoghurt cheese butter ice cream condensed milk powder are produced from milk.
2. Meat: Meat is rich in protein and also contains minerals like iron zinc vitamins and selenium.
3. Land Management: Grazing of live stocks sometimes used as a way to control weeds.
4. Manure: Manure can be spread on agriculture fields to increase crop yields.

Question 31.
Describe the types of Chicken breeds?
Answer:
1. Egg layers: These are farmed mainly for the production of eggs.
Leghorn:

  • It is originated in Italy. They are small compact with a single comb.
  • They mature early and begin to lay eggs at the age of 5 or 6 months.

Chittagong:

  • They are good egg layers and are delicious.
  • They are found in West Bengal.

2. Selection of eggs for hatching:
Eggs should be fertile medium-sized dark brown shelled and freshly laid eggs are preferred for rearing.

3. Incubation and hatching:

  • The maintenance of newly laid eggs in optimum condition till hatching is called incubation.
  • The fully developed chick emerges out of egg after an incubation period of 21 – 22 days.
  • There are two types of incubation namely natural incubation and artificial incubation.
  • In the Natural incubation method, only a limited number of eggs can be incubated by a mother hen.
  • In artificial incubation, more eggs can be incubated.

4. Brooding:

  • Caring and management of young chicks for 4 – 6 weeks immediately after hatching is called brooding.
  • They are natural and artificial brooding. The housing of Poultry:
  • To protect the poultry from the sun.
  • Rain and predators it is necessary to provide housing to poultry.
  • A poultry house should be moisture-proof rat-proof and it should be easily cleanable and durable.

5. Poultry feeding:
The diet of chicks should contain an adequate amount of water carbohydrates proteins fats vitamins and minerals.

Poultry Products:

  • The main products of poultry farmings are eggs and meat.
  • The primary aim of poultry farming is to obtain eggs.

C. Poultry by-products:

  • The feathers: They are used for making pillows and quilts.
  • Droppings: The droppings are rich in nitrogen potash and phosphates.
  • The by-products of poultry are used as good sources of nutrients for meat-producing animals and poultry.
  • These by-products supply proteins fats Vitamins and minerals.
    Poultry diseases: Ranikhet coccidiosis Fowl Pox is a common poultry disease.

Merits:

  1. They can adapt themselves to all types of environmental conditions.
  2. And for the breed for feed efficiency.
  3. Growth rate and resistance to diseases.
  4. They are exhibited in poultry shows they are calm friendly and can be maintained as pets.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 32.
What are the types of poultry farming? What are the stages involved in rearing? What are the poultry by-products?
Answer:
Types:

  1. Organic method
  2. Yarding method
  3. Battery cage method
  4. Furnished cage method.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 15

Stages involved in rearing:
1. Selection of the best layer.

  • An active intelligent-looking bird with a bright comb not obese should be selected.
  • They are golden or light yellow coloured.

2. Broiler type:

  • White Plymouthrock is a fast-growing breed and soft quality meat.
  • They have white plumage throughout the body. This is an American breed. It is a fast-growing breed.

3. Dual Purpose breed:
It is known for its massive body having heavy bones. Well feathered and Peacomb is one of the important breed characters.

4. Game breeds:
Aseel:

  • The hens are not good egg layers but are good in the incubation of eggs.
  • Aseel is noted for its pugnacity high stamina majestic gait.
  • This breed is well known for its meat qualities.

5. Ornamental breeds:
Silkie:

  • They are reared as pets and for egg production and meat.
  • The chicken has a fluffy plumage which is said to feel like silk and satin.
  • It has black skin and bones blue ear lobes and five toes on each foot.

Question 33.
Write a note on milk products?
Answer:
Milk products:
Milk is produced by dairy animals which is an emulsion of fat and lactose. Milk also contains enzymes which are destroyed during pasteurization.

Milk is a rich source of vitamin A, B„ Bp and deficient in Vitamin C. Due to its high nutrition value, it serves as a complete food for infants. Dairy products such as yoghurt, cheese, butter, ice cream, condensed milk, curd, and milk powder processed from milk make dairy, a highly farming attraction.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Pdf Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

11th Bio Botany Guide Mineral Nutrition Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part -I

Question 1.
Identify correct match.
1. Die back disease of citrus -(i) Mo
2. Whip tail disease – (ii) Zn
3. Brown heart of turnip -(iii) Cu
4. Little leaf -(iv) B
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 1
Answer:
b) 1 (iii) 2 (i) 3 (iv) 4 (ii)

Question 2.
If a plant is provided with all mineral nutrients but, Mn concentration is increased, what will be the deficiency?
(a) Mn prevent the uptake of Fe, Mg but not Ca
(b) Mn increase the uptake of Fe, Mg and Ca
(c) Only increase the uptake of Ca
(d) Prevent the uptake Fe, Mg, and Ca
Answer:
(a) Mn prevent the uptake of Fe, Mg but not Ca

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 3.
The element which is not remobilized?
a) Phosphorous
b) Potassium
c) Calcium
d) Sulphur
Answer:
c) Calcium

Question 4.
Match the correct combination.

Minerals Role
A Molybdenum 1. Chlorophyll
B Zinc 2. Methionine
C Magnesium 3. Auxin
D Sulphur 4. Nitrogenase

a) A-1 B-3 C-4 D-2
b) A-2 B-1 C-3 D-4
c) A-4 B-3 C-1 D-2
d) A-4 B-2 C-1 D-3
Answer:
c) A-4 B-2 C-1 D-3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 5.
Identify the correct statement:
(i) Sulphur is essential for amino acids Cystine and Methionine
(ii) Low level of N, K, S and Mo affect the cell division
(iii) Non – leguminous plant Alnus which contain bacterium Frankia
(iv) Denitrification carried out by nitrosomonas and nitrobacter.

(a) (i), (ii) are correct
(b) (i), (ii), (iii) are correct
(c) I only correct
(d) all are correct
Answer:
(b) (i), (ii), (iii) are correct

Question 6.
Nitrogen is present in the atmosphere in huge amounts but higher plants fail to utilize it. Why?
Answer:
1. Plants absorb minerals from the soil along with water with the help of Roots. Minerals are absorbed as salts.

2. Nitrogen is present in large quantities in the atmosphere in a gaseous form, the gaseous nitrogen must be fixed in the form of Nitrate salts in the soil to facilitate absorption by plant roots.

3. Nitrogen fixation can occur 2 ways by

  • Non – Biological means (Industrial process or by lighting)
  • Biological means (Bacteria / Cyanobacteria Fungi)
  • Therefore higher plants con not utilize the atmospheric Nitrogen.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 7.
Why is that in certain plants, deficiency symptoms appear first in younger parts of the plants while in others, they do so in mature organs?
Answer:
When deficiency symptoms appear first, we can notice the differences in old and younger leaves. It is mainly due to mobility’ of minerals. Based on this, they are classified into
1. Actively mobile minerals and
2. Relatively immobile minerals

a) Actively mobile minerals: Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium, Magnesium, Chlorine, Sodium, Zinc and Molybdenum. Deficiency symptoms first appear on old and senescent leaves due to active movement of minerals to younger leaves, than the older leaves.

b) Relatively immobile minerals: Calcium, Sulphur, Iron, Boron and Copper. Here, deficiency symptoms first appear on young leaves due to the immobile nature of minerals.

Question 8.
Plant A in a nutrient medium shows whiptail disease plant B in a nutrient medium shows a little leaf disease. Identify mineral deficiency of plant A and B?
Answer:
Mineral deficiency of plant A and B:

  1. Plant A is deficient in the mineral molybdenum (Mo).
  2. Plant B is deficient in the mineral zinc (Zn).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 9.
Write the role of nitrogenase enzyme in nitrogen fixation?
Answer:
Nitrogen fixation is the first step in Nitrogen cycle, during which gaseous nitrogen from the atmosphere is fixed. It required nitrogenase enzyme complex nitrogenase is active only in anaerobic condition. To create this anaerobic condition, a pigment known as leghaemoglobin is synthesized in the nodules which acts as oxygen scavenger and removes oxygen.

Question 10.
Explain the insectivorous mode of nutrition in angiosperms?
Answer:
Plants which are growing in nitrogen deficient areas develop insectivorous habit to resolve nitrogen deficiency.

  1. Nepenthes (Pitcher plant): Pitcher is a modified leaft and contains digestive enzymes. Rim of the pitcher is provided with nectar glands and acts as an attractive lid. When insect is trapped, proteolytic enzymes will digest the insect.
  2. Drosera (Sundew): It consists of long club shaped tentacles which secrete sticky digestive fluid which looks like a sundew.
  3. Utricularia (Bladder wort): Submerged plant in which leaf is modified into a bladder to collect insect in water.
  4. Dionaea (Venus fly trap): Leaf of this plant modified into a colourful trap. Two folds of lamina consist of sensitive trigger hairs and when insects touch the hairs it will close.

Insectivorous Plants

1. Nepenthes (Pitcher Plant)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 2
2. Drosera (Sundew)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 3

3. Dlonaca (Venus Fly tray)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 4

Part – II

11th Bio Botany Guide Mineral Nutrition Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose the Correct Answers

Question 1.
Plants naturally obtain nutrients from:
(a) atmosphere
(b) water
(c) soil
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

Question 2.
The minerals placed under the list of unclassified minerals are
a) Carbon. Hydrogen, & Oxygen
b) Sodium. Silicon. Cobalt and selenium
c) Copper, Iron, Cadmium, and selenium
d) Magnesium, Sulphur, & Manganese
Answer:
b) Sodium, Silicon, Cobalt, and Selenium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 3.
Who coined the term ‘Hydroponics’:
(a) Julius Von Sachs
(b) William Frederick Goerick
(c) Liebig
(d) Wood word
Answer:
(b) William Frederick Goerick

Question 4.
Skeletal elements are
a) Carbon, Hydrogen, and Oxygen
b) Nitrogen, Phosphorus, and Calcium
c) Potassium, Magnesium, and Sulphur
d) Nitrogen, Sulphur and Phosphorus
Answer:
a) Carbon, Hydrogen, and Oxygen

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 5.
Actively mobile minerals are:
(a) nitrogen and phosphorus
(b) iron and manganese
(c) sodium and cobalt
(d) silicon and selenium
Answer:
(a) nitrogen and phosphorus

Question 6.
Which chelating agent found in soil are produced by bacteria?
a) Siderophores
b) EDTA
c) Auxin
d) Gibberellin
Answer:
a) Siderophores

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 7.
Molybdenum is essential for the reaction of:
(a) hydrolase enzyme
(b) nitrogenase enzyme
(c) carboxylase enzyme
(d) dehydrogenase enzyme
Answer:
(b) nitrogenase enzyme

Question 8.
Minerals that play important role for activation of enzymes involved in Respiration are
a) Molybdenum and Boron
b) Boron and Silicon
c) Calcium and Magnesium
d) Magnesium and Manganese
Answer:
d) Magnesium and Manganese

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 9.
Essential component of aminoacids like Cystine, Cysteine and Melhionine is
a) Potassium
b) Magnesium
c) Sulphur
d) Calcium
Answer:
c) Sulphur

Question 10.
Which of the element is involved in the synthesis of DNA and RNA:
(a) calcium
(b) magnesium
(c) sulphuric
(d) potassium
Answer:
(b) magnesium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 11.
Delay in flowering is due to the deficiency of
a) N, S, Mo
b) Ca, Mg, Mn
c) C, H, O
d) N,P,K
Answer:
a) N,S,Mo

Question 12.
Kheria disease of Rice and Internal cork of Apple are caused by the deficiency of
a) Calcium and Maganese
b) Zinc and Boron
c) Copper and Manganese
d) Boron and Nickel
Answer:
b) Zinc and Boron

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 13.
Indicate the correct statements:
(i) Iron is the essential element for the synthesis of chlorophyll and carotenoid
(ii) Iron is the activator of carboxylene enzyme
(iii) Iton is the component of cytochrome
(iv) lvon is the component of plastocyanin

(a) (i) and (ii)
(b) (ii) and (iv)
(c) (ii) and (iii)
(d) (i) and (iii)
Answer:
(d) (i) and (iii)

Question 14.
The enzyme that is a constituent of urease and dehydrogenase are
a) Molybdenum
b) Boron
c) Nickel
d) Zinc
Answer:
c) Nickel

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 15.
A membrane bound bacterium formed inside the nodule is called
a) Bacteriod
b) Plasmid
c) Nucleoid
d) Noduloid
Answer:
a) Bacteriod

Question 16.
The increased concentration of manganese in plants will prevent the uptake of:
(a) calcium and potassium
(b) sodium and potassium
(c) boron and silicon
(d) iron and magnesium
Answer:
(d) iron and magnesium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 17.
Plants need one of the following minerals for ATP and meristematic tissue formation
a) K, N
b) N, Cu
c) N, Ca
d) P, N
Answer:
d) P, N

Question 18.
The techniques of Aeroponics was developed by:
(a) Goerick
(b) Amon and Hoagland
(c) Soifer Hillel and David Durger
(d) Von Sachs
Answer:
(c) Soifer Hillel and David Durger

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 19.
Mo is a part of enzyme ……………..
a) Reverse transcriptase
b) Restriction endonuclease
c) Hexokinase
d) Nitrogenase
Answer:
d) Nitrogenase

Question 20.
Which of the bacterium causes denitrification?
a) Azotobacter
b) Nitrobacter
c) Nitrosomonas
d) Pseudomonas
Answer:
d) Pseudomonas

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 21.
Beside paddy fields, cyanobacteria are also found inside the vegetative parts of
a) Psiloturn
b) Pinus
c) Cycas
d) Equiseturn
Answer:
c) Cycas

Question 22.
The legume plants secrete phenolics to attract:
(a) Azolla
(b) Rhizobium
(c) Nitrosomonas
(d) Streptococcus
Answer:
(b) Rhizobium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 23.
Element involved in Nitrogen fixation is
a) Zinc
b) Copper
c) iron
d) Chlorine
Answer:
c) Iron

Question 24.
The nitrogenase enzyme is active:
(a) only in aerobic condition
(b) only in anaerobic condition
(c) both in aerobic and anaerobic condition
(d) only in toxic condition
Answer:
(b) only in anaerobic condition

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 25.
Plants that can grow in marshy places where there is scarcity of Nitrogen are
a) Halophytes
b) Psammophytes
c) Bryophytes
d) insectivorous plants
Answer:
d) Insectivorous plants

Question 26.
Decomposition of organic nitrogen (proteins and amino acids) from dead plants and animals into ammonia is called:
(a) nitrification
(b) ammonification
(c) nitrogen fixation
(d) denitrification
Answer:
(b) ammonification

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 27.
Internal cork of apple and Exanthema in citrus and whiptail disease of cauliflower are produced by the deficiency of
1. Copper,
2. Zinc,
3. Boron
4. Molybdenum
a) 2,3, 1
b) 2, 3, 4
c) 4, 3, 1
d) 3, 1,4
Answer:
d) 3,1,4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 28.
Necrosis means
a) Discolouration of leaf
b) Stunted growth
c) Death of the tissue
d) Death of the root
Answer:
c) Death of the tissue

Question 29.
The transfer of amino group (NH2) from glutamic acid to keto group of keto acid is termed as:
(a) Transamination
(b) Hydrogenation
(c) Nitrification
(d) Denitrification
Answer:
(a) Transamination

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 30.
Denitrification process deplete important nutrients from soil. It also cause ………………………
a) Acidification of soil
b) Alkalification of soil
c) Neutralization of soil
d) Ammoniafication of soil
Answer:
a) Acidification of soil

Question 31.
Availability of Nitrogenase enzyme depend on
a) Non avoulability of ATP
b) Availability of Nitric acid
c) Availability of ATP
d) Non availability of Nitric acid
Answer:
c) Availability of ATP

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 32.
Obligate or Total parasites are
a) Santalum albumn and orabanche
b) Vanda and Venilla
c) Cuscuta and Rafflesia
d) Viscum and Loranthus
Answer:
c) Cuscuta and Rafflesia

Question 33.
The association of mycorrhizae with higher plants is termed as:
(a) Parasitism
(b) Mutualism
(c) Symbiosis
(d) Saprophytic
Answer:
(c) Symbiosis

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 34.
Major role of minor elements inside living organism is to act as
a) Binder of cell structure
b) Constituent of hormone
c) Building blocks of important amino acids
d) Co factors of enzymes
Answer:
d) Co factors of enzymes

Question 35.
Lichens are the indicators of:
(a) carbon monoxide
(b) nitrogen oxide
(c) sulphur di oxide
(d) hydrogen sulphide
Answer:
(c) sulphur di oxide

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 36.
Free living aerobic nitrogen fixing bacterium is
a) Azotobacter, Beijemeckia and Derxia
b) Nostoc, Anabaena, and Oscullatoria
c) Saccharomyces, Pullularia, Pseudomonas
d) Chlorobium and Rhodospirillum
Answer:
a) Azotobacter, Beijerneckia and Derxia

Question 37.
Leguminous plants does not include
a) Black gram
b) Bengal gram
c) Pongamia
d) Casuarina
Answer:
d) Casuarina

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 38.
Cyanobacteria does not include
a) Nostoc
b) Anabaena
c) Clostridium
d) Oscillatoria
Answer:
c) Clostridium

II. Match The Following & Find Out The Correct Option

Question 39.
Cuscuta – A) Giant flower
Dianaea – B) Pitcher plant
Rafflesia – C) Dodder
Utricularia – D) Venus fly trap
Nepenthus – E) Bladder wort
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 5
Answer:
b) C-D-A-E-B

Question 40.

Column I Column II
I) 94% of dry weight of plant comprises A) K
II) Maintain turgid and osmotic Potential of cell B) Mn
III) Mineral that play important role in photosynthesis of water C) Mg
IV) Activator of enzymes RUBP and PEP carboxylase D) C,H,O

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 6
Answer:
b) D-A-B-C

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 41.

Column I Column II
I) Potassium A) Mitotic cell division & spindle fomiation
II) Calcium B) Constituent of vitamins Biotin and Thiamine
III) Sulphur C) Essential component of amino acids Nucleic acids
IV) Nitrogen D) Maintain opening and closing of Stomata

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 7
Answer:
a) D-A-B-C

Question 42.
I) Criteria required for essential minerals was given by – A) Julius von Sachs
II) Word – Hydroponics Was coined by – B)SoiferHillel& David Durger
III) Hydroponics was developed by – C)Amon& Stout
IV) Aeroponics was developed by – D) William Frederick Goerick
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 8
Answer:
c) C -D-A-B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

III. Find Out The Incorrect Statement With Reference To Potassium

Question 43.
a. It is essential for opening & closing of stomata
b. It is an essential component of vitamins, hormones, alkaloids and chlorophyll
c. It maintains osmotic potential of the cell
d. It maintain anion, cation balance by ion exchange.
Answer:
b. It is an essential component of vitamins, hormones, alkaloids and chlorophyll

Question 44.
a. Magnesium is a constituent of chlorophyll
b. Iron is essential for the formation of chlorophyll
c. Phosphorus is a component of ATP
d. Copper is essential for the synthesis of IAA
Answer:
d. Copper is essential for the synthesis of IAA

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 45.
Find out wrong choice with reference to symbiotic mode of Nutrition
a. Lichens
b. Mycorrhizae
c. Coralloid roots of cycas
d. Viscum
Answer:
d. Viscum

Question 46.
The deficiency of which two exhibit competitive behaviour and the deficiencey of the two showing same symptoms.
(I) Iron
(II) Magnesium
(III) Calcium
(IV) Manganese
a) I & II
b) II & III
c) III & IV
d) I & IV
Answer:
d. I & IV

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 47.
Statement
(I) Alnus and Casuarina are nonlegume nitrogen fixers containing bacterium Frankia
(II) Nostoc and Anabaena are present in the corolloid roots of cycas.
a) Both (I) & (IT) are correct
b) (I) is correct (II) is wrong
c) (I) is wrong (II) is correct
d) Both (I) & (II) are wrong
Answer:
a) Both (I) & (II) are correct

Question 48.
Statement
(I) Dionaea is a submerged hydrophyte in which leaf is modified into a bladder to trap insects
(II) Loranthus is a partial stem parasite, absorb water and minerals from the xylem of the host
a) Both (I) & (II) are correct
b) (I) is correct (II) is wrong
c) (I) is wrong (II) is correct
d) Both (I) & (II) are wrong
Answer:
c) (I) is wrong (II) is correct

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Assertion ‘A’ & Reason ‘R’
a) Both ‘A’ and ‘R’ are True and ‘R’ is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are True, but R is not the correct explanation of A
c) A is True but ‘R’ is False
d) A& Rare False

Question 49.
Assertion: A Manganese is a Micro element
Reason: R Micro elements are required in traces only, less than 1 mg/gm of dry matter
Answer:
a) Both A and R are True and R is the correct explanation of A

Question 50.
Assertion: Calcium is a constituent of cell wall
Reason: R Calcium is required in mitotic division.
Answer:
b) A and R are True but ‘R’ is not the correct explanation of A

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 51.
Assertion: A Deficiency of sulphur causes chlorosis in plants
Reason: R Sulphur is a constituent of chlorophyll
Answer:
c) A is True but ‘R’ is false

Question 52.
Assertion: A Plants absorb Nitrogen in the form of Nitrate only
Reason: R Nitrogen is the most critical element
Answer:
d) Both A and R are false

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 53.
Assertion: A Mineral salt absorption is an active process.
Reason: R Metabolic energy is not used in active absorption.
Answer:
c) A is true but ‘R’ is false

IV. 2 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Define micronutrients of plants.
Answer:
Essential minerals which are required in less concentration called Micronutrients.

Question 2.
Is there any mne monic for remembering essential minerals?
Answer:
CHOPKNs Cafe Mg B Mn Cu Zn Mo Cl (C) HOPKINS (name) Cafe managed by Mine CUZINS, Mo tnd Claude”.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 3.
What is the role of molybdenum in the conversion of nitrogen into ammonia?
Answer:
Molybdenum (Mo) is essential for nitrogenase enzyme during the reduction of atmospheric nitrogen into ammonia.

Question 4.
What are the minerls classifed as unclassified minerals and why?
Answer:
5ome minerals Such as Sodium, Silicon, Cobalt and Selenium some minerals are not included in the list ol essential nuitrients by they play some specific roles.
Eg. Silicon

  • essential for pest resistance
  • prevent water lodging
  • aids in cell wall formation in Equisetaceae, Cyperaceae & Gramineae

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 5.
What are the deficiency symptoms of nitrogen?
Answer:
Chlorosis, stunted growth, anthocyanin formation.

Question 6.
Distinguish between Hydroponics & Aeroponics
Answer:
Hydroponics: Growing plants in nutrient solution with roots immerse in it and air is supplied with the help of tube.
Hydroponics: It Is a system where roots suspended in air and nuitrients solution in a tank is sprayed over the roots by motor driven rotor – in the form of mist.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 7.
Define the term Siderophores.
Answer:
Siderophores (iron carriers) are iron-chelating agents produced by bacteria. They are used to chelate ferric iron (Fe3+) from environment and host.

Question 8.
What are called critical elements & complete fertilizers?
Answer:

  • Macro elements which commonly remain deficient in the soil are called Critical elements, (ie) N.P.K.
  • The fertilizer which contain critical elements are called complete fertilizer. They are expressed in the ratio 15: 15: 15(N:P: K)

Question 9.
Why is Iron kept between Macro and Micro nuitrients?
Answer:
Iron is required lesser than macro nuitrients and larger than the micronuitrient so it can be placed in any one of the two groups.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 9

Question 10.
Write down the deficiency symptoms of molybdenum in plants.
Answer:
Chlorosis, necrosis, delayed flowering, retarded growth and whip tail disease of cauliflower.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 11.
List two purpose for which you think Magnesium is required essentially to the plants.
Answer:
(I) Synthesis of Chlorophyll
(II) Formation of nodules in legumes

Question 12.
Define Aeroponics.
Answer:
It is a system where roots are suspended in air and nutrients are sprayed over the roots by a motor driven rotor.

Question 13.
What is meant by Toxicity of Minerals
Answer:
If mineral nuitrients lesser than critical concentration cause deficiency, where as when there is increase in
mineral nuitrients more than normal concentration cause Toxicity Toxicity ¡s that particular concentration at which 10% of the dry weight of tissue is reduced.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 14.
Give examples for Nitrogen Fixation with out nodulation.
Answer:

Plants Prokaryotes
1. Lichens Anabaena & Nostoc
2.  Anthoceros Nostoc
3.  Azolla Anabaena azollae
4. Cycas Anabaena & Nostoc

Question 15.
Give examples for Non – symbiotic Nitrogen fixation by bacteria and Fungi.
Answer:

Aerobic Azotobacter and Dervia
Anaerobic Closthdium
Photosynthetic Chiorobiuni & Rhodospirillum
Chemosynthetic Disulfo – vibrio
Freeliving Fungi Yeast & Pullularia
Cyanobacteria Ñostoc, Anabaen

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 16.
Define the term Nitrate assimilation.
Answer:
The process by which nitrate is reduced to ammonia is called nitrate assimilation and occurs during the nitrogen cycle.

Question 17.
What are the negative effects of denitrification.
Answer:

  • Nitrate in the soil are converted back to atmospheric nitrogen.
  • Denitrification process deplete important nuitrients from the soil.
  • It also causes acidification of the soil.

Question 18.
Name 2 hormones involved in Nodule formation.
Answer:
During nodule formation in leguminous plants cytokinin from bacteria and Auxin from host (leguminous) plant promotes cell division and leads to nodule formation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 19.
Give two examples of symbiotic mode of nutrition.
Answer:
Two examples of symbiotic mode of nutrition:

  1. Lichens: It is a mutual association of Algae and Fungi. Algae prepares food and fungi absorb water and provides thallus structure.
  2. Mycorrhizae: Fungi associated with roots of higher plants including Gymriosperms. eg: Pinus.

Question 20.
Decreased availability of the element results in early fall of fruits and flowers. Identify the element.
Answer:
Phosphorus, Magnesium and Copper (Any one of these three elements) may cause the above symptoms.

Question 21.
Name any 3 diseases caused by copper deficiency.
Answer:

  1. Die back of Citrus.
  2. Reclamation disease of cereals & legumes.
  3. Exanthema in Citrus.

Question 22.
Notes on unclassified minerals.
Answer:
Required by some plants – for some specific functions, in trace amounts.
Example: Sodium, Silicon, Selenium & Cobalt.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 23.
Explain Nitrate Assimilation.
Answer:
Definaition: The process by which nitrate is reduced to ammonia is called Nitrate assimilation and it occurs during Nitrogen cycle.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 10
Question 24.
Explain Aluminium Toxicity.
Answer:
Aluminium toxicity causes,

  • Precipitation ofNucleic acid
  • Inhibition of ATP ase
  • Inhibition of cell division and binding of Plasma membrane with Calmodulin.

Question 25.
Differentiate between Nitrification & Denitrification
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 11

Question 26.
Organisms like Pseudomonas and Thiobacillus are of great significance in nitrogen cycle. How?
Answer:
These microorganisms carry out denitrification they help to maintain the constant level of nitrogen in the atmosphere.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 27.
What is meant by Symbiotic association give examples?
Answer:
Close relationship between two organism, both being benefitted out of it is known as symbiosis.
Eg. 1. Nitrogen fixing bacteria Nitrosomonas living in the root nodules of leguminous plants.
2. Fungi associated with roots of higher plants is a symbiotic association known as Mycorrhiza

Question 28.
What is the use of FTWS.
Answer:

  • FTWS – means floating treatment wet lands.
  • It works on the principle of hydroponics recently FTWS work on the principle of hydroponics, helping to solve pollution that come up due to Eutrophication.

Question 29.
Notes on Lichens.
Answer:

  • Lichens are pioneer species in xeric succession.
  • Lichens are nothing but symbiotic association of Algae and Fungi partners.
  • Lichens are also indicators of S02 pollution.

Question 30.
Notes on Haustoria.
Answer:
Total parasitic or partial parasites they have some special structures to absorb food or water from the host plant phloem and xylem. These special absorbing structures are known as Haustoria.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 31.
Identify the diagram A.
Answer:
Cycas corolloid roots – have symbiotic association with Nostoc helping to fix nitrogen.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 12

Question 32.
Identify the diagram.
Answer:
Root nodules of leguminous plant inhabiting Rhizobium fixing nitrogen

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 13

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

3 Mark Questions.

V. Identify And Complete The Equations

Question 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 14
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 15

Question 2.
Explain the unclassified minerals required for plants.
Answer:
Minerals like Sodium,Silicon, Cobalt and Selenium are not included in the list of essential nutrients but are required by some plants, these minerals are placed in the list of unclassified minerals. These minerals play specific roles for example, Silicon is essential for pest resistance, prevent water lodging and aids cell wall formation in Equisetaceae (Equisetum), Cyperaceae and Gramineae.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 3.
Draw a model of Hydroponics.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 16

Question 4.
Explain briefly the functions and deficiency symptoms of potassium.
Answer:
Functions: Maintains turgidity and osmotic potential of the cell, opening and closure of stomata, phloem translocation, stimulate activity of enzymes, anion and cation balance by ion – exchange. It is absorbed as K+ ions. Deficiency symptoms: Marginal chlorosis, necrosis, low cambial activity, loss of apical dominance, lodging in cereals and curled leaf margin.

Question 5.
Draw the schematic representation of Nitrogenase enzyme function.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 17

Question 6.
Explain the term critical concentration of minerals.
Answer:
To increase productivity and also to avoid mineral toxicity knowledge of critical concentration is essential. Mineral nutrients lesser than critical concentration cause deficiency symptoms. Increase of mineral nutrients more than the normal concentration causes toxicity. A concentration, at which 10% of the dry weight of tissue is reduced, is considered a toxic critical concentration.

Question 7.
Nitrogen fixation is shown by Prokaryotes and not by Eukaryotes comment.
Answer:
Nitrogen fixation is the phenomenon that occurs in Prokaryotes but not in Eukaryotes, because the enzymes nitrogenase, which is capable of nitrogen reduction is present exclusively in prokaryotes and such microbes are often called fixers.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 8.
Who are people responsible for developing hydroponics?
Answer:
Hydroponics or Soil less culture: Von Sachs developed a method of growing plants in nutrient solution. The commonly used nutrient solutions are Knop solution (1865) and Amon and Hoagland Solution (1940). Later the term Hydroponics was coined by Goerick (1940) and he also introduced commercial techniques for hydroponics. In hydroponics roots are immersed in the solution containing nutrients and air is supplied with help of tube.

VI. 5 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Classify minerals on the basis of on their function.
a) Structural component – C, H, O & N
b) Enzyme function – Mo, Zn, Mg, &Ni
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 18
C) Osmotic potential – K:
Potassium -(K) – maintain osmotic Potential by 2 steps.

  1. Absorption of water
  2. Movement of stomata & turgidity

d) Energy components:
Mg – in chlorophyll
P- in ATP

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 2.
Tabulate the mode of absorption, function and deficiency symptoms of any 5 microelements.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 19

Question 3.
Give the details of minerals and their deficiency symptoms.
Answer:
Name of the deficiency disease and symptoms:

  1. Chlorosis (Overall)
    • Interveinal chlorosis
    • Marginal chlorosis
  2. Necrosis (Death of the tissue)
  3. Stunted growth
  4. Anthocyanin formation
  5. Delayed flowering
  6. Die back of shoot, Reclamation disease, Exanthema in citrus (gums on bark)
  7. Hooked leaf tip
  8. Little Leaf
  9. Brown heart of turnip and Internal cork of apple
  10. Whiptail of cauliflower and cabbage
  11. Curled leaf margin

Deficiency minerals:

  1. Nitrogen, Potassium, Magnesium, Sulphur, Iron, Manganese, Zinc and Molybdenum. Magnesium, Iron, Manganese and Zinc Potassium
  2. Magnesium, Potassium, Calcium, Zinc, Molybdenum and Copper.
  3. Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Calcium, Potassium and Sulphur.
  4. Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Magnesium and Sulphur
  5. Nitrogen, Sulphur and Molybdenum
  6. Copper
  7. Calcium
  8. Zinc
  9. Boron
  10. Molybdenum
  11. Potassium

Question 4.
Why are NPK fertilizers important to plants?
Answer:
Nitrogen: It helps in plant growth and development.

  • It required in large amount
  • It is essential component of Proteins, Amino acids, Nucleic acids, Vitamins, Hormones, Chlorophyll etc.

Phosphorus:
It is an important constituent of Cell membrane, Proteins, Nucleic acids, ATP, NADP etc.

Potassium:

  • It is essential to maintain turgidity and osmotic potential of the cell.
  • Opening and closure of stomata.
  • Phloem translocation.
  • Ion exchange etc.
  • So overall all the three in right proportion is used by farmers for various plants to enhance yield.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 5.
Tabulate the major Essential elements their function & Deficiency symptoms.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 20
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 21

Question 6.
What are the stages of Root nodule formation.
Answer:
1. Attraction:
Legume roots secretes Phenolics to attract Rhizobium.

2. Infection:

  • Rhizobium – reaches rhizosphere
  • Rhizosphere – to root hair.
  • Curling of root hairs.

3. Spreading & multiplication:
Infection thread grows inwards and infected area is separated from normal tissue.

4. Bacteriod formation:
A membrane bound bacterium is formed inside the nodule ……………. called Bacterioid.

5. Nodule formation:

  • Cytokinin from Bacteria.
  • Auxin from legume roots together promote cell division and nodules are formed.

Question 7.
Explain the fate of Ammonia or Assimilation of Ammonia.
Answer:

  • Ammonia ions are quite toxic to plants, and hence cannot accumulate in the plants.
  • It should be converted into Amino acids.

There are 3 methods by which it is done.

I) Reductive amination:
In this ammonia reacts with Ketoglutaric acid and form glutamic acid.Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 22

II) Transamination:

  • It involves the transfer of amino group from one amino acid to the ketogroup of another keto acid.
  • Glutamic acid is the main amino acid from which the transfer of NH2 (amino group) takes place and other amino acids are fonned through transamination.
  • The enzyme Transaminase + Pyridoxus phosphate (COenz) reactions.

Example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 23

III) Catalytic Amination (GS/GOGAT path way)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 24

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition

Question 8.
Explain parasitic mode of Nuitrition.
Answer:
Definition:
Organism deriving their nuitrients from another organism (host and causing damage/disease to the host is known as parasite. Stem parasite Root parasite Stem parasite Root parasite.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 12 Mineral Nutrition 25
I) Obligate or Total parasite :

  1. Completely depends on host for their survival produce haustoria.
    Total stem parasite:
  2. Leafless plant twine around the host. Eg. Cuscuta on Zizipus, citrus etc.
    Total root parasite:
  3. Plants do not have stem axis – so grow in the roots of host plants produce haustoria.
    Eg. Rafflesia, Orobanche and Balanophora.

II) Partial parasite:
Plant have chlorophyll on their leaves dependent on water and mineral requirements.

  • Partial stem parasite: The plant grow an fig and mango and absorb water and minerals from xylem of host through haustoria.
    Eg. Loranthus.
  • Partial root parasite: This plant in its juvenile stages produces haustoria which grow on roots of many forest trees.
    Eg. Sandal wood tree (santalum album)

Question 9.
Describe Saprophytic mode of nuitrition in Angiosperms?
Answer:
Definition:
Derving nuitrients from dead and decaying organic matter is known as saprophytic – nuitrition.
Eg. Bacteria, Fungi

Saprophytic Angiosperms:

  • Neottia: (Bird’s nest orchid) Roots of Neottia get associated with the mycorrhizae and absorb nuitrients from the litter in the soil.
  • The plant leaves lack chlorophyll so dependon mycorrhiza to absorb nuitrients from the decomposed litter in the soil.
  • Monotropa: (Indian pipe) It also lack leaves, so absorb nuitrients from the soil through the mycorrhizal association.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Pdf Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

11th Bio Botany Guide Tissue and Tissue System Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part-I.

Question 1.
Refer to the given figure and select the correct statement.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 1.
i) A, B, and C are histogen of shoot apex,
ii) A Gives rise to medullary rays.
iii) B Gives rise to cortex.
iv) C Gives rise to epidermis
a) I and ii only
b) ii and iii only
c) i and iii only
d) iii and iv only
Answer:
c) i and iii only

Question 2.
Read the following sentences and identify the correctly matched sentences.
i) In exarch condition, the protoxylem lies outside of the metaxylem.
ii) In endarch condition, the protoxylem lies towards the centre.
iii) In centrarach condition, metaxylem lies in the middle of the protoxylem
iv) In mesarch condition, protoxylem lies in the middle of the metaxylem
a) i, ii, and iii only
b) ii, iii, and iv only
c) i, ii, and iv only
d) All of these
Answer:
c) i, ii and iv only

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 3.
In Gymnosperms, the activity of sieve tubes are controlled by.
a) Nearby sieve tube members
b) Pholem parenchyma cells
c) Nucleus of companion cell
d) Nucleus ofalbuminous cells
Answer:
d) Nucleus of albuminous cells

Question 4.
When a leaf trace extends from a vascular bundle in a dicot stem, what would be the arrangement of vascular in the veins of the leaf?
a) Xylem would be on top and the pholem on the bottom
b) Pholem would be on the top and the xylem on the bottom
c) Xylem would encircle the pholem
d) Pholem would encircle the xylem
Answer:
a) Xylem would be on top and the pholem on the bottom

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 5.
Grafting is successful in dicots but not in monocots because the dicots have
a) Vascular bundles arranged ina ring
b) Cambium for secondary growth
c) Vessels with elements arranged end to end
d) Cork cambium
Answer:
b) Cambium for secondary growth

Question 6.
Why the cells of sclerenchyma and tracheids become dead?
Answer:
The cells of sclerenchyma and tracheids become dead because they lack protoplasm.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 7.
Explain sclereids with their types
Answer:
1. Sclereids – dead cells Isodiametric – but some elongated.
2. Cell wall is very thick due to lignification
3. Lumen – much reduced
4. Pits – may be simple or branched.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 2
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 3
Question 8.
What are sieve tubes? Explain.
Answer:
Sieve tubes are long tube-like conducting elements in the phloem. These are formed from a series of cells called sieve tube elements. The sieve tube elements are arranged one above the other and form vertical sieve tube. The end wall contains a number of pores and it looks like a sieve. So it is called as sieve plate. The sieve elements show nacreous thickenings on their lateral walls. They may possess simple or compound sieve plates.

The function of sieve tubes are believed to be controlled by campanion cells In mature sieve tube, Nucleus is absent. It contains a lining layer of cytoplasm. A special protein (P. Protein = Phloem Protein) called slime body is seen in it. In mature sieve tubes, the pores in the sieve plate are blocked by a substance called callose (callose plug). The conduction of food material takes lace through cytoplasmic strands. Sieve tubes occur only in Angiosperms.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 4

Question 9.
Distinguish the anatomy of dicot root from monocot root
Answer:

Characters

Dicot root

Monocot root

1. Pericycle Gives rise to lateral roots, phellogen and a part of vascular cambium Gives rise to lateral roots only.
2. Vascular tissue Usually limited number of xylem and phloem strips. Usually more number of xylem and phloem strips,
3. Conjunctive tissue Parenchymatous; Its cells are differentiated into vascular cambium. Mostly sclerenchymatous but sometimes parenchymatous. It is never differentiated in to vascular cambium.
4. Cambium It appears as a secondary meristem at the time of secondary growth. It is altogether absent.
5. Xylem Usually tetrach Usually poly arch
6. Pith Absent Present at the centre

Question 10.
Distinguish the anatomy of dicot stem from monocot stem
Answer:

Characters

Dicot root

Monocot root

1. Hypodermis collenchymatous Sclerenchymatous
2. Ground tissue Differentiated into cortex, endodermis and pericycle and pith Not differentiated, but it is a continuous mass of parenchyma.
3. StarchSheath Present Absent
4. Medullary rays Present Absent
5. Vascular bundles a) Collateral and open a) Collateral and closed
b) Arranged in a ring b) Scattered in ground tissue
c) Secondary growth occurs c) Secondary growth usually does not occur.

Part-II

11th Bio Botany Guide Tissue and Tissue System Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose the correct answer

Question 1.
Who is the father of plant anatomy?
(a) David Muller
(b) Katherine Esau
(c) Nehemiah Grew
(d) Hofmeister
Answer:
(c) Nehemiah Grew

Question 2.
Father of Anatomy, as well as the scientist, who coined the term Meristem is
a) Hofmeister
b) Mettemius
c) Nehemiah Grew
d) Bloch
Answer:
c. Nehemia Grew

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 3.
The book “Anatomy of seed plants” is written by:
(a) Hanstein
(b) Schmidt
(c) Nicholsen
(d) Katherine Esau
Answer:
(d) Katherine Esau

Question 4.
The fibres in which lignin is less and cellulose is more in the cell walls is known as
a) Gelatinous fibres,
b) Septate fibres
c) Libriform fibres
d) Hard fibres
Answer:
a. Gelatinous fibres

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 5.
Which of the statement is not correct?
(a) Meristematic cells are self-perpetuating
(b) Meristematic cells are the most actively dividing cells
(c) Meristematic cells have large vacuoles
(d) Meristematic cells have dense cytoplasm with a prominent nucleus
Answer:
(c) Meristematic cells have large vacuoles

Question 6.
In mature sieve tubes, the pores in the sieve plates are blocked by a substance called
a) gum & nesins
b) Callose
c) Callus
d) Pectinose
Answer:
b. Callose

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 7.
The tunica is:
(a) the peripheral zone of shoot apex, that forms cortex
(b) the inner zone of shoot apex, that forms stele
(c) the peripheral zone of shoot apex, that forms the epidermis
(d) the inner zone of shoot apex, that forms cortex and stele
Answer:
(c) the peripheral zone of shoot apex, that forms the epidermis

Question 8.
The tissue, that provide mechanical support and elasticity to the growing parts of the plant is
a) Sclerenchyma
b) Sclereids
c) Fibres
d) Collenchyma
Answer:
d. Collenchyma

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 9.
The quiescent centre concept was proposed by:
(a) Lindall
(b) Clowes
(c) Holstein
(d) Sanio
Answer:
(b) Clowes

Question 10.
A meristem which divide in all planes is called
a) Lateral meristem
b) Apical meristem
c) Plate meristem
d) Mass meristem
Answer:
d. Mass meristem

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 11.
Petioles of banana is composed of:
(a) storage parenchyma
(b) stellate parenchyma
(c) angular collenchyma
(d) prosenchyma
Answer:
(b) stellate parenchyma

Question 12.
The term ‘Hadrome’ for xylem and ‘Leptome’ for phloem were coined by
a) Sachs
b) Nageli
c) Hanstein
d) Haberlandt
Answer:
d. Haberlandt

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 13.
The seed coat of groundnut is made up of:
(a) stone cells
(b) osteosclereids
(c) macrosclereids
(d) parenchyma cells
Answer:
(b) osteosclereids

Question 14.
The theory equivalent to Tunicia Corpus theory is
a) Histogen theory
b) Korperkappe theory
c) Apical cell theory
d) Quiescent center concept
Answer:
b. Korper Kappe theory

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 15.
The term xylem was introduced by:
(a) Alexander
(b) Nageli
(c) Holstein
(d) Schmidt
Answer:
(b) Nageli

Question 16.
Trichoblasts are
a) Long cells seen in the root epidermis
b) the hair-like appendages seen on stem epidermis
c) the short cells seen in the piliferous layer of roots
d) the cells helping in the dispersal of seeds and fruits
Answer:
c. the short cells seen in the piliferous layer of roots

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 17.
In cross-section, the tracheids are:
(a) hexagonal in shape
(b) rectangular in shape
(c) triangular in shape
(d) polygonal in shape
Answer:
(d) polygonal in shape

Question 18.
Stele include
a) Endodermis, pericycle, & Vascular bundle
b) Pericycle, Vascular bundle & pith
c) Cortex, endodermis, & Percycle
d) Xylem, phloem, cambium, & Pith
Answer:
b. Pericycle, Vascular bundle & Pith

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 19.
Bulliform cells are present in:
(a) mango
(b) grasses
(c) groundnut
(d) potato
Answer:
(b) grasses

Question 20.
Water stomata occur in
a) Mangrove plants
b) Grass plants
c) Monocotyledon plants
d) Aquatic plants
Answer:
b. Grass Plants

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 21.
In Ocimum the trichomes are:
(a) non – glandular
(b) fibrous
(c) glandular
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) glandular

Question 22.
Sunken stomata is an adaptation seen in
a) Cycas
b) Neem
c) Ficus
d)Nerium
Answer:
d. Nerium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 23.
Casparian strips contain thickenings of:
(a) calcium carbonate and calcium oxalate
(b) carbohydrate, protein and lignin
(c) crystal of calcium oxalate
(d) lignin, suberin and some other carbohydrates
Answer:
(d) lignin, suberin and some other carbohydrates

Question 24.
The extension of pith cells that are involved in radial conduction of food and water is known as
a) Amphivasal vascular rays
b) Radial vascular parenchyma
c) Medullary ray
d) Inter fascicular parenchyma
Answer:
c. Medullary ray

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 25.
Secondary phloem is derived from:
(a) apical meristem
(b) vascular cambium
(c) primary phloem
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) vascular cambium

Question 26.
Ground tissue includes all tissues except
a) Vascular bundles and pith
b) Epidermis and vascular strands
c) Cortex and vascular strands
d) Pith and conjunctive tissue
Answer:
b. Epidermis and vascular strands

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 27.
In beans, the metaxylem vessels are generally:
(a) polygonal in shape
(b) circular in shape
(d) rectangular in shape
(d) triangular in shape
Answer:
(a) polygonal in shape

Question 28.
The thickening of which substance make endodermis impervious to water
a) Hemicellulose, cellulose, and pectin
b) Lignin, suberin, or cutin
c) Cellulose, Pectin, and Lignin
d) Pectin, Hemicellulose, and Suberin
Answer:
b. Lignin, Suberin, or Cutin

II. Match The Following & Find Out The Correct Order:

Question 1.
(I) Protoxylem lacuna – A. Liriodendron
(II) Multiple perforation plates – B. Gnetum
(III) Fibre like sclereids occur in – C. Zeamaysstem
(IV) Vessels occur in – D. Olea europaea
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 5
Answer:
a) C-A-D-B

Question 2.
(I) Apical Meristem – A. Cambium
(II) Lateral Meristem – B. Intemode
(III) Intercalary meristem – C. Root Apex
(IV) Secondary meristem – D. Cork cambium
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 6
Answer:
d) C-A-B-D

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 3.
Name of the cell Occurence
(I) Bulliform cells or Motor cells – A. Rose&Ocimum
(II) Multilayered epidermis – B. Styrax & Hibiscus
(III) Glandular trichomes – C. Nerium & Ficus
(IV) Stellate hairs – D. Chloris & Grass
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 7
Answer:
a) D-C-A-B

Question 4.
Nature of vascular bundle Example
(I) Conjoint, Collateral & closed – A. Dicot root
(II) Conjoint, Collateral open Endarch – B. Monocot stem
(III) Radial, Tetrarch & Exarch – C. Dicot leaf & Monocot leaf
(IV) Conjoint, Collateral Close & Endarch- D. Dicot stem
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 8
Answer:
b) C-D-A-B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 5.
(i) Surface fibre – A. Jute
(II) Soft fibre – B. Agave
(III) Leaf fibre – C. Coconut
(IV) Septate fibre – D. Cofton
(V) Mesocarp fibre – E. Teak
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 9
Answer:
b) D – A – B – E

Question 6.
Lateral roots originate
(i) Endo genously
(ii) From pericycle cells
(iii) Exogenously
(iv) From endodermal cells
a) I & II
b) II & III
c) III & IV
d) I & IV
Answer:
a. I & II

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 7.
Monocot stem has
(I) Medulla or pith
(II) Atactostele
(III) Cambium – present
(IV) Scattered & skull-shaped bundles occur
a) I & II
b) II & III
c) II & IV
d) I & III
Answer:
c. II & IV

Question 8.
Which of the following statements are correct with reference to monocot stem
(I) Starch sheath is absent
(II) Pith is absent
(III) Pericycle absent
(IV) Phloem parenchyma is present
a) I, II, III
b) I and IV
c) II and IV
d) III & IV
Answer:
a. I, II,& III

III. State True Or False & On That Basis Choose The Right Answer

Question 1.
I) Lateral meristem – It occurs between the mature tissues, responsible for elongation of intemodes.
II) Inter calary meristem – It occurs along the longitudinal axis of stem and root, responisble for secondary growth
III) Protoderm – It gives rise to epiderminal tissue system, (i.e) epidermis, stomata & hairs
IV) Ground meristem – It gives rise to all tissues except Vascular strands and epidermis
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 10
Answer:
b) False – False – True – True

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 2.
I) Phloem fibres and phloem parenchyma, are absence in primary phloem of monocot stem.
II) Phloem fibres are also known as Libriform fibres.
Ill Sieve cells are main food conducting elements of Angiosperms
IV) Phloem fibres are absent in primary phloem of Dicot stem
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 11
Answer:
a) True – False – False – True

Question 3.
I) The bundle cap of Dicto stem is known as Hard bast.
II) The bundle cap of Dicot stem is parenchymatous
III) The bundle sheath of Dicot leaf is sclerenchymatous walls of Endodermis in Endodermis is known as the outermost layer of stele.
IV) In Angiosperms pericycle gives rise to lateral roots
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 12
Answer:
b) False – True – False – True

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 4.
I) Prickles are one type of epidermal emergences with vascular supply
II) Albuniinous cells! straburger cells – in conifers are analogous to companian cells of Angiosperm but
III) Piliferous layer, Epiblema are other names of Endodermis.
IV) Hypodermis of Dicot stem is living, whereas the Hypodermis of Moncot stem is dead.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 12
Answer:
d) False – True – False – True

Question 5.
I) The inner most layer of cortex is known as pericycle
II) Suberin, lignin, and some other carbohydrates are present as strips in the radial and inner tangentious walls of the endodermis
III) Endodermis is known as the outer most layer of stele.
IV) InAngiosperms pericycle gives rise to lateral roots
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 13
Answer:
b) False – True – False – True

IV. With Reference To The Given Diagram, Identify The Incorrect Option Given Below:

Question 1.
a) Living cells with cell wall made up of more of hemicellulose and pectin besides cellulose
b) The type of tissue is of common occurrence in the hypodermis of Helianthus stem
c) Here cells are compactly arranged with thickening on the intercellular spaces
d) Here cells compactly arranged with thickening appear as successive tangential layers
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 14
Answer:
c) Here cells are compactly arranged with thickening on the intercellular spaces.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 2.
With reference to the given diagram/ figure of section of the plant organ, identify the in correct.
a) There is no epidermal growth, and hypodermis is sclerenchymatous
b) Cortex is absent but ground tissue is present
c) Endodermis, pericycle and pith are absent
d) Vascular bundles are scattered, skull shaped conjoint, collateral open and endarch
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 15
Answer:
d) Vascular bundles are scattered skull-shaped conjoint, collateral open and endarch

Question 3.
With reference to the given figure of the section of the plant part, identify the incorrect option given.
a) The vascular bundles are radial, tetrarch and endarch
b) The vascular bundles are radial tetrarch, and exarch
c) This is the cross-section of the primary structure root of Beam
d) Here xylem and phloem are arranged alternate to one another
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 16
Answer:
a) The vascular bundles are radial, tetrarch and endarchces.

Question 4.
With reference to the figure choose the right option.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 17

A

B C

D

a Lateral meristem LeafPrimordia Intercalary meristem Apical meristem
b Apical meristem Lateral meristem Intercalary meristem Leaf primordia
c Apical meristem Intercalary meristem Lateral meristem Leaf primordia
d Intercalary meristem Lateral meristem Leaf primordia Apical meristem

V. Out of the given four options, find out the three relevant statements with reference to Quiescent centre.

Question 1.
a) It is the peripheral zone of shoot apex
b) This is the appearance in the active region of cells in root promeristem
c) It is located between calyptrate and other differentiating cells
d) It is the site of hormone synthesis.
i) a, b & C
ii) b, c & d
iii) a, c & d
iv) a, b & d
Answer:
ii) b, c & d

Question 2.
Out of the given four, find out the three relevant statements with reference to sclereids
a) These are dead cells, isodiametric, but some elongated to
b) The cell wall is very thick due to lignification
c) These are living, lignified cells with elongated tapering ends
d) These are only mechanical in function.
i) a,b& c
ii) a,c& d
iii) a,b,& d
iv) b,c, & d
Answer:
iii) a,b, & d

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 3.
Generally, Ground tissue include
a) Cortex
b) Pericycle
c) Pith
d) Vascular bundle
i) a,b& d
ii) b,c,& d
iii) a,c,& d
iv) a,b,& c
Answer:
iv) a,b& c

VI. Find out the incorrect statement.

Question 1.
a) A stoma is surrounded by pa ir of guard cells
b) Each stoma opens into an air chamber
c) Guard cells contain no chloroplasts
d) The cuticle helps to check transpiration
Answer:
c. Guard cells contain no chloroplasts

Question 2.
a) Sieve cells occur in gymnosperms
b) Sieve tubes occur in Angiosperms
c) Sieve cells are absent in Angiosperms
d) Vessels are absent in Gnetum
Answer:
d. Vessels are absent in Gneturn

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 3.
Read the following statements having two blank A and B
Collenchyma cell walls contain and find the correct option for A and B

Blank A Blank B
a) Pectin 1. Lignin
b) cellulose 2. Aminosugar
e) Lignin 3. Cellulose
d) Pectin 4. Hemicellulose

Answer:
d. Pectin Hemicellulose

Question 4.
Read the following statements having two blank A and B Collenchyma cell walls contain A and B find the correct option for A and B
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 18
Answer:
C. C → E → A → D → B

VII. From the given choose the correct answer – Regarding Assertion & Reason

Question 1.
ASSERTION: – A The endodermis of root is homologous to starch sheath of dicot stem.
REASON -R The cells of endodermis are rich in starch grain and so-referred as starch sheath.
a. A & R correct and R is explaining A
b. A&R correct but R is not explaining A
c. A-correct but R is false
d. A – correct and R is not explaining ‘A’
Answer:
a. A&R correct and R is explaining A

Question 2.
ASSERTION: – A In Gymnosperm – plants show well developed vessels & fibres
REASON -R Companian cells are absent in Gymnosperm plants.
a. BothA&Rture, ‘R’is giving correct explanation of‘A’
b. Both A&R- true, but ‘ R’ is not correct explanation of ‘ A’
c. Both A & R are false
d. ‘A’ is false and ‘R’ is true.
Answer:
d. ‘A’ is false and ‘R’ is true.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 3.
ASSERTION:-A In grasses the bundle sheath is called kranz sheath
REASON -R It is involved in photsynthesis
a. ‘A’ and ‘R’ are right
b. A and R are wrong
c. R does not explain A
d. A is right and ‘R’ is wrong
Answer:
a. ‘A’ and ‘R’ are right

VIII. 2 Marks Questions

Question 1.
What is the Use of the study of Anatomy?
Answer:

  • The organisation of cells and different kinds of tissues is understood.
  • It is studied by means of dissection and microscopic examination.
  • The organisation of cells and different kinds of tissues is understood by the study of anatomy
  • The anatomical structure of different organs of plants can be compared
  • The anatomical knowledge play an important role in taxonomical studies too.

Question 2.
What are the different types of plant tissue?
Answer:
The two types of principal groups are:

  1. Meristematic tissues
  2. Permanent tissues.

Question 3.
The pulp of pear is stony & gritty, whereas the seed coat of Pisum sativum seed coat is bony & shiny give reasons.
Answer:
The pulp of pear has Brachysclereids that make it stony and gritty, whereas the seed Coat of Peas seed coat is bony and shiny due to the presence of Osteosclereids

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 4.
Mention the function of the apical meristem.
Answer:
Present in apices of root and shoot. It is responsible for the increase in the length of the plant, it is called primary growth.

Question 5.
Differentiate between Centrach and Mesearch xylem
Answer:

Centrach

Mesarch

Protoxylem lies in the centre, surrounded by metaxylem Protoxylem lies in the centre, surrounded by metaxylem
Only one Vascular stand is developed
Eg – Selaginella sp
Here unlike cent reach many vascular bundles are developed
Eg – Ophioglossum sp.

Question 6.
Differentiate between Trichoblast and Trichomes
Answer:

Trichoblast Trichomes
The root epidermis is made up of single layer of parenchyma, with big and small cells – The root hair are the extension of small cells known as trichoblast. The epidermal layers of stems and leaves have unicellular or multicellular appendages that originate from the epidermal cells, known as trichomes, can be branched or unbranched, glandular or non glandular, helpful m dispersal of fruits & seeds. They are also protective infunction.

Question 7.
Differentiate between Exarch and Endarch condition.
Answer:

Exarch

Endarch

Protoxylem lies towards the periphery and metaxylem towards the centre is called Exarch condition.
Eg. – Root Anatomy
Protoxylem lies towards the centre and metaxylem, towards the periphery is known as Endarch condition.
Eg. Stem Anatomy

Question 8.
Explain briefly Branchysciereids or Stone cells.
Answer:
Isodiametric sclereids, with hard cell wall. It is found in bark, pith cortex, hard endosperm and fleshy portion of some fruits. eg: Pulp of Pyrus.

Question 9.
What is Protoxylent lacuna?
Answer:

  • In Monoeoi stem, Xylem vessels occur in the form of letter ‘ Y’. The upper two arms of has two metaxylem vessels and at the base on or two protoxylem vessels occur.
  • At maturity, the lowes, basal protoxylem disintegrates and form a cavity known as Protoxylem lacuna.

Question 10.
Distinguish between Eustele and Atactostele
Answer:

Eustele

Atactostele

Vascular bundles are arranged in the form of a ring around the pith is known as Eustele
Eg. Dicot Stem (Sun flower)
Vascular bundles are simply scattered in the ground tissue. This condition is known as Atactostele
Eg. Monocot Stem (Maize)

Question 11.
What are bast fibres?
Answer:
These fibres are present in the phloem. Natural Bast fibres are strong and cellulosic. Fibres obtaining from the phloem or outer bark of jute, kenaf, flax and hemp plants. The so-called pericyclic fibres are actually phloem fibres.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 12.
What is the significance of Quiescent centre?
Answer:

  • The apparently inactive centre in the root anatomy, located between root cap and differentiating cells of the root.
  • It is the site of hormone synthesis and also the ultimate source of all meristematic cells of the meristem.

Question 13.
Differentiate between Meristematic Tissue and Permanent tissue.
Answer:

Meristematic tissue

Permanent tissue

Cells divide repeatedly Donot divide but develop from meristematic tissue.
Cells are undifferentiated  Cells are differentiated
Produce other tissues Perform specific functions.

Question 14.
Differentiate between xylary fibres and Extra xylary fibres (Phloem fibres)
Answer:

Xylary fibres

Bast fibres

Associated with sec xylem tissue Present in phloem
Derived from the vascular cambium Derived from phloem or outer bark
Many types
Eg. Teak
Eg. Jute, Kenaf, Flax & hemp plant fibres

Question 15.
Explain bulliform cells in grasses.
Answer:
Some cells of the upper epidermis (eg: Grasses) are larger and thin-walled. They are called bulliform cells or motor cells. These cells are helpful for the rolling and unrolling of the leaf according to the weather change.

Question 16.
What is meant by Sunken Stomata?
Answer:
In some Xerophytic plants (eg: Cycas, Nerium), stomata are sunken beneath the abaxial leaf surface within stomatal crypts. The sunken stomata reduce water loss by transpiration.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 17.
Distinguish, Protoxylem and Metaxylem from Protophloem and Metaphloem
Answer:

Proto & Metaxylem

Proto & Metaphloem

From the primary Xylem derived from procambium, the first formed elements are known as protoxylem and the later formed are known as metaxylem. From the primary phloem derived from procambium, the first formed elements are known as proto phloem are known as meta phloem.

Question 18.
Distinguish the Bundle sheath of stem and leaf
Answer:

Bundle sheath of stem

Bundle sheath of leaf

1. Bundle sheath is the surrounding tissue of the vascular bundle 1. The sheath surrounding the dicot leaf and monocot leaf is known as bundle sheath
2. In monocot stem it is sclerenchymatous 2. It is parenchymatous both in Dicot and Monocot leaf
3. It is protective in function. 3.It is also known as border parenchyma, protective in function.

Question 19.
Distinguish Guard Cells and Subsidiary Cells
Answer:

Guard Cells

Subsidiary Cells

1. The two kidney-shaped cells in dicot leat and the two dumbbell-shaped cells in monocot leaf, which flank the stoma are called Guard Cells 1. These are specialised epidermal cells, distinct from other cells of the epidermis
2. Chloroplasts are present in the cells 2. Chloroplasts are absent in the cells
3.Help in opening and closing of stoma 3.She subsidiary ceils assist guard cells in the opening and closing of stoma

Question 20.
Differential between Radial and Collateral Vascular bundle.
Answer:

Radial

Collateral

1. Here, the xylem and phloem are arranged at different radius, (i.e) alternating with one another.
Eg. Root Anatomy
1. this condition, the phloem and xylem lie in the same radius, one below another.
2. Here phloem is above and xylem lies below, this condition is known as conjoint, collateral Eg. Stem Anatomy

Question 21.
Describe briefly radial types of vascular Bundles.
Answer:
Xylem and phloem are present on different radii alternating with each other. The bundles are separated by parenchymatous tissue. (Monocot and Dicot roots).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 22.
What are Halophiles?
Answer:

  • Plants adapted to grow in salty environmental conditions are known as Halophytes
  • The secretion of ions by the salt glands, present in the leaves is the best mechanism to regulate the salt content of plant shoots.
  • Eg. Mangrove Plants-Avicennia

Question 23.
Write down the function of Sclerenchyma.
Answer:

  • Main function is to provide mechanical strength.
  • Grittiness in the pulp of fruits like Guava, the presence of Pear, Pyrus etc is due to the presence of Sclerenchyma tissue.
  • Provide rough and stiffness to seed coats nuts etc.
  • Give various types of commercially useful fibres. Eg. Jute, hemp, cotton.

Question 24.
What are the special aspects of the trichomes on the leaves of insectivorous plants?
Answer:
The trichomes on the leaves of the insectivorous plants secrete mucopolysaccharides that help to trap bisects in the insectivorous plants living in marshy plants.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 25.
Define, hydathode?
Answer:
A hydathode is a type of epidermal pore, commonly found in higher plants. Structurally, hydathodes are modified stomata, usually located at leaf tips or margins, especially at the teeth. Hydathodes occur in the leaves of submerged aquatic plants such as ranunculus fluitans as well as in many herbaceous land plants.

Question 26.
Notes on multilayered epidermis multiseriate epidermis.
Answer:

  • In some leaves the upper and lower epidermis remain multilayered.
  • The outer most layer has cuticle.
  • In Nerium these multilayers and the culicle help to reduce the rate of transpiration.
  • In Ficus the upper epidermal layer contain cystoliths made up of calcium carbonate crystals.
  • These are plants that grow in dry climatic conditions and these are the Anatomical adaptations seen in xerophytic plants.

Question 27.
Notes on Medulla or Pith.
Answer:

  • In the Dicot stem, Dicot root and Monocot root the central part is made up of ground tissue known as pith.
  • Usually, starch, fatty substances, tannin, phenol, calcium oxalate crystals are stored in the pith.
  • Function: storage

Question 28.
State Tunica corpus theory.
Answer:

  • The theory was proposed by A. Schmidt (1924)
  • There are two zones of tissues are found in apical meristem.
  • Tunica-It is the peripheral zone of shoot apex that forms epidermis.
  • Corpus – It is the inner zone of shoot apex that forms cortex and stele of the shoot.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 29.
State Koroperkappe theory.
Answer:

  • The Korper Kappe theory was proposed by schuepp.
  • This theory is equivalent to Tunica corpus theory of shoot apex.
  • The two divisions are distinguished by the type of T division.
  • Korper is characterised by inverted T divisions
  • Kappe is characterised by straight T divisions.

Question 30.
Name the 4 types of xylary fibres.
Answer:

  • Xylary fibres are associated with the secondary xylem tissue.
  • These fibres are derived from the vascular cambium.

There are 4 types of xylary fibres.

  • Libriform fibres – Long, narrow fibres with simple pits and lignified secondary walls
  • Fibre tracheids – Shorter with moderate thickening pits-simple or bordered
  • Septate fibres – Fibres have thin septa separating the lumen in to distinct chambers. Eg. Teak.
  • Gelatinous fibres – Fibres with less lignin and more cellulose in the cell wall.

Question 31.
Distinguish single perforation plate from multiple perforation plate.
Answer:
Xylem vessels are perforated at the end walls.
If the entire cell wall is dissolved – and, give rise one pore then it is known as single perforation plate. Eg. Mangifera.
If the perforation plate has many pores it is called Multiple perforation plate. Eg. Liriodendron.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 32.
State Apical cell theory.
Answer:

  • Proposed by Nagel
  • Single apical cell-composes the Root meristem
  • The apical initial is tetrahedral in shape and produces the root cap from one side.
  • The remaining 3 sides produces epidermis cortex and vascular tissue.
  • Fg. Vascular cryptogams.

IX. Identify the diagram & Label the parts.

Question 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 19
Answer:
The given diagram is shoot apical meristem
A – Apical cell
B – Leaf Primordium

Question 2.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 20
Answer :
Brachysciereid
A – Lumen Cell B – Thick cell wall

Question 3.
Name the tissue found ¡n these fruits Name the fruits a, b, c
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 21
Answer :
Sclerenchyma is the tissue found in these fruits
A – Pear fruit
B – Strawberry
C – Guava

Question 4.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 22
Answer :
Asteroscie Reid
A – Thick cell wall
B – Lumen

X. 3 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Give an account of Prosenchyma and Chiorenchyma
Answer:
These are the two types of Parenchyma tissue
Prosenchyma:
Here the parenchyma cells become elongated, pointed and slightly thick-walled it provide mechanical support
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 23
Chiorenchyma:
Parenchyma cells with chiorephyll is known as chiorenchyma.
Eg. Mesophyll of leaves. it can be divided in Palisade tissue and spongy tissue in dicot leaf.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 24

Question 2.
Distinguish libre and sclereids?
Answer:

Fibre

Sclereids

1. Long Cells Short Cells
2. Narrow, Elongated pointed ends Usually short and broad
3. Occurs in bundles Occurs individually or in small groups
4. Commonly unbranched Maybe branched
5. Derived directly from meristematic tissue Develops from secondary sclerosis parenchyma cells

Question 3.
What is meant by the quiescent centre concept?
Answer:
Quiescent centre concept was proposed by Clowes (1961) to explain root apical meristem activity. This centre is located between the root cap and differentiating cells of the roots. The apparently inactive region of cells in root promeristem is called quiescent centre. It is the site of hormone synthesis and also the ultimate source of all meristematic cells of the meristem.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 4.
Difference Between Meristernatic Tissue and Permanent Tissue.
Answer:

Meristematic tissue

Permanent tissue

1. Cells divide repeatedly 1. Do not divide
2. Cells are undifferentiated 2. Cells are fully differentiated
3. Cells are small and Isodiametric 3. Ceils are variable in shape and size
4. Intercellular spaces are absent 4. Intercellular spaces are present
5. Vacuoles are absent 5. Vacuoles are present
6.Cell walls are thin 6.Cell walls are may be thick or thin
7. Inorganic inclusions are absent 7. Inorganic inclusions are present

Question 5.
Draw and label three types of collenchyma
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 25

Question 6.
Differentiate between Dicot leaf and Monocot leaf.
Answer:

Dicot Leaf

Monocot Leaf

1. Dorsiventral leaf 1. Isobilateral leaf
2. The mesophyll is differentiated into palisade and spongy parenchyma 2. Palisade parenchyma is present on both sides of the leaf and spongy parenchyma lies in the centre
3. Eg. Sunflower 3. Eg. Grass

Question 7.
Define tracheids & Draw the different types of cell wall thickening seen in tracheids & vessels
Answer:
Tracheids are dead, lignified and elongated cells with tapering ends. Its lumen is broader than that of fibres. In cross section, the tracheids are polygonal.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 26

Question 8.
Draw the structure of stomata & label the parts.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 27

Question 9.
Give a brief answer on subsidiary cells in plant leaves.
Answer:
Stomata are minute pores surrounded by two guard cells. The stomata occur mainly in the epidermis of leaves. In some plants addition to guard cells, specialised epidermal cells are present which are distinct from other epidermal cells. They are called Subsidiary cells. Based on the number and arrangement of subsidiary cells around the guard cells, the various types of stomata are recognized, The guard cells and subsidiary cells help in the opening and closing of stomata during gaseous exchange and transpiration.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 10.
Distinguish between Bulliform or motor cells, and silica cells
Answer:

Bulliform or motor cells

Silica cells

1. Some cells of upper epidermis in Grasses are larger and thin-walled, are known as bulliform or motor cells 1. Some of the epidermal cells of grass are filled with silica. They are called silica cells.
2. These cells are helpful for the rolling and unrolling of the leaf- according to the weather change in order to check transpiration 2. They provide mechanical stability and protection to the tissues

Question 11.
Explain the piliferous layer as epiblema.
Answer:
The outermost layer of the root is known as piliferous layer. It consists of single row of thin-walled parenchymatous cells without any intercellular space. Epidermal pores and cuticle are absent in the piliferous layer. Root hairs that are found in the piliferous layer are always unicellular. They absorb waer and mineral salt from the soil. Root hairs are generally short-lived. The main function of piliferous layer is protection of the inner tissues.

Question 12.
Differentiate between sieve tubes and vessels
Answer:

Sieve tube

Vessels

1. It is a component of phloem 1. It is a component of xylem
2. It is a syncyte (i.e) cell which is formed by fusion of cells is called syncyte 2. It is also a syncyte
3. Nucleus is absent but contain a lining layer of cytoplasm so known as living syncyte 3. Nucleus is absent but contain a lining layer of cytoplasm so known as living syncyte

Question 13.
Differentiate between Amphicribral (Halocentric) and Amphivasal (Leptocentric) vascular bundle.
Answer:
The above two come under concentric type of vascular bundle. Here xylem and phloem are present in concentric circles one around the other, in some stems.

Amphicribral – (Halocentric)
Here xylem lies in the centre and phloem surrounding it.
Eg. Ferns – (Polypodium) dicots – aquatic Amphivasal – (Leptocentric)
Here phloem lies in the centre and xylem surrounding it.
Eg. Dragon plant – Dracena & Yucca
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 28

Question 14.
Bring out the different between vascular bundles of Dicot and Monocot roots.
Answer:

Dicot roots

Monocot root

1. Vascular tissue Usually limited number of xylem and phloem strips Usually more number of xylem and phloem strips.
2. Conjunctive tissue Parenchymatous; Its cells are differentiated into vascular cambium Mostly sclerenchymatous but sometimes parenchymatous. It is never differentiated in to vascular cambium
3. Cambium It appears as a secondary meristem at the time of secondary growth It is altogether absent
4. Xylem Usually tetrarch Usually poly arch

Question 15.
What is meant by kranz Anatomy? What is its importance.
Answer:

  • In C4 plants like maize, the tissue outside the vein, (vascular bundle), the bundle sheath is with large chloro- plasts where as its spongy tissue have few if any chloroplast.
  • This anatomical uniqueness is known as Kranz anatomy. The border parenchyma has chloro plasts with out grana.
    This kranz sheath help in efficient CO2, fixation in C4 plants than C3 plants.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 16.
Explain the nature of phloem in dicot stem.
Answer:
Primary phloem lies towards the periphery. It consists of protpphloem and metaphloem. Phloem consists of sieve tubes, companion cells and phloem parenchyma. Phloem fibres are absent in primary phloem. Phloem conduct organic foods material from the leaves to other parts of the plant body.

XI. 5 Marks Questions

Question 1.
A section enlarged – T.S. of Dicot leaf (Helianthus)
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 29

Question 2.
Explain in detail about the vascular bundles of monocot stem.
Answer:
1. Vascular bundles: Vascular bundles are scattered (atactostele) in the parenchyma ground tissue. Each vascular bundle is surrounded by a sheath of sclerenchymatous fibres called bundle sheath. The vascular bundles are conjoint, collateral, endarch and closed. Vascular bundles are numerous, small and closely arranged in the peripheral portion. Towards the centre, the bundles are comparatively large in size and loosely arranged. Vascular bundles are skull or oval-shaped.

2. Phloem: The phloem in the monocot stem consists of sieve tubes and companion cells. Phloem parenchyma and phloem fibres are absent. It can be distinguished into an outer crushed protophloem and an inner metaphloem.

3. Xylem: Xylem vessels are arranged in the form of ‘Y’ the two metaxylem vessels at the base. In a mature bundle, the lowest protowylem disintegrates and forms a cavity known as protoxylem lacuna.

Question 3.
Korper Kappe theory:
Answer:

  • Schuepp (1917)- proposed it
  • According to it, Root system has 2 zones – Korper and Kappe
  • Korper – zone forms body and Kappe forms the cap
  • This theory is comparable to Tunica – corpus theory of shoot apex.

Question 4.
Compare and contrast simple and complex tissues by tabulation.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 30
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 31

Question 5.
Draw the different types of phloem elements and add a note on sieve tubes.
Answer:

  • Sieve tubes are long tubes formed by a series of cells known as sieve tube elements.
  • Arranged one above another to form vertical sieve tube.
  • No. of pores occur on end walls – known as sieve plate.
  • Sieve plates may be simple or compound.
  • Sieve elements show nacreous thickening on their lateral walls.
  • Mature sieve tube, nucleus is absent, only lining layer of cyto plasm, a special phloem protein (slimy body) is seen in it.
  • Mature sieve tubes pores blocked by a substance known as callose (callose plug) sieve tube function as food conducting tissue Angiosperm.
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 32

Question 6.
Differentiate between collateral and Bicollateral vascular bundles.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 33

Question 7.
Tabulate the Anatomical differences between root and stem
Answer:

Characters

Root

Stem

1. Epidermis Absence of Cuticle and epidermal pores. Presence of cuticle and epidermal pores.
Presence of unicellular root hairs. Presence of unicellular and multicellular trichomes.
2. Outer cortical cells Chlorenchyma absent Chlorenchyma present
3. Endodermis Well defined ill-defined or absent
4. Vascular bundles Radial arrangement Conjoint arrangement
5. Xylem Exarch Endarch

Question 8.
Explain the various types of vascular bundles in a tabulation form.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 34

Question 9.
Tabulate the types and characteristics of tissue systems.
Answer:

 Types/characters

Epidermal tissue system Ground or fundamental tissue system

Vascular or conduction tissue system

1.Formation Forms the outermost covering protoderm Forms the ground meristem Forms the procambial bundles
 

2. Components

epidermal cells, stomata and epidemic outgrowth Simple permanent tissues – Parenchyma and Collenchyma Xylem and Phloem
3.Functions Protection of plant body; absorption of water in roots; gas exchange for photosynthesis and respiration; transpiration in shoots Gives mechanical
support to the organs;
prepares and stores food
in leaf and stem
Conducts is water and food: gives mechanical strength

 

Question 10.
Tabulate the Anatomical differences between stem and monocot stem
Answer:

Characters

Dicot stem

Monocot stem

1. Hypodermis Collenchymatous Sclerenchymatous
2. Ground tissue Differentiated into cortex, endodermis, and peri cycle and pith Not differentiated but it is a continuous mass of parenchyma
3. Starch sheath Present Absent
4. Medullary rays Present Absent
5. Vascular bundles a. Collateral and open
b. Arranged in a ring
c. Secondary growth occurs
a. Collateral and closed
b. Scattered in ground tissue
c. Secondary growth usually does not occur

Question 11.
Explain the internal structure of Dicot root.
Answer:
The transverse section shows the following structure.
Piliferous layer or Epiblemma or Rhizodermis;

  • Single-layer of parenchyma cells compactly arranged with out inter cellular space, devoid of circle and stomata (epidermal pores)
  • Single called root hairs arise from the small cell known as trichoblast

Function: Protection & absorption
Cortex:

  • Made of loosely arranged parenchyma cells with intercellular spaces.
  • Starch grains are stored in, them leucoplasts occur in the cells.

Endodermis:

  • Inner most layer of cortex – made up of single layer of barrel-shaped parenchyma cells.
  • The radial and inner tangential walls have suberin and lignin thickening known as Casparian thickening.
  • The cells opposite to protoxylem do not have Casparian thickening, known as Passage cells, which allow water to pass through but not the cells with Casparian thickening.

Stele:
All the tissue present inside endodermis comprise the stele, include pericycle & vascular bundle,
a) Pericycle:
Outer most layer of stele Single layer of parenchyma. The lateral roots originate from pericycle, so known to have endogenous origin.

Vascular bundle:
Made up of xylem and phloem.
Radial arrangement: In dicot root xylem and phloem are in different radii known as radial arrangement.

Exarch condition:
The protoxylem is pointing towards the periphery.

Tetrarch:
There are four protoxylem points, present this condition is known as tetrarch. Conjunctive tissue: The parenchyma tissue that separates xylem and phloem are known tissue.

Metaxylem – Vessels: are generally polygonal in cross-section.
Pith or Medulla: absent.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 35

Question 12.
Explain the structure of the vascular bundle of Maize stem.
Answer:

  • Vascular bundles are skull-shaped, numerous, bigger bundles towards the centre and numerous small bundles arranged in the periphery.
  • Vascular bundles are scattered in the parenchymatous ground tissue. This condition is known as Atactostele.
  • V – Bs Conjoint Collateral, Closed and Endarch in nature
  • Pith or Medulla is absent.
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 36

Question 13.
Describe the Anatomy of Dicot stem.
Answer:
Epidermis:
A single layer of compactly arranged rectangular parenchymatous cells, with out intercellular space. Cuticle: on the outer walls check transpiration
Stomata: may be present here and their Chloroplasts: usually absent Multicellular hairs: occur in large numbers Function: Protective Cortex:

Lies below epidermis has 3 zones

1. Hypodermis:
Epidemial hay Made upof few layers of colknchyma cells liv- Cuticleing with thickenings at the successive tangential Epidenms avers giving mechanical inheiweeit

2. Chloresrchma:
A few layers below hypodermis with resin ducts in between

3. Parenchyma:
3rd zone, store food material.

Lndodermis or Starch Sheath:
inner most layer of cortex. barrel-shaped cells compactly managed without intercellular spaces.
Since starch grains are abundant in it. It is also a Medullary ray known as starch sheath, homologous to endodermis of root.

Stete: fonn a central ring inner to endodermis made up of Pericycle, VascuLar bundle & Pith.

Perlccle: A few layer of sclerenchyma outside the phloem, known as Hundk cap or Hard bast and also parenchynia cells between them constitute pericycic.

Vascular bundles:
Muscular bundles wedge-shaped arranged the form of a ring – (Eustelic)
Vascular bridle is made upon xylem. Phloem and cambium.
V – B is Conjoint, Collateral. Open and Endarch

Phloem: lies towards periphery.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 37

Function : Conduction of organic food material

Cambium: brick-shaped thin-walled meristem responsible for secondary growth so. V – B is known as open V – B.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 38
Function: Conduction of water and mineraLs from root to other parts.
Pith (Medulla): Central pith is present. It is parenchymatous.
Medullar ray: Pith extends between V – Bs as primary medullary ray.
FunctIon : Storage.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Question 14.
Explain the internal structure of monocot leaf. Epidermis:
Answer:

  • A single layer of thin-walled cells with outer walls covered by thick cuticle.
  • Stomata occur on both epidermis – stomata surrounded by dumbbell-shaped guard cells.
  • Subsidiary cells: Surround guard cells.
  • Bulliform cells : Occur on upper epidermis help for the rolling and un rolling of the leaf according to the weather change.
  • Silica ceils: Some epidermal cells are filled with silica

Mesophyll:

  • Grass, being isobilateral, mesophyll is not differentiated into palisade and spongy tissue, but compactly arranged cells with limited intercellular space.

Vascular Bundles:

  • V.Bs differ in size – most of them are smaller, Large bundles occur at regular intervals
  • Above and below large bundles sclerenchymatous patches occur – provide mechanical support, they are
  • absent in small bundles.
  • Bundle sheath – Each V.B is surrounded by a parenchymatous bundle sheath, generally contain starch grains.
  • V.B has xylem upward and phloem towards the lower epidermis.
  • V.Bs are Conjoint Collateral and Closed.
  • In C4 grasses the bundle sheath cells are called Kranz sheath, involve in C4 cycle.
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 39

Question 15.
Draw the internal structure of Nerium leaf & Add a note on it’s special adaptive special features.
Answer:

  • Multiseriate upper and lower Epidermis.
  • Thick cuticle on the surface of upper epidermis
  • Mesophyll is distinguished in to upper palisade and lower spongy parenchyma.
  • Well developed vascular bundles with upper xylem and lower phloem (conjoint collateral closed V.B).
  • Sunken stomata on the lower epidermis with trichomes, to reduce the rate of transpiration.
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System 40

Question 16.
Difference between Stomata and Hydathodes.
Answer:

Stomata

Hydathodes

1. Occur in the epidermis of leaves, young stems Occur at the tip or margin of leaves that are grown in moist shady place.
2. Stomatal aperture is guarded by two guard cells The aperture of hydathodes are surrounded by a ring of cuticularized cells
3. The two guard cells are generally surrounded by subsidiary cell. Subsidiary cells are absent
4. Opening and closing of the stomatal aperture is regulated by guard cells. Hydathodes pores remain always open.
4. These are involved in transpiration and exchange of gases. These are involved in guttation

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 9 Tissue and Tissue System

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Pdf Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

11th Chemistry Guide Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Textual Questions:

I. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
For alkali metals, which one of the following trends is incorrect?
(a) Hydration energy: Li > Na > K> Rb
(b) Ionisationenergy: Li> Na> K> Rb
(c) Density: Li < Na < K < Rb
(d) Atomic size: Li < Na < K < Rb
Answer:
(c) Density: Li < Na < K < Rb

Question 2.
Which of the following statements is incorrect?
(a) Li+ has minimum degree of hydration among alkali metal cations
(b) The oxidation state of K in KO2 is +1
(c) Sodium is used to make Na / Pb alloy
(d) MgSO4 is readily soluble in water
Answer:
(a) Li+ has minimum degree of hydration among alkali metal cations

Question 3.
Which of the following compounds will not evolve H2 gas on reaction with alkali metals ?
(a) ethanoic acid
(b) ethanol
(c) phenol
(d) none of these
Answer:
(d) none of these

Question 4.
Which of the following has the highest tendency to give the reaction, M+(g) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals 1 M+(aq)
(a) Na
(b) Li
(c) Rb
(d) K
Answer:
(b) Li

Question 5.
sodium is stored in
(a) alcohol
(b) water
(c) kerosene
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) kerosene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 6.
RbO2 is
(a) superoxide and paramagnetic
(b) peroxide and diamagnetic
(c) superoxide and diamagnetic
(d) peroxide and paramagnetic
Answer:
(a) superoxide and paramagnetic

Question 7.
Find the wrong statement
(a) sodium metal is used in organic qualitative analysis
(b) sodium carbonate is soluble in water and it is used in inorganic qualitative analysis
(c) potassium carbonate can be prepared by solvay process
(d) potassium bicarbonate is acidic salt
Answer:
(c) potassium carbonate can be prepared by solvay process

Question 8.
Lithium shows diagonal relationship with
(a) sodium
(b) magnesium
(c) calcium
(d) aluminium
Answer:
(b) magnesium

Question 9.
Incase of alkali metal halides, the ionic character increases in the order
(a) MF < MCl < MBr < MI
(b) MI < MBr < MCl < MF
(c) MI < MBr < MF < MCl
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) MI < MBr < MCl < MF

Question 10.
In which process, fused sodium hydroxide is electrolysed for extraction of sodium?
(a) Castner’s process
(b) Cyanide process
(c) Down process
(d) All of these
Answer:
(a) Castner’s process

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 11.
The product obtained as a result of a reaction of nitrogen with CaC2 is
(a) Ca(CN)3
(b) CaN2
(c) Ca(CN)2
(d) Ca3N2
Answer:
(c) Ca(CN)2

Question 12.
Which of the following has highest hydration energy
(a) MgCl2
(b) CaCl2
(c) BaCl2
(d) SrCl2
Answer:
(a) MgCl2

Question 13.
Match the flame colours of the alkali and alkaline earth metal salts in the bunsen burner

(p) Sodium (1) Brick red
(q) Calcium (2) Yellow
(r) Barium (3) Violet
(s) Strontium (4) Apple green
(t) Cesium (5) Crimson red
(u) Potassium (6) Blue

(a) p – 2, q – 1, r – 4, s – 5, t – 6, u – 3
(b) p – 1, q – 2, r – 4, s – 5, t – 6, u – 3
(c) p – 4, q – 1, r – 2, s – 3, t – 5, u – 6
(d) p – 6, q – 5, r – 4, s – 3, t – 1, u – 2
Answer:
(a) p – 2, q – 1, r – 4, s – 5, t – 6, u – 3

Question 14.
Assertion:
Generally alkali and alkaline earth metals form superoxides
Reason:
There is a single bond between O and O in superoxides.
(a) both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion .
(b) both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion
(c) assertion is true but reason is false
(d) both assertion and reason are false
Answer:
(d) both assertion and reason are false

Question 15.
Assertion:
BeSO4 is soluble in water while BaSO4 is not
Reason:
Hydration energy decreases down the group from Be to Ba and lattice energy remains almost constant.
(a) both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion
(b) both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion
(c) assertion is true but reason is false
(d) both assertion and reason are false
Answer:
(a) both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 16.
Which is the correct sequence of solubility of carbonates of alkaline earth metals ?
(a) BaCO3 > SrCO3 > CaCO3 > MgCO3
(b) MgCO3 > CaCO3 > SrCO3 > BaCO3
(c) CaCO3 > BaCO3 > SrCO3 > MgCO3
(d) BaCO3 > CaCO3 > SrCO3 > MgCO3
Answer:
(b) MgCO3 > CaCO3 > SrCO3 > BaCO3

Question 17.
In context with beryllium, which one of the following statements is incorrect?
(a) It is rendered passive by nitric acid
(b) It forms Be2C
(c) Its salts are rarely hydrolyzed
(d) Its hydride is electron-deficient and polymeric
Answer:
(c) Its salts are rarely hydrolyzed

Question 18.
The suspension of slaked lime in water is known as
(a) lime water
(b) quick lime
(c) milk of lime
(d) aqueous solution of slaked lime
Answer:
(c) milk of lime

Question 19.
A colourless solid substance (A) on heating evolved CO2 and also gave a white residue, soluble in water. Residue also gave CO2 when treated with dilute HCl.
(a) Na2CO3
(b) NaHCO3
(c) CaCO3
(d) Ca(HCO3)2
Answer:
(b) NaHCO3

Question 20.
The compound (X) on heating gives a colourless gas and a residue that is dissolved in water to obtain (5). Excess of CO2 is bubbled through aqueous solution of B, C is formed. Solid (C) on heating gives back X. (B) is
(a) CaCO3
(b) Ca(OH)2
(c) Na2CO3
(d) NaHCO3
Answer:
(b) Ca(OH)2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 21.
Which of the following statement is false?
(a) Ca2+ ions are not important in maintaining the regular beating of the heart
(b) Mg2+ ions are important in the green parts of the plants
(c) Mg2+ ions form a complex with ATP
(d) Ca2+ ions are important in blood clotting
Answer:
(a) Ca2+ ions are not important in maintaining the regular beating of the heart

Question 22.
The name ‘Blue John’ is given to which of the following compounds?
(a) CaH2
(b) CaF2
(c) Ca3(PO4)2
(d) CaO
Answer:
(b) CaF2

Question 23.
Formula of Gypsum is
(a) CaSO4 .2H2O
(b) CaSO4 .\(\frac{1}{2}\)H2O
(c) 3CaSO4 .H2O
(d) 2CaSO4 .2H2O
Answer:
(a) CaSO4 .2H2O

Question 24.
When CaC2 is heated in atmospheric nitrogen in an electric furnace the compound formed is
(a) Ca(CN)2
(b) CaNCN
(c) CaC2N2
(d) CaNC2
Answer:
(b) CaNCN

Question 25.
Among the following the least thermally stable is
(a) K2CO3
(b) Na2CO3
(c) BaCO3
(d) Li2CO3
Answer:
(d) Li2CO3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

II. Write brief answer to the following questions:

Question 26.
Why sodium hydroxide is much more water-soluble than chloride?
Answer:
NaOH + H2O ⇌ Na+ + OH
1. This reaction is an exothermic reaction. Sodium hydroxide is a strong base, completely dissociated in an aqueous medium. The heat evolved increases the stability. This phenomenon is strong enough to prove that sodium hydroxide crystals are readily dissolved in water.

2. NaCl is geologically stable. If kept dry, it will remain a free-flowing solid for years. Water can dissolve NaCl because the Na+ ions are attracted by OH in water and Cl ions are attracted by H+ in water. The solubility of NaCl does not increase the temperature. Based on this, NaOH is much more soluble due to its exothermic nature than sodium chloride.

Question 27.
Explain what to mean by efflorescence.
Answer:

  1. Efflorescence is a process of losing water of hydration from hydrate.
  2. Sodium carbonate crystallises as decahydrate which is white in colour.
  3. Upon heating, it loses the water of crystallization to form a monohydrate.
  4. Monohydrate (Na2CO3.H2O) is formed as a result of efflorescence.
    Na2CO3 .10H2O → Na2CO3.H2O + 9H2O

Question 28.
Write the chemical equations for the reactions involved in the Solvay process of preparation of sodium carbonate.
Answer:
2NH3 + H2O + CO2 → (NH4)2CO3
(NH4)2CO3 + H2O + CO2 → 2NH4HCO3
2NH4HCO3 + NaCl → NH4Cl + NaHCO3
2NaHCO3 → Na2CO3 + CO2 + H2O

Question 29.
An alkali metal (x) forms a hydrated sulphate, X2SO4 .10H2O. Is the metal more likely to be sodium (or) potassium?
Answer:
X forms X2SO2. 10H2O. The metal is more likely to be sodium. So X is Na2SO4. 10H2O. It is otherwise called as Glauber’s salt.

Question 30.
Write a balanced chemical equation for each of the following chemical reactions.
(i) Lithium metal with nitrogen gas
(ii) heating solid sodium bicarbonate
(iii) Rubidum with oxgen gas
(iv) solid potassium hydroxide with CO2
(v) heating calcium carbonate
(vi) heating calcium with oxygen
Answer:
(i) 6Li(s) + N2(g) → 2Li3N(s)
(ii) 2NaHCO3(s) → Na2CO3(s) + CO2(g) + H2O(g)
(iii) Rb + O2 → RbO2
(iv) 2KOH + CO2 → K2CO3 + H2O
(v) CaCO3 → CaO + CO2
(vi) 2Ca + O2 → 2 CaO

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 31.
Discuss briefly the similarities between beryllium and aluminium.
Answer:
Diagonal relationship:
As observed in alkali metals, beryllium shows a diagonal relationship with aluminium. Similarities between beryllium and aluminium:

  1. Beryllium and aluminium have the same electronegativity values.
  2. Their changes per unit area are closed.
  3. BeCl2 and AlCl3 form a dimeric structure. Both are soluble in organic solvents and are strong Lewis acids.
  4. Be(OH)2 and Al(OH)3 dissolve in excess alkali to give beryllate ion [Be(OH)4]2- and aluminate ion [Al(OH)4], respectively.
  5. Be and Al ions have a strong tendency to form complexes, e.g. BeF42- and AlF63-
  6. Both Be(OFI)2 and Al(OH)3 are amphoteric in nature.
  7. Carbide of Be – beryllium carbide (Be2C) and Al – aluminum carbide (Al4C3) give methane on hydrolysis.
  8. Both beryllium and aluminium are rendered passive by nitric acid.

Question 32.
Give the systematic names for the following
(i) milk of magnesia
(ii) lye
(iii) lime
(iv) Caustic potash
(v) washing soda
(vi) soda ash
(vii) trona
Answer:
(i) Magnesium hydroxide
(ii) caustic soda(Sodium Hydroxide)
(iii) calcium oxide
(iv) Potassium Hydroxide
(v) sodium carbonate
(vi) sodium carbonate
(vii) Sodium Sesquicarbonate

Question 33.
Substantiate lithium fluoride has the lowest solubility among group one metal fluorides.
Answer:
Lithium fluoride has high lattice enthalpy due to the small size of Li+ and F . So, due to the high lattice enthalpy, LiF is less soluble in water.

Question 34.
Mention the uses of plaster of paris.
Answer:
The largest use of Plaster of Paris is in the building industry as well as plasters. It is used for immobilizing the affected part of organ where there is a bone fracture or sprain. It is also employed in dentistry, in ornamental work and for making casts of statues and busts.

Question 35.
Beryllium halides are Covalent whereas magnesium halides are ionic why?
Answer:
Beryllium ion (Be2+) is smaller in size and it is involved in equal sharing of electrons with halogens to form a covalent bond, whereas magnesium ion (Mg2+) is bigger and is involved in the transfer of electrons to form an ionic bond.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 36.
Alkaline earth metal (A), belongs to 3rd period reacts with oxygen and nitrogen to form compound (B) and (C) respectively. It undergoes a metal displacement reaction with AgNO3 solution to form a compound (D).
Answer:
Alkaline earth metal, 3rd → Magnesium(Mg) ……….(A)
2 Mg + O2 → 2MgO …………(B)
3 Mg + N2 → Mg3N2 ……….(C)
Mg + 2 AgNO3 → 2 Ag + Mg(NO3)2 ………….(D)
A – Magnesium
B – Magnesium oxide
C – Magnesium nitride
D – Magnesium nitrate

Question 37.
Write the balanced chemical equation for the following processes
(a) heating calcium in oxygen
(b) heating calcium carbonate
(c) evaporating a solution of calcium hydrogen carbonate
(d) heating calcium oxide with carbon
Answer:
(a) 2 Ca + O2 → 2CaO
(b) CaCO3 → CaO + CO2
(c) Ca(HCO3)2 → CO2 + H2O + CaCO3.
(d) CaO + 3 C → CaC2 + CO

Question 38.
Explain the important common features of Group 2 elements.
Answer:

  1. Group 2 elements except beryllium are commonly known as alkaline earth metals because their oxides and hydroxides are alkaline in nature and these metal oxides are found in the Earth’s crust.
  2.  Many alkaline earth metals are used in creating colours and used in fireworks.
  3. Their general electronic configuration is ns2.
  4. Atomic and ionic radii of alkaline earth metals are smaller than alkali metals, on moving down the group, the radii increases.
  5. These elements exhibit a +2 oxidation state in their compounds.
  6. Alkaline earth metals have higher ionization enthalpy values than alkali metals and they are less electropositive than alkali metals.
  7. Hydration enthalpies of alkaline earth metals decrease as we go down the group.
  8.  Electronegativity values of alkaline earth metals decrease down the group.
  9. Alkaline earth metal salts moistened with concentrated hydrochloric acid gave a characteristic coloured flame when heated on a platinum wire in a flame.

Question 39.
Discuss the similarities between beryllium and aluminium.
Answer:
Diagonal relationship:
As observed in alkali metals, beryllium shows a diagonal relationship with aluminium. Similarities between beryllium and aluminium:

  • Beryllium and aluminium have same electronegativity values.
  • Their changes per unit area are closed.
  • BeCl2 and AlCl3 form a dimeric structure. Both are soluble in organic solvents and are strong Lewis acids.
  • Be(OH)2 and Al(OH)3 dissolve in excess alkali to give beryllate ion [Be(OH)4]2- and aluminate ion [Al(OH)4], respectively.
  • Be and Al ions have strong tendency to form complexes, e.g. BeF42- and AlF63-
  • Both Be(OFI)2 and Al(OH)3 are amphoteric in nature.
  • Carbide of Be – beryllium carbide (Be2C) and Al – aluminium carbide (Al4C3) give methane on hydrolysis.
  • Both beryllium and aluminium are rendered passive by nitric acid.

Question 40.
Why alkaline earth metals are harder than alkali metals?
Answer:
The strength of metallic bond in alkaline earth metals is higher than the alkali metals due to the presence of 2 electrons in its outermost shell as compared to alkali metal which has only 1 electron in the valence shell. Therefore alkaline earth metals are harder than alkali metals.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 41.
How is plaster of paris prepared?
Answer:
It is a hemihydrate of calcium sulphate. It is obtained when gypsum,
CaSO4.2H2O is heated to 393 K.
2CaSO4.2H2O(s) → 2CaSO4.H2O + 3H2O
Above 393 K, no water of crystallisation is left and anhydrous calcium sulphate, CaSO4 is formed. This is known as ‘dead burnt plaster’.

Question 42.
Give the uses of gypsum.
Answer:

  • The Alabaster variety of gypsum was used by the sculptors.
  • Gypsum is used in making dry walls or plasterboards.
  • Gypsum is used in the production of Plaster of Paris, which is used as a sculpting material
  • Gypsum is used in making surgical and orthopedic casts.
  • It plays an important role in agriculture as a soil additive, conditioner and fertilizer
  • Gypsum is used in toothpaste, shampoo and hair products.
  • Calcium sulphate acts as a coagulator in making tofu.
  •  It is also used in baking as a dough conditioner.
  • Gypsum is a component of Portland cement, where it acts as a hardening retarder to control the speed at which concrete sets.
  • Gypsum is used to give colour to cosmetics and drugs.
  • Gypsum plays a very important role in winemaking.

Question 43.
Describe briefly the biological importance of Calcium and magnesium.
Answer:
Magnesium:

  1. A typical adult human body contains about 25 g of magnesium and 1200 g of calcium.
  2. Magnesium plays an important role in many biochemical reactions catalyzed by enzymes.
  3. It is the co-factor of all enzymes that utilize ATP in phosphate transfer and energy release.
  4. It also essential for DNA synthesis and is responsible for the stability and proper functioning of DNA.
  5. It is also used for balancing electrolytes in our body.
  6. Deficiency of magnesium results in convulsion and neuromuscular irritation.
  7. The main pigment that is responsible for photosynthesis, chlorophyll, contains magnesium which plays an important role in photosynthesis.

Calcium:

  1. Calcium is a major component of bones and teeth.
  2. It is also present in blood and its concentration is maintained by hormones (calcitonin and parathyroid hormone).
  3. The deficiency of calcium in the blood causes it to take a longer time to clot. It is also important for muscle contraction.

Question 44.
Which would you expect to have a higher melting point, magnesium oxide or magnesium fluoride? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

  • Magnesium oxide has very strong ionic bonds as compared to magnesium fluoride.
  • Mg2+ and O2- have charges of +2 and -2, respectively.
  • Oxygen ion is smaller than fluoride ion.
  • The smaller the ionic radii, the smaller the bond length in MgO and the bond is stronger than MgF2.
  • Due to more strong bond nature in MgO, it has a high melting point than MgF2.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

11th Chemistry Guide Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals Additional Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best Answer:

Question 1.
Which of the following is radioactive in group one elements?
(a) Lithium
(b) Caesium
(c) Rubidium
(d) Francium
Answer:
(d) Francium

Question 2.
Arrange the following in increasing order of hydration enthalpy.
(a) Rb+ > Li+ > Na+ > K+ > Cs+
(b) Cs+ > Rb+ > K+ > Na+ > Li+
(c) Li+ > Na+ > K+ > Rb+ > Cs+
(d) K+ > Na+ > Li+ > Rb+ > Cs+
Answer:
(c) Li+ > Na+ > K+ > Rb+ > Cs+

Question 3.
Among the following pairs. which occurs in large amounts in seawater?
(a) Li, Rb
(b) Cs, Fr
(c) Na, K
(d) Be, He
Answer:
(c) Na, K

Question 4.
1 mol of a substance (X) was treated with an excess of water, 2 mol of readily combustible gas were produced along with the solution which when reacted with CO2 gas produced white turbidity. The substance (X) could be
(a) Ca
(b) CaH2
(c) Ca(OH)2
(d) Ca(NO3)2
Answer:
(b) CaH2

Question 5.
Spodumene and lepidolite are the minerals of …………
(a) lithium
(b) sodium
(c) potassium
(d) rubidium
Answer:
(a) lithium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 6.
Na2O2 has a light yellow colour. This is due to
(a) presence of unpaired electron in the molecule
(b) presence of a trace of NaO2
(c) presence of KO2 ass an impurity
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) presence of a trace of NaO2

Question 7.
Rock salt is a major source of ………….
(a) lithium
(b) potassium
(c) francium
(d) sodium
Answer:
(d) sodium

Question 8.
When sodium reacts with excess of oxygen, oxidation number of oxygen changes from
(a) 0 to – 1
(b) 0 to 2
(c) – 1 to – 2
(d) +1 to -1
Answer:
(a) 0 to – 1

Question 9.
The general molecular formula of rock salt or table salt is ……….
(a) NaI
(b) NaCl
(c) KCI
(d) KBr
Answer:
(b) NaCl

Question 10.
The composition of common baking powder is
(a) starch, sodium bicarbonate, citric acid
(b) Sodium bicarbonate, tartaric acid
(c) starch, sodium bicarbonate, citric acid
(d) Starch, sodium bicarbonate, calcium hydrogen phosphate.
Answer:
(d) Starch, sodium bicarbonate, calcium hydrogen phosphate.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 11.
The second ionization enthalpy of alkali metals is
(a) zero
(b) low
(c) high
(d) very low
Answer:
(c) high

Question 12.
Which salt can be used to identify coloured cation
(a) borax
(b) microcosmic salt
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) both (a) and (b)

Question 13.
Which one of the following is the smallest atom?
(a) Francium
(b) Rubidium
(c) Lithium
(d) Sodium
Answer:
(c) Lithium

Question 14.
Which fumes in the air?
(a) BeCl2
(b) MgCl2
(c) CaCl2
(d) BaCl2
Answer:
(a) BeCl2

Question 15.
Consider the following statements.
(i) Alkali metals exhibit high chemical reactivity due to their low ionization energy.
(ii) Lithium is a very soft metal and even it can be cut with a knife.
(iii) Francium is a radioactive element in group 1 elements
Which of the above statements is/are not correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (ii) only
(c) (i) and (iii)
(d) (i), (ii) and (iii)
Answer:
(b) (ii) only

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 16.
Which causes nerve signals in animals?
(a) Electrical potential gradient due to transfer of K+ ions
(b) Electrical potential gradient due to transfer of Na+ ions in (Na+ – K+) pumps
(c) Electrical potential gradient set up due to transfer of Ca2+ ions
(d) No nerve signal exists in animals.
Answer:
(a) Electrical potential gradient due to transfer of K+ ions

Question 17.
Which one of the following gives red colour in flame test?
(a) Lithium
(b) Sodium
(c) Potassium
(d) Francium
Answer:
(a) Lithium

Question 18.
Which of the following reaction produces hydrogen?
(a) Mg + H2O
(b) H2S4O8 + H2O
(c) BaO2 + HCl
(d) Na2O2 + 2HCl
Answer:
(a) Mg + H2O

Question 19.
A major constituent of Portland cement (except lime) is
(a) Silica
(b) Alumina
(c) Iron oxide
(d) Magnesia
Answer:
(a) Silica

Question 20.
Which one of the following alkali metals is highly reactive with water?
(a) Li
(b) Cs
(c) Rb
(d) K
Answer:
(d) K

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 21.
The elements belong to group-1 are called as
(a) Alkali metals
(b) Alkaline earth metals
(c) halogens
(d) chalcogens
Answer:
(a) Alkali metals

Question 22.
Which of the following is insoluble in water?
(a) LiF
(b) NaCl
(c) KBr
(d) Li
Answer:
(d) Li

Question 23.
Match the correct pair Element:

(A) lithium (i) Sylvite
(B) Sodium (ii) Spodumene
(C) Potassium (iii) Rock Salt

(a) A – ii, B – iii, C – i
(b) A – i, B – ii, C – iii
(c) A – ii, B – i, C – iii
(d) A – i, B – iii, C – ii
Answer:
(a) A – ii, B – iii, C – i

Question 24.
Which is the function of the sodium-potassium pump?
(a) Maintenance of ion balance
(b) Used in nerve impulse conduction
(c) Transmitting nerve signals
(d) Regulates the blood level
Answer:
(c) Transmitting nerve signals

Question 25.
Lithium reacts directly with carbon to form
(a) Li2C2
(b) Li2C
(c) LiC2
(d) LiC
Answer:
(a) Li2C2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 26.
Lithium shows diagonal relationship with
(a) Beryllium
(b) Carbon
(c) Magnesium
(d) Calcium
Answer:
(c) Magnesium

Question 27.
Among the alkaline earth metals, which is radioactive in nature?
(a) Beryllium
(b) Calcium
(c) Radium
(d) Barium
Answer:
(c) Radium

Question 28.
Choose the correct pair:

(A) Pb(Me)4 (i) fertilizer
(B) KCl (ii) photoelectric cells
(C) Pb-Al alloy (iii) anti-knock additives
(D) Cs (iv) air craft parts

(a) A – iii, B – i, C – iv, D – ii
(b) A – ii, B – iii, C – iv, D – i
(c) A – iv, B – ii, C – iii, D – i
(d) A – ii, B – iv, C – i, D – iii
Answer:
(a) A – iii, B – i, C – iv, D – ii

Question 29.
Sodium reacts with acetylene to give
(a) Sodium ethoxide
(b) Sodium acetylide
(c) Sodium hydroxide
(d) Sodamide
Answer:
(b) Sodium acetylide

Question 30.
The eighth most abundant among the alkaline earth metals is ………….
(a) Cu
(b) Be
(c) Mg
(d) Ca
Answer:
(c) Mg

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 31.
Choose the correct statement/s is are correct about alkali metals.
1. The oxides and peroxides are colourless when pure but the superoxides are yellow or orange in colour.
2. The peroxides are diamagnetic while the superoxides are paramagnetic.
3. Sodium peroxide is widely used as an oxidizing agent.
4. The alkali metal hydroxides are weak bases.
(a) 1, 2 and 4
(b) 2, 3 and 4
(c) 1, 2 and 3
(d) 1, 3 and 4
Answer:
(c) 1, 2 and 3

Question 32.
The correct electronic configuration of alkaline earth metal is …………
(a) [noble gases] ns1
(b) [noble gases] ns2 np6
(c) [noble gases] ns2
(d) ns2 (n-1)d1-10
Answer:
(c) [noble gases] ns2

Question 33.
Alkali metals except ______ form solid bicarbom
(a) Sodium
(b) Potassium
(c) Cesium
(d) Lithium
Answer:
(d) Lithium

Question 34.
In fire works red colour flash is produced by ………….
(a) Ba
(b) Ra
(c) Sr
(d) Rb
Answer:
(c) Sr

Question 35.
The by-product formed in the Solvay process
(a) calcium chloride
(b) calcium hydroxide
(c) calcium carbonate
(d) ammonium chloride
Answer:
(a) calcium chloride

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 36.
Consider the following statements.
(i) Beryllium has small size and high polarizing power.
(ii) Beryllium does not have d-orbitais in its valence shell.
(iii) Beryllium has low electronegativity and very low ionization enthalpy as compared to other alkaline earth metals.
Which of the above statements is/are not correct?
(a) (i) only
(b) (ii) only
(c) (iii) only
(d) (i) and (ii)
Answer:
(c) (iii) only

Question 37.
_______ is used water treatment to convert the hard water to soft water.
(a) Sodium chloride
(b) Sodium bicarbonate
(c) Sodium hydroxide
(d) Sodium carbonate
Answer:
(d) Sodium carbonate

Question 38.
When beryllium carbide reacts with water, the product mainly formed is
(a) ethane
(b) methane
(c) acetylene
(d) ethene
Answer:
(b) methane

Question 39.
Choose the correct pair:

(A) Sodium chloride (i) Petroleum refining
(B) Sodium Carbonate (ii) domestic use
(C) Sodium bicarbonate (iii) laundering
(D) Sodium Hydroxide (iv) fire extinguisher

(a) A – ii, B – iv, C – iii, D – i
(b) A – ii, B – iii, C – iv, D – i
(c) A – iv, B – ii, C – i, D – iii
(d) A – iv, B – i, C – ii, D – iii
Answer:
(b) A – ii, B – iii, C – iv, D – i

Question 40.
Which metal is used as radiation windows for X-ray tubes?
(a) Magnesium
(b) Sodium
(c) Calcium
(d) Beryllium
Answer:
(d) Beryllium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 41.
______ pump play an important role in transmitting nerve signals.
(a) sodium-Magnesium
(b) sodium-potassium
(c) sodium-calcium
(d) sodium-lithium
Answer:
(b) sodium-potassium

Question 42.
Which one of the following is used as a desulphurizing agent for iron and steel?
(a) Cd
(b) Mg
(c) Zn
(d) Be
Answer:
(b) Mg

Question 43.
The fifth most abundant element in the earth’s crust is
(a) magnesium
(b) beryllium
(c) calcium
(d) strontium
Answer:
(c) calcium

Question 44.
Which can be used in controlling galvanic corrosion?
(a) Iron
(b) Magnesium
(c) Calcium
(d) Beryllium
Answer:
(c) Calcium

Question 45.
Which of the alkaline earth metal has the highest hydration enthalpy?
(a) Be
(b) Mg
(c) Ca
(d) Sr
Answer:
(a) Be

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 46.
The anomalous properties of beryllium is mainly due to its
1. small size
2. low electronegativity
3. high ionization energy
4. low polarizing power.
(a) 1,2, 3 and 4
(b) 2 and 4
(c) 1 and 3
(d) 1 and 3
Answer:
(d) 1 and 3

Question 47.
______ and ______ ions have strong tendency to form complexes.
(a) Be and Al
(b) Be and Mg
(c) Ca and Sr
(d) Be and B
Answer:
(a) Be and Al

Question 48.
______ is used as radiation windows for X-ray tubes.
(a) Mg
(b) Be
(c) Na
(d) Ca
Answer:
(b) Be

Question 49.
A compound of calcium used in makig surgical and orthopedic casts is
(a) Dolomite
(b) Gypsum
(c) Feldspar
(d) plaster of Paris
Answer:
(b) Gypsum

Question 50.
Which one of the following is covalent in character?
(a) BeCl2
(b) MgCl2
(c) CaCl2
(d) BaCl2
Answer:
(a) BeCl2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

II. Very short question and answers (2 Marks):

Question 1.
Why alkali metals and alkaline earth metals are called s-block elements?
Answer:
Alkali metals and alkaline earth metals (group 1 & 2) are those in which the last electron enters the outermost s-orbital. As the s-orbital can accommodate only two electrons, the two groups belong to the s-block elements.

Question 2.
What are alkali metals?
Answer:
Alkali metals consist of the elements: lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, cesium, and francium. They are all metals, generally soft and highly reactive. They form oxides and hydroxides and these compounds are basic in nature.

Question 3.
Write the mineral source of lithium, sodium, and potassium.
Answer:

Element Mineral source
1. Lithium Spodumene
2. Sodium Rock Salt
3. Pottasium Sylvite

Question 4.
Which is the radioactive element in group 1 element? What is its half-life period?
Answer:
Francium is a highly radioactive element in group. It has a half-life of only 21 minutes.

Question 5.
The second ionization enthalpies of alkali metals are very high. Give reason.
Answer:
The second ionisation enthalpies of alkali metals are very high. The removal of an electron from the alkali metals gives monovalent cations having stable electronic configurations similar to the noble gas. Therefore, it becomes very difficult to remove the second electron from the stable Configurations, already attained.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 6.
Alkali metals never found in a free state in nature. Why?
Answer:
The loosely held “s” electron in the outermost shell of these elements make them the most electropositive metals. They readily lose electrons to give monovalent M ions. Hence they are never found in a free state in nature.

Question 7.
What is the diagonal relationship?
Answer:
Similarity between the first member of group 1 (Li) and the diagonally placed second element of group 2 (Mg) is called diagonal relationship. It is due to similar size (rLi+ = 0.766 Å and Mg2+ = 0.12 Å) and comparable electronegativity values (Li = 1.0; Mg = 1.2).

Question 8.
LiClO4 is more soluble than NaClO4 Why?
Answer:
The small size of the Li+  ion means that it has a very high enthalpy of hydration and so lithium salts are much more soluble than the salts of other group I. E.g. LiClO4  is up to 12 times more soluble than NaClO4.

Question 9.
Lithium carbonate is considerably less stable and decomposes readily. Give reason.
Answer:
Li2CO3 is considerably less stable and decomposes readily.
Li2CO3 → Li2O + CO2
This is presumably due to the large size difference between Li+ and CO23- which makes the crystal lattice unstable.

Question 10.
Why alkali metals have high chemical reactivity? How does this change along with the group?
Answer:
Alkali metals exhibit high chemical reactivity because of their low ionization enthalpy and their larger size. The reactivity of alkali metals increases from Li to Cs. since the value of ionization energy decreases down the group (Li to Cs). All the alkali metals are highly reactive towards the more electronegative elements such as oxygen and halogens.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 11.
What is action of heating on sodium carbonate?
Answer:
Upon heating, it looses the water of crystallisation to form a monohydrate. Above 313 K, the monohydrate becomes completely anhydrous and changes to a white powder called soda ash.
Na2CO3 .10H2O → Na2CO3 .H2O + 9H2O
Na2CO3 .H2O → Na2CO3 + H2O

Question 12.
Explain the action of hydrogen with alkali metals.
Answer:
All alkali metals react with hydrogen at about 673K (lithium at 1073K) to form their hydrides, which are ionic in nature. Reactivity of alkali metals with hydrogen increases from Li to Cs.
2M + H2 → 2 M+H (where M = Li, Na, K, Rb and Cs)

Question 13.
Why are potassium and caesium, rather than lithium used in photoelectric cells?
Answer:
Potassium and Caesium have much lower ionization enthalpy than Lithium. As a result, these metals easily emit electrons on exposure to light. Due to this, K and Cs are used in photoelectric cells.

Question 14.
Explain the action of halogen with alkali metals.
Answer:
Alkali metals combine readily with halogens to form ionic halides M+X. Reactivity of alkali metals with halogen increases down the group because of a corresponding increase in electropositive character.
2M + X2 → 2M+X (M = Li, Na, K, Rb and Cs) (X F, Cl, Br and I)

Question 15.
The order ofionic mobility of the ions in aqueous solution is Cs+ > Rb+ > K+ > Na+. Account it.
Answer:
Smaller the size of cation, the higher will be the hydration and its effective size will increase and hence mobility in aqueous solution will decrease. Larger size ions have more ionic mobility due to less hydration. Thus the degree of hydration of M+ ions decreases from Li+ to Cs+.

Consequently the radii of the hydrated ion decrease from Li+ to Cs+. Hence, the ionic conductance of these hydrated ions increases from Li+ to Cs+.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 16.
What happens when potassium Is treated with water?
Answer:
Potassium reacts even more violently. The liberated hydrogen catches fire instantly and burns with a lilac coloured flame because of potassium.
2K + 2H2O → 2KOH + H2↑ + heat

Question 17.
Write notes on flame test for alkali metals.
Answer:
When the alkali metal salts moistened with concentrated hydrochloric acid are heated on a platinum wire in a flame, they show characteristic coloured flame.
Eg:- Lithium – Crimson red; Potassium – Lilac

Question 18.
Li2CO3 decomposes readily whereas other carbonates are not. Why?
Answer:
The carbonates (M2CO3) of alkali metals are remarkably more stable up to 1270 K above which they first melt and then decompose to form their oxides, whereas Li2CO3 is less stable and
Li2CO3 + ∆ → Li2O + CO2
This is due to the large size difference between Li and CO32- which makes the crystal lattice unstable.

Question 19.
Write the uses of sodium bicarbonate.
Answer:
The uses of sodium bicarbonate are

  • Primarily used as an ingredient in baking.
  • Sodium hydrogen carbonate is a mild antiseptic for skin infections.
  • It is also used in fire extinguishers.

Question 20.
Why group 2 elements are called alkaline earth metals?
Answer:
Group 2 elements except beryllium are known as alkaline earth metals. These are so-called because their oxides and hydroxides are alkaline in nature and these metal oxides are found in Earth’s crust.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 21.
Write notes on the physical state of alkaline earth metals.
Answer:
Beryllium is rare and radium is the rarest of all comprising only 10% of igneous rocks. Magnesium and calcium are very common in the earth’s crust, with calcium the fifth-most-abundant element, and magnesium the eighth. Magnesium and calcium are found in many rocks and minerals: magnesium in carnallite, magnesite, dolomite and calcium in chalk, limestone, gypsum.

Strontium is found in the minerals celestite and strontianite. Barium is slightly less common, much of it in the mineral barite. Radium, being a decay product of uranium, is found in all uranium-bearing ores.

Question 22.
Why beryllium has a distinctive character?
Answer:
The distinctive character of beryllium is mainly due to its small size, high electronegativity and high polarizing power when compared to other elements in the same block.

Question 23.
What are the uses of Strontium?
Answer:

  1. 90Sr is used in cancer therapy.
  2. 86Sr/ 86Sr ratios are commonly used in marine investigations as well as in teeth, tracking animal migrations or in criminal forensics.
  3. Dating of rocks.
  4. As a radioactive tracer in determining the source of ancient archaeological materials such as timbers and coins.

Question 24.
Write the uses of Barium.
Answer:

  1. Used in metallurgy, its compounds are used in pyrotechnics, petroleum mining and radiology.
  2. Deoxidiser in copper refining.
  3. Its alloys with nickel readily emit electrons hence used in electron tubes and in spark plug electrodes.
  4. As a scavenger to remove the last traces of oxygen and other gases in television and other electronic tabes,
  5. An isotope of barium 133Ba, used as a source in the calibration of gamma-ray detectors in nuclear chemistry.

Question 25.
How would you prepare beryllium hydride from beryllium chloride?
Answer:
Beryllium chloride is treated with LiALH4 to get beryllium hydride.
2BeCl2 + LiAlH4 → 2BeH2 + LiCl + AlCl2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 26.
Why does solubility of sulphates of alkaline earth metal decreases? Explain.
Answer:
The sulphates of the alkaline earth metals are all white solids and stable to heat. BeSO4, and MgSO4 are readily soluble in water; the solubility decreases from CaSO4 to BaSO4. The greater hydration enthalpies of Be2+ and Mg2+ ions overcome the lattice enthalpy factor and therefore their sulphates are soluble in water.

Question 27.
Which is the most abundant metal found in the human body? Explain how it works Inside the human body?
Answer:

  • Calcium is the most abundant metal found in the human body for e.g. in teeth and bones.
  • 2% of an adult weight is made up of calcium.
  • Calcium is present in teeth and bones in the form of calcium phosphate and calcium carbonate and these make bone and teeth hard.
  • Water in the human body as in the blood and inside cells, contain dissolved calcium ions.
  • The calcium ions are involved in muscle movement and sending electricity around the brain and along nerves.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

III. Short question and answers (3 Marks):

Question 1.
Write notes characteristic flame colouration of alkali metal salts.
Answer:
When the alkali metal salts moistened with concentrated hydrochloric acid are heated on a platinum wire in a flame, they show characteristic coloured flame as shown below.

Element Colour
Lithium Crimson red
Sodium Yellow
Potassium Lilac
Rubidium Reddish violet
Caesium Blue

The heat in the flame excites the valence electron to a higher energy level. When it drops back to its actual energy level, the excess energy is emitted as light, whose wavelength is in the visible region.

Question 2.
Explain the various periodic trends in the alkali metals down the group.
Answer:
in alkali metals, as we move down the group

  • reactivity increases
  • atomic radii increases
  • screening effect increases
  • tendency to form cation by losing outer electron increases
  • melting point and boiling point decreases

Question 3.
Write the properties of oxides and peroxides of alkali metals.
Answer:
The oxides and the peroxides are colourless when pure, but the superoxides are yellow or orange in colour. The peroxides are diamagnetic while the superoxides are paramagnetic. Sodium peroxide is widely used as an oxidising agent.

The hydroxides which are obtained by the reaction of the oxides with water are all white crystalline solids. The alkali metal hydroxides are strong bases. They dissolve in water with evolution of heat on account of intense hydration.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 4.
How alkali metals react with oxygen? Explain with the equation.
Answer:
1. All the alkali metals on exposure to air burn vigorously, forming oxides on the surface of the metals.
2. Lithium forms the only monoxide, sodium forms the monoxide and peroxide and the other elements form monoxide, peroxide, and superoxides.
4Li + O2 → 2Li2O (Lithium monoxide)
2 Na + O3 → Na2O2 (Sodium peroxide)
K + O3 → KO2 (Potassium superoxide)

Question 5.
Write the uses of sodium hydroxide.
Answer:

  1. Sodium hydroxide is used as a laboratory reagent
  2. It is also used in the purification of bauxite and petroleum refining
  3. It is used in the textile industries for mercerizing cotton fabrics.
  4. It is used in the manufacture of soap, paper, artificial silk, and a number of chemicals.

Question 6.
What are the mineral sources of alkali metals?
Answer:

Element Mineral source
Beryllium Beryl, Be3Al2Si6O18
Magnesium Camallite, KCl. MgCl2.6H2O Dolomite, MgCO3.CaCO3
Calcium Fluorapatite
Strontium Celestite, SrSO4
Barium Barytes, BaSO4

Question 7.
Explain how alkali metal oxide reacts with water?
Answer:
Alkali metal oxides M2O, M2O2, and MO2 are easily hydrolyzed by water to form the hydroxides
according to the following reactions:
M2O + H2O → 2M+ + 2OH
M2O, + 2H2O → 2M+ + 2OH + H2O2
2MO2 + 2H2O → 2M+ + 2OH H2O2 + O2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 8.
Write the uses of magnesium.
Answer:

  1. Removal of sulphur from iron and steel
  2. Refining of titanium in the ‘Kroll” process.
  3. Used as photoengrave plates in printing industry.
  4. Magnesium alloys are used in aeroplane and missile construction.
  5. Mg ribbon is used in synthesis of Grignard reagent in organic synthesis.
  6. It alloys with aluminium to improve its mechanical, fabrication and welding property.
  7. As a desiccant.
  8. As sacrificial anode in controlling galvanic corrosion.

Question 9.
Copper and chlorine compounds make blue firework Why?
Answer:

  • To produce colours, fireworks experts hum the metal and chlorine together in a vapour, where the two elements are gases instead of solid.
  • The burning excites the electron pushing them into a higher than normal energy level. As the electrons returns to their normal level, they release their extra energy as a colourful burst of light.
  • True blue fireworks arc the hardest to make since the compound copper chloride breaks down in a hot flame.

Question 10.
Give uses of magnesium.
Answer:

  1. Removal of sulphur from iron and steel
  2. Refining of titanium in the “Kroll” process.
  3. Used as photoengrave plates in printing industry.
  4. Magnesium alloys are used in aeroplane and missile construction.
  5. Mg ribbon is used in synthesis of Grignard reagent in organic synthesis.
  6. It alloys with aluminium to improve its mechanical, fabrication and welding property.
  7. As a desiccant.
  8. As sacrificial anode in controlling galvanic corrosion.

Question 11.
Give the structure of BeCl2 in the solid phase and Vapor phase.
Answer:
Beryllium chloride has a chain structure in the solid-state as shown below, (structure-a). In the vapour phase, BeCl2 tends to form a chloro-bridged dimer (structure-c) which dissociates into the linear monomer at high temperatures of the order of 1200 K. (structure-b).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

IV. Long Answer Questions(5 Marks):

Question 1.
Compare the properties of Lithium with other elements of the group.
Answer:
The distinctive behaviour of Li+ ion is due to its exceptionally small size, high polarising power, high hydration energy and non-availability of d-orbitals.

Lithium Other elements of the Group
Hard, high melting, and boiling point Soft, Lower melting and boiling point
Least reactive (For example it reacts with oxygen to form normal oxide, forms peroxides with great difficulty and its higher oxides are unstable) More reactive
Reacts with nitrogen to give Li3N No reaction
Reacts with bromine slowly React violently
Reacts directly with carbon to form ionic carbides. For example

2Li + 2C →  Li2C2

Do not react with carbon directly, but can react with carbon compounds.

Na + C2H2 → Na2C2

Compounds are sparingly soluble in water highly soluble in water.
Lithium nitrate decomposes to give an oxide decompose to give nitrites

Question 2.
Describe the biological importance of sodium and potassium.
Answer:
1. Monovalent sodium and potassium ions are found in large proportions in biological fluids.
2. These ions perform important biological functions such as maintenance of ion balance and nerve impulse conduction.
3. Sodium – Potassium play an important role in transmitting nerve signals.
4. Atypical 70 kg man has 90g of Na and 170 g of K.

5. Sodium ions are found on the outside of cells, being located in blood plasma and in the interstitial fluid which surrounds the cells. These ions participate in the transmission of nerve signals, in regulating the flow of water across cell membranes and in the transport of sugars and amino acids into cells.

6. Potassium ions are the most abundant cations within cell fluids, where they activate many enzymes, participate in the oxidation of glucose to produce ATP and with sodium, are responsible for the transmission of nerve signals.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 3.
Explain the reaction of alkali metals with (i) Oxygen (ii) hydrogen (iii) halogens.
Answer:
(i) Reaction with Oxygen:
All the alkali metals on exposure to air or oxygen bum vigorously, forming oxides on their surface. Lithium forms only monoxide, sodium forms the monoxide and peroxide and the other elements form monoxide, peroxide, and superoxides. These oxides are basic in nature.
4Li + O2 → 2Li2O (simple oxide)
2Na + O2 → Na2O2 (peroxide)
M + O2 → MO2
(M = K, Rb, Cs; MO2 – superoxide)

(ii) Reaction with hydrogen:
All alkali metals react with hydrogen at about 673 K (lithium at 1073 K) to form the corresponding ionic hydrides. Reactivity of alkali metals with hydrogen decreases from Li to Cs.
2M + H2 → 2M+H
(M = Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs)
The ionic character of the hydrides increases from Li to Cs and their stability decreases. The hydrides behave as strong reducing agents and their reducing nature increases down the group.

(iii) Reaction with halogen:
Alkali metals combine readily with halogens to form ionic halides MX. Reactivity of alkali metals with halogens increases down the group because of a corresponding decrease in ionization enthalpy.
2 M + X2 → 2 MX
(M = Li, Na,K, Rb, Cs) (X = F, Cl, Br, I)
All metal halides are ionic crystals. However, Lithium iodide shows covalent character, as it is the smallest cation that exerts high, polarising power on the iodide anion. Additionally, the iodide ion being the largest can be polarised to a greater extent by Li+ ion.

Question 4.
List out the uses of magnesium.
Answer:
Magnesium is used:

  • in the removal of sulphur from iron and steel.
  • in the refining of titanium in the “Kroll” process.
  • as photoengrave plates in the printing industry.
  • Magnesium alloys are used in airplane and missile construction.
  • Mg ribbon is used in synthesis of Grignard reagent in organic synthesis.
  • It alloys with aluminium to improve its mechanical, fabrication and welding property.
  • as a desiccant.
  • as sacrificial anode in controlling galvanic corrosion.
  • Magnesium is the co-factor of all enzymes that utilize ATP in phosphate transfer and energy release.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 5.
How is washing soda prepared? Discuss its properties.
Answer:
Sodium carbonate is one of the important inorganic compounds used in industries. It is prepared by Solvay process. In this process, ammonia is converted into ammonium carbonate which then converted to ammonium bicarbonate by passing excess carbon dioxide in a sodium chloride solution saturated with ammonia.

The ammonium bicarbonate thus formed reacts with the sodium chloride to give sodium bicarbonate and ammonium chloride. As sodium bicarbonate has poor solubility, it gets precipitated. The sodium bicarbonate is isolated and is heated to give sodium carbonate. The equations involved in this process are,
2NH3 + H2O + CO2 → (NH4)2 CO3
(NH4)2 CO3 + H2O + CO2 → 2NH4HCO3
2NH4HCO3 + NaCl → NH4Cl + NaHCO3
2NaHCO → Na2CO3 + CO2 + H2O

The ammonia used in this process can be recovered by treating the resultant ammonium chloride solution with calcium hydroxide. Calcium chloride is formed as a by-product.

Properties:
Sodium carbonate, commonly known as washing soda, crystallises as decahydrate which is white in colour. It is soluble in water and forms an alkaline solution. Upon heating, it looses the water of crystallisation to form monohydrate. Above 373 K, the monohydrate becomes completely anhydrous and changes to a white powder called soda ash.
Na2CO3 .10H2O → Na2CO3.H2O + 9H2O
Na2CO3.H2O → Na2CO3 + H2O

Question 6.
Compare the properties of Beryllium with other elements of the group.
Answer:

Beryllium Other elements of the family
1. Forms covalent compounds Form ionic compounds
2. High melting and boiling point Low melting and boiling point
3. Does not react with water even at elevated temperature React with water
4. Does not combine directly with hydrogen Combine directly with hydrogen
5. Does not combine directly with halogens. Halides are covalent Combine directly with halogens. Halides are electrovalent.
6. Hydroxide and oxides of beryllium are amphoteric in nature Basic in nature.
7. It is not readily attacked by acids because of the presence of an oxide film Readily attacked by acids
8. Beryllium carbide evolves methane with water. evolve acetylene with water.
9. Salts of Be are extensively hydrolyzed Hydrolyzed

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 7.
State as to why
(a) Alkali metals show only +1 oxidation state.
(b) Na and K impart colour to the flame but Mg does not.
(c) Lithium on being heated in air mainly forms the monoxide and not the peroxide.
(d) Li is the best reducing agent in aqueous solution.
Answer:
(a) Alkali metals have low ionization enthalpies. They have a strong tendency to lose 1 electron to form unipositive ions. Thus they show an oxidation state of+1 and are strongly electropositive.

(b) Valence electrons of alkali metals like Na and K easily absorb energy from the flame and are excited to higher energy levels. When these electrons return to the ground state, the energy is emitted in the form of light. Magnesium atom has small size so electrons are ’ strongly bound to the nucleus. Thus they need large amount of energy for excitation of electrons to higher energy levels, which is not possible in Bunsen flame.

(c) Due to the small size of Li+ it has a strong positive field, which attracts the negative charge so strongly that it does not permit the oxide ion (O2-) to combine with another oxygen atom to form peroxide ion.

(d) Among alkali metals, lithium has the most negative electrode potential (Ee = -3.04 V), so it is the strongest reducing agent in the aqueous solution.

Question 8.
Explain the properties and uses of Gypsum.
Answer:
Properties of Gypsum:

  1. Gypsum is a soft mineral, which is moderately soluble in water. The solubility of this mineral in water is affected by temperature. Unlike other salts, gypsum becomes less soluble in water as the temperature increases. This is known as retrograde solubility, which is a distinguishing characteristic of gypsum.
  2. Gypsum is usually white, colorless, or gray in color. But sometimes, it can also be found in the shades of pink, yellow, brown, and light green, mainly due to the presence of impurities.
  3. Gypsum crystals are sometimes found to occur in a form that resembles the petals of a flower. This type of formation is referred to as ‘desert rose’, as they mostly occur in arid areas or desert terrains.
  4. Gypsum is known to have low thermal conductivity, which is the reason why it is used in making drywalls or wallboards. Gypsum is also known as a natural insulator.
  5. Alabaster is a variety of gypsum, that is highly valued as an ornamental stone. It has been used by the sculptors for centuries. Alabaster is granular and opaque.
  6. Gypsum has hardness between 1.5 to 2 on Moh’s Hardness Scale. Its specific gravity is 2.3 to 2.4.

Uses of Gypsum:

  1. The alabaster variety of gypsum was used in ancient Egypt and Mesopotamia by the sculptors. The ancient Egyptians knew how to turn gypsum into plaster of Paris about 5,000 years ago. Today, gypsum has found a wide range of uses and applications in human society, some of which are enlisted below.
  2. Gypsum is used in making drywalls or plasterboards. Plasterboards are used as the finish for walls and ceilings, and for partitions.
  3. Another important use of gypsum is the production of plaster of Paris. Gypsum is heated to about 300 degrees Fahrenheit to produce plaster of Paris, which is also known as gypsum plaster. It is mainly used as a sculpting material.
  4. Gypsum is used in making surgical and orthopedic casts, such as surgical splints and casting moulds.
  5. Gypsum plays an important role in agriculture as a soil additive, conditioner, and fertilizer, It helps loosen up compact or clay soil and provides calcium and sulphur, which are essential for the healthy growth of a plant. It can also be used for removing sodium from soils having excess salinity.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 5 Alkali and Alkaline Earth Metals

Question 9.
Mention the biological importance of sodium and potassium.
Answer:

  1. Monovalent sodium and potassium ions are found in large proportions in biological fluids. These ions perform important biological functions such as maintenance of ion balance | and nerve impulse conduction.
  2. A typical 70 kg man contains about 90 g of sodium and 170 g of potassium compared with only 5 g of iron and 0.06 g of copper.
  3. Sodium ions are found primarily on the outside of cells, is located in blood plasma and in the interstitial fluid which surrounds the cells. These ions participate in the transmission of nerve signals, in regulating the flow of water across cell membranes, and in the transport of sugars and amino acids into cells.
  4. Sodium and potassium, although so similar chemically, differ quantitatively in their ability to penetrate cell membranes, in their transport mechanisms, and in their efficiency to activate enzymes.
  5. Thus, potassium ions are the most abundant cations within cell fluids, where they activate many enzymes, participate in the oxidation of glucose to produce ATP and, with sodium, are responsible for the transmission of nerve signals.
  6. Sodium-potassium pumps play an important role in transmitting nerve signals.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Pdf Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

11th Bio Botany Guide Cell The Unit of Life Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Choose The Right Answers:

Question 1.
The two subunits of ribosomes remain united at a critical level of
a) Magnesium
b) Calcium
c) Sodium
d) Ferrous
Answer:
a) Magnesium

Question 2.
Sequence of which of the following is used to know the phylogeny
a) mRNA
b) rRNA
c) tRNA
d) HnRNA
Answer:
d) HnRNA

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 3.
Many cells function properly and divide mitotically even they do not have
a) Plasma membrane
b) Cyto skeleton
c) Mitochondria
d) Plastids
Answer:
d) Plastids

Question 4.
Keeping in view the Fluid mosaic model for the structure of cell membrane which one of the following statements is correct with respect to the movement of lipids & Proteins from one lipid mono layer to the other
a) Neither lipid nor protein can flip flop
b) Both lipid and protein can flip flop
c) While lipid can rarely flip flop proteins cannot
d) While proteins can flip flop but lipids cannot ,
Answer:
c) While lipids can rarely flip-flop proteins cannot

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 5.
Match the columns and identify the correct option:
Answer:

Column I

Column II

a. Thylakoids Disc shaped sacs in Golgi apparatus
b. Cristae Condensed structure of DNA
c. Cistemae Flat membrane sacs in stroma
d. Chromatin In folding in Mitochondria

(a) (b) (c) (d)
(1) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i)
(2) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii)
(3) (iii) (iv) (j) (ii)
(4) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii)
Answer:
(3) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii)

Question 6.
Bring out the significance of Phase Contrast Microscope
Answer:
Phase-contrast microscope is used to observe living cells, tissues and the cells cultured invitro during mitosis.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 7.
State the Protoplasm theory
Answer:

  • Fischer in 1894 & Hardy ( 1899 ) Proposed the Colloidal theory of Protoplasm (the physical basis of life)
  • It is a colloidal system with water, many biological import things, glucose, fatty acids, amino acids minerals, vitamins hormones & enzymes are seen.
  • Homogenous -These solutes are soluble
  • Heterogenous – Solutes are not soluble – This Forms the basis for its colloidal nature.
  • Protoplasm occur in 2 states but interconvertibleSamacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 1

Question 8.
Distinguish between Prokaryotes & Eukaryotes.
Answer:

Prokaryotes

Eukaryotes

Size of cell 1-5 cm 10 -100 cm True Nucleus
Nuclear character Nucleoid or incipient nucleus only (No nuclear membrane or Nucleolus Nucleolus & Nuclear membrane present
DNA Usually Circular without histone protein Usually linear with histone proteins
RNA/ Protein synthesis Couples in Cytoplasm RNA Synthesis inside Nucleus / Protein synthesis in the cytoplasm)
Ribosomes 50 s +30 s (70s) 60s + 40s ( 80s)
Organelles Absent Numerous
Cell Movement Flagella Flagella & Celia
Organisation Usually unicellular Single, Colonial and multicellular
Cell division Binary Fission Mitosis & Meiosis
Example Bacteria & Archae Bacteria Fungi, Plants, and Animals

Question 9.
Difference between plant and animal cell:
Answer:

Plant Cell

Animal Cell

1.Usually they are large than animal cell  Usually smaller than plant cell
2. Cell wall present in addition to plasma membrane and consists of middle lamellae. Primary and secondary walls Cell wall absent
3. Plasmaodesmata present Plasmodesmata absent
4. Chloroplast present Chloroplast absent
5. Centrioles absent except motile cells of lower plants Vacuole small and temporary
6. Vacuole larger and pennanent Tonoplast absent
7. Tonoplast present around vacuole Centrioles present
8. Nucleus present along the periphery of the cell Nucleus at the centre of the cell
9. Lysosomes are rare Lysosomes present

Question 10.
Draw the ultrastructure of a plant cell:
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 2

Part-A

Choose The Right Answer:

Question 1.
Scientist who named the unicellular particles as ‘animalcules’ …………… .
(a) Aristotle
(b) Robert Brown
(c) Antonie von Leeuwenhoek
(d) Robert Hooke
Answer:
(c) Antonie van Leeuwenhoek

Question 2.
Compound microscope was invented by
a) Robert brown
b) Z. Sigmody
c) Z. Jansen
d) Zenike
Answer:
C) Z. Jansen

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 3.
Micrometry is a technique of measurement of
a) Microtomy
b) Nanoparticles
c) Microscopic Objects
d) Moving objects
Answer:
c) Microscopic Objects

Question 4.
Which of the following electron opaque chemical is used in Electron microscope?
(a) Strontium
(b) Deuterium
(c) Palladium
(d) Uranium
Answer:
(c) Palladium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 5.
Who first observed Protoplasm
a) Corti
b) Felix Dujardin
c) Hugo Van Mohl
d) O. Hertwig
Answer:
a) Corti

Question 6.
Dinoflagellates and Protozoa are kept under
a) MegaKaryotes
b) Prokaryotes
c) Eukaryotes
d) Mesokaryola
Answer:
d) Mesokaryota

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 7.
Which among the following is NOT an exception to cell theory?
(a) Viruses
(b) Viroids
(c) Prions
(d) Fungi
Answer:
(d) Fungi

Question 8.
Michondria was named by
a) A.kolliker
b) Altmann
c) Benda
d) Purkinje
Answer:
c) Benda

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 9.
When Thylakoids are stacked together like a pile of coins known as
a) Grana
b) Cistemae
c) Quantosomes
d) Polysomes
Answer:
a) Grana

Question 10.
Dense particulars or granules observed by George Palade is known as
a) Cirtemae
b) Lamella
c) Locules
d) Ribosomes
Answer:
d) Ribosomes

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 11.
Histone proteins are seen in the DNA of …………… .
(a) Pseudokaryotes
(b) Prokaryotes
(c) Mesokaryotes
(d) Eukaryotes
Answer:
(d) Eukaryotes

Question 12.
These are also known as Microbodies
a) Mitochondrial & Ribosomes
b) Ribosomes & Cistemao
c) Polysomes & Vacuoles
d) Peroxisomes & Glyoxysomes
Answer:
d) Peroxisomes & Glyoxysomes

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 13.
The organelle made up of nine triplet peripheral fibrils are known as
a) Microbodies
b) Tululin
c) Centrosome
d) Centroles
Answer:
d) Centroles

Question 14.
Fungal cell wall is made of …………… .
(a) Cutin
(b) Chitin
(c) Hemicellulose
(d) Pectin
Answer:
(b) Chitin

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 15.
‘Annule’ are circular structure seen around
a) Nuclear membrane
b) Nuclear Pore
c) Perinuclear Space
d) Annuli
Answer:
d) Annuli

Question 16.
The Chromosome that occur in the oocyte of Salamander and in Giant nucleus of Acetabularia is known as
a) Polytene Chromosome
b) Lamp brush chromosome
c) Mitochondrial chromosome
d) Chloroplast chromosome
Answer:
b) Lamp brush chromosome

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 17.
Ordinary microscope can be made into Dark Field Microscope (DFM) by means of a special component is called
a) Patch stop carrier
b) Secondary Magnification lens
c) Stage
d) Phase plate
Answer:
a) Patch stop Carrier

Question 18.
In-plant cells, golgi bodies are found as small vesicles called …………… .
(a) Polysomes
(b) Cytosomes
(c) Cytosol
(d) Dictyosomes
Answer:
(d) Dictyosomes

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 19.
Cisternae, tubule and Vesicles occur in which of the following:
a) Golgi apparatus
b) Lysosomes
c) Endoplasmic reticulum
d) Glyoxysomes
(i) a & b
(ii) b & c
(iii) c & d
(iv) a & c
Answer:
(iv) a & c

Question 20.
The Golgi apparatus in plant is known as
a) Dictyosomes
b) Glyoxysomes
c) Neo-particles
d) Microvesides
Answer:
a) Dictyosomes

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 21.
Which of the three, come under the system of the membrane in Eukaryotic cell
a) Mitochondria
b) Nuclear Membrane
c) Golgi apparatus
d) Endoplasmic reticulum
(i) a, b & c
(ii) b, c & d
(iii) a, c & d
(iv) a, b & d
Answer:
(ii) b, c & d

Question 22.
DNA of mitochondrion is …………… .
(a) Helical
(b) Dumbbell
(c) Circular
(d) Spiral
Answer:
(c) Circular

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 23.
Fluid droplets are engulfed by membrane, which form vesicles around them
a) Phagocytosis
b) Exocytosis
c) Endocytosis
d) Pinocytosis
Answer:
d) Pinocytosis

Question 24.
The 60 s large subunit of Eukaryotes contain
a) 23 s & 5 s – large subunit
b) 16 s r RNA in large subunit
c) 18 s r RNA in large subunit
d) 28 s, 5-8 sand 5 s in large subunit
Answer:
d) 28 s, 5-8 sand 5 s in large subunit

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 25.
Elaioplasts store …………….
(a) Starch
(b) Lipid
(c) Protein
(d) Chlorophyll
Answer:
(b) Lipid

II. State whether the following statement True or False with reference to the origin of Eukaryotes.

1. A Prokaryote grow in size and develop infoldings in its cell membrane to increase surface area to volume ratio
2. Aerobic protea bacterium enter eukaryote as prey or parasite and become an endosymbiont
3. Proteobacteria eventually assimilated and became mitochondria
4.  Some Prokaryotes go on to acquire additional Exo symbionts the cyanobacteria evolve to become chloroplasts.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 3
Answer:
b) True, True, True, False

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 2.
Find out the true and false statements from the following and on that basis And the correct answer.
(i) In Prokaryotes the flagellar rotation, only proton movements are involved & not ATP.
(ii) In Eukaryotes to shift the adjacent microtubules to bend cilia or flagella, dynein use energy from ATP
(iii) Bacterial flagella are made up of helical polymers of protein known as Tubulin
(iv) In Eukaryotes the flagella are made up of microtubules and proteins known as dynein and nexin.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 4
Answer:
b) True True False True

Question 3.
With reference to Eukaryotic flagellum Find out the true or false statements from the following and on that basis find the correct answer
(i) Flagellum is shorter than cilia as short as 200 µm
(ii) Flagella are microtubule projection of plasma membrane
(iii) Flagella composed of 8 pairs of microtubules with 2 pairs of microtubules in the center
(iv) Structure of Flagella has Axoneme made up of microtubules & protein tubules
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 5
Answer:
c) False True False True

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 4.
(i) Cytoplasm is the physical basis of life
(ii) Cytoplasm inheritance occurs only through the plasma genes
(iii) Cytoplasm serves as a molecular soup where all the cellular organelles are suspended and bound together by a lipid bilayer plasma membrane
(iv) Cytoplasm is a very bad conductor of electricity.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 6
Answer:
a) False True True False

Question 5.
Find out the true or false statements from the following and on that basis find the correct answer
(i) The contractibility of protoplasm is important for the absorption and removal of water, especially in stomatal operations
(ii) The viscosity of protoplasm is 2-20centipoises
(iii) The protoplasm is made of 10-20% of water
(iv) Brownian movement and Tyndall effect are colloidal properties, so not applicable to protoplasm
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 7
Answer:
d) True True False False

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

II. Choose The Wrong Match

Question 1.
(a) Cytoplith – Hypodermal leaf cells of ficus bengaliensis
(b) Raphides – Eichhomia leaves
(c) Sphaero raphides – Colocasia
(d) Silica – Oryza sativa
Answer:
d) Silica – Oryza sativa

Question 2.
Choose the wrong match with reference to mitochondria
(a) Protein – 73%
(b) Lipids – 25-30%
(c) DNA – 12%
(d) RNA – 5-7%
Answer:
c) DNA-12%

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 3.
(i) Centrosome give rise to spindle fibers in Animal cell
(ii) Golgibodies play important role in packaging and secretion
(iii) Endoplasmic reticulum-SER is involved in protein synthesis
(iv) Vacuoles facilitate the transport of ions and materials in plant cell
Answer:
(iii) Endoplasmic reticulum SER is involved in protein synthesis

Question 4.
(i) The magnification of SEM & its resolving power is – 200000 &5-20nm
(ii) The magnification &resolution power of temis – 1 – 300000&2-10A
(iii) The magnification power of TEM is – 100000 then the light microscope
(iv) The magnification power of phase-contrast – 3 – 40000 & 8-10A microscope &its resolution power
Answer:
(iv) The magnification power contrast is microscope & its resolution power – 3-400000 & 8-10A

IV. Choose The Right Match From The Following

Question 1.
(i) Size of mycoplasma – 0.15-0.03 µm
(ii) Size of BGA – 60mm
(iii) Size of RBC – 0.25-0.06 µm
(iv) Size of chick egg – 7-811mm
Answer:
(i) Size of mycoplasma – 0.15-0.03µm

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 2.
Choose the right match:
(i) Volutin granules occurin -Bacteria
(ii) Ttannin – Cassia auriculata
(iii) Calcium carbonate – Mimosa pudica
(iv) Heavy metals – Erchhornia
Answer:
(i) Volutin granules- Bacteria

Question 3.
Choose the right match:
(i) Cell theory – Cortix
(ii) Protoplasm theory – Max Schultze
(iii) Chromosomes physical carriers of genes – Strasburger
(iv) Endoplasmic reticulum word coined by – Benda
Answer:
(ii) Protoplasm theory – Max Schultze

V. Match The Following And Find The Correct Answer:

Question 1.
(i) Harry Beevers – (A) identified Lysosomes a Peroxisomes
(ii) Christian Do Duve – (B) Discovered Glycoxysome c
(iii) A-F-U- Schimper – (C) Coined the word Chromosome
(iv) Waldeyer – (D) Coined the word Plastids
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 8
Answer:
a) B A D C

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 2.
(i) When the small pieces of golgibody pinches off from its tubules to form – A. Chioroplast
(ii) Fernandez moran particles occur in – B. Golgi apparatus
(iii) Zymogen granules occur in – C. Lysosome
(iv) Quantosomes are present in – D. Mitochondria
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 9
Answer:
b) C D B A

Question 1.
ASSERTION (A): A cell membrane shows fluid behavior
REASON (R): A membrane is- a mosaic or composite of diverse lipids and proteins
a) Assertion and Reason are correct ‘R’ explaining ‘A’
b) A and R-correct ‘R’ not explaining A
c) A is true, but R is wrong
d) A is true but R is not explaining A
Answer:
(a) Assertion A & Reason R are correct R is explaining A

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 2.
Assertion (A): Chloroplast is an important cell organelle performing photosynthesis in plants
Reason (R): An organelle is a distinct part of a cell which has a particular structure and function.
a) A and R are correct R explaining A
b) A and R correct and R not explaining A
c) A is true, but R is wrong
d) A is true but R is not explaining A
Answer:
b) A and R correct R not explaining A

Question 3.
Assertion (A): The inheritance of Mitochondria is uniparental
Reason (R): Mitochondria of any one of the parenting divide and gets distributed to daughter cells.
a) A and R are correct R explaining A
b) A and R are correct R not explaining A
c) A is true but R is wrong
d) A is true but R is not explaining A
Answer:
(c) A is true but R is wrong

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 4.
Assertion (A): The objective of optic lenses of a microscope are interchanged, then it can work as a telescope
Reason (R): The objective of the telescope has a small focal length
(a) A and R are correct R explaining A
(b) A and R are correct R not explaining A
(c) A is true but R is wrong
(d) A is true but R is not explaining A
Answer:
(d) A is true but R is not explaining A

Question 5.
Assertion (A): A polytene achieved by repeated replication of chromosomal DNA without nuclear division. The daughter chromatids aligned side by side called Endomitosis
Reason (R): Polytenes is observed in the salivary glands of Drosophila by C.G.Balbiani. 1881.
a) A and R are correct R explaining A
b) A and R are correct R not explaining A
c) A is true but R is wrong
d) A is true but R is not explaining A
Answer:
(b) A and R correct R not explaining A

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Two Marks Questions

Question 1.
Name the scientist who proposed the cell theory.
Answer:
Matthias Schleiden and Theodor Schwann.

Question 2.
ER- can be referred to as the endoskeleton of the cell. Justify.
Answer:

  • Yes. It connects plasma membrane & nuclear membrane, giving support to the Cytosol so we can call it the endoskeleton of the cell.
  • It also helps in the exchange of substances in and out of the cell.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 3.
Why do we say that viruses are an exception to its cell theory?
Answer:
Viruses lack protoplasm, the essential parts of the cell, and are existing as obligate parasites (i.e)(subcellular particles).

Question 4.
Who said that different kinds of plastids can transform into one another?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 10
A-F-U Schimper said that the 3 different kinds of plastids can transform into one another according to the need or demand of the plant body.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 5.
In a Bright field microscope, where does the primary & secondary magnification occurs?
Answer:
Primary magnification is obtained through, objective lens, and secondary magnification is obtained through an eye piece lens.

Question 6.
State the functions of chloroplast
Answer:

  • They are organs of Photosynthesis.
  • Light reactions & dark reactions take place in the granum & stroma respectively.
  • Chloroplast also play important role in the Photorespiration or C2 cycle.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 7.
Distinguish between 70’s & 80’s Ribosomes.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 11

Question 8.
Name the types of cells based on nuclear characteristics.
Answer:
The types of cells based on nuclear characteristics:

  1. Prokaryotes
  2. Mesokaryotes and
  3. Eukaryotes.

Question 9.
Distinguish between glyoxysomes, peroxysomes & sphaerosomes
Answer:

GLYOXYSOMES PEROXYSOMES SPHAEROSOMES
Single membrane-bound &sub cellular organelle Single membrane-bound & subcellular organelle Single membrane-bound & subcellular organelle
Contain enzymes of the glyoxylate pathway Contain enzymes and play important role in C2 cycle or Photorespiration They play important role in the storage of fats in the endoplasm cells of oilseeds
Beta oxidation of fatty acids occurs in the glyoxysomes of germinating seeds
Eg. Castor seeds Eg. Occur in all green plants Eg. Coconut Castor seeds

Question 10.
Distinguish between Resolution & Magnification:
Answer:

RESOLUTION MAGNIFICATION
Ability of lenses to show the finest details between two points form Resolution R It is the size of the image seen with eye, magnified by the microscope
Formula =
\(R=\frac{0.61 \lambda}{(\mathrm{NA})}\)
where,λ -wavelength of light
NA-numerical aperture
Formula =
Size of image seen with microscope
Size of image seen with normal eyes

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 11.
Differentiate 4 points of differences between Prokaryotes & Mesokaryotes
Answer:

PROKARYOTES

MESOKARYOTES

Nucleoid no true nucleus Nucleus with nuclear membrane
1-5µm 5- 10µm
DNA usually circular without DNA linear but without
histone proteins histone proteins
Ribosomes 50S+30S 60S+40S
Organelles absent Organelles present
Eg. bacteria & archaea Eg. Dinoflagellate, Protozoa

Question 12.
Write down any 4 functions of cell wall
Answer:

NAME OF THE CELL WALL

FUNCTIONS OF THE CELL WALL

SHAPE It offers definite Shape and Rigidity
BARRIER It prevents the entry of several molecules into the cell
PROTECTION Protects internal protoplasm against mechanical injury
Prevents cell from bursting lit maintains osmotic pressure and prevent cell from bursting
DEFENSIVE DEVICE It plays a major role by acting as a defensive device

Question 13.
Differentiate between TEM and SEM:
Answer:

TEM

SEM

It has a high resolving power Resolving power Comparatively lower
Most commonly used Occasionally used depending on the study
2-dimensional image is provided 3D image is provided
Magnification 1-3 lakhs times Magnification 2 lakhs times
Resolving power 2-10A° Resolving power 5-20 nm

Question 14.
Explain signal transduction:
Answer:
DEFINITION:

  • It is a process by which a cell receives information from outside and respond to it is called signal transduction
  • Nitric oxide → is the main signally molecule
  • Cell membrane → site of chemical interaction of signal transduction

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 12

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 15.
Draw the structure of the Golgi apparatus & label its parts.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 13

Question 16.
What is the cell wall composition of the following organism?
(a) Fungi
(b) Bacteria
(c) Algae
Answer:
(a) Fungi – Chitin and fungal cellulose.
(b) Bacteria – Peptidoglycan
(c) Algae – Cellulose, mannan and galactan.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 17.
What is meant by Holocentric chromosomes?
Answer:
If a chromosome has centromere activity distributed along the whole surface of the chromosome during mitosis (i.e) microtubules distributed all along the mitotic chromosome.
Eg. Caenorhabditis Elegans (transparent nematode) & many insects.

Question 18.
Differentiate between point centromere & Regional centromere.
Answer:

POINT CENTROMERE

REGION AL CENTROMERE

The kinetochore is assembled as a result of protein recognition of specific DNA sequences
Kinetochores assembled on point centromere bind a single microtubule localized, Centromere
Eg. Budding Yeasts
The kinetochore is assembled on a variable array of repeated DNA sequences
Kinetochore assembled on regional centromeres, bind multiple microtubules
Eg. Fission yeast cells, Human cells

Question 19.
Draw the structure of the polytene chromosome:
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 14

Question 20.
Draw the structure of the lysosome.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 15

Three Mark Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between autosomes & allosomes.
Answer:

AUTOSOMES

ALLOSOMES

In human diploid cells out of 46, only 44 chromosomes are Autosomes Only 2 chromosomes are Allosomes or Sex chromosomes
They are controlling somatic characteristics of an organism They are involved in Sex determination

Question 2.
Explain lampbrush chromosomes:
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 16

  • In 1882- observed by Flemming in Oocytes of animal Salamander &Giant nucleus of unicellular Algae Acetabularia
  • The highly condensed chromosomes form a chromosomal axis, from which lateral loops of DNA formed as a result of intense RNA synthesis

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 3.
Define cytoplasmic streaming.
Answer:
Cytoplasmic streaming refers to the movement of the cytoplasm along with the cellular materials inside the cell.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 4.
Draw the structure of the Eukaryotic flagellum.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 17

Question 5.
List out the functions of the Cell Wall.
Answer:
The cell wall plays a vital role in holding several important functions given below.

  1. Offers definite shape and rigidity to the cell.
  2. Serves as barrier for several molecules to enter the cells.
  3. Provides protection to the internal protoplasm against mechanical injury.
  4. Prevents the bursting of cells by maintaining the osmotic pressure.
  5. Plays a major role by acting as a mechanism of defense for the cells.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 6.
Explain in detail about Fluid mosaic model.
Answer:
Jonathan Singer and Garth Nicolson (1972) proposed fluid model: It is made up of lipids and proteins together with a little amount of carbohydrate. The lipid membrane is made up of phospholipid. The phospholipid molecule has a hydrophobic tail and hydrophilic head. The hydrophobic tail repels water and water-loving polar molecule are called hydrophilic molecule. They have polar phosphate group responsible for attracting water. Water-hating non – polar molecule are called as a hydrophobic molecules. They have fatty acid which is non – polar which cannot attract water.

Hydrophilic head attracts water. The proteins of the membrane are globular proteins which are found intermingled between the lipid bilayer most of which are projecting beyond the lipid bilayer. These proteins are called as integral proteins. Few are superficially attached on either surface of the lipid bilayer which are called as peripheral proteins. The proteins are involved in the transport of molecules across the membranes and also act as enzymes, receptors or antigens.

Question 7.
Draw the structure of the chromosome & neatly label the parts:
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 18

Question 8.
Based on the position of centromere classify the chromosomes with the help of diagrams.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 19
Eukaryotic chromosomes may be rod-shaped telo & acrocentric as well as meta & sub-meta-centric.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 9.
List out the functions of Golgi bodies.
Answer:
Functions of Golgi bodies:

  1. Glycoproteins and glycolipids are produced.
  2. Transporting and storing lipids.
  3. Formation of lysosomes.
  4. Production of digestive enzymes.
  5. Cell plate and cell wall formation
  6. Secretion of carbohydrates for the formation of plant cell walls and insect cuticles.
  7. Zymogen granules (proenzyme / pre-cursor of all enzymes) are synthesized.

Question 10.
Explain the structure of Cilia.
Answer:

  • Short cellular-numerous microtubule bound projections of plasma membrane.
  • Each Cilium has membrane-bound structures, basal body,rootlets, basal plate shaft
  • Shaft (axoneme) consists of nine pairs of microtubule doublets, arranged in a
  • circle along the periphery with a two central tubules (9+2) arrangement of microtubules is present.
  • Microtubules – made up of tubulin.
  • Motor protein dynein – connects the outer microtubules pair & links them to the central pair.
  • Nexin – links the peripheral doublets of microtubules.

Question 11.
Write in detail about the 3 types of centromere in eukaryotes.
Answer:
There are three types of centromere in Eukaryotes. They are as follows:

  1. Point Centromere: The type of centromere in which the kinetochore is assembled as a result of protein recognition of specific DNA sequences. Kinetochores assembled on point centromere bind a single microtubule. It is also called a localized centromere. It occurs in budding yeasts.
  2. Regional Centromere: In regional centromere where the kinetochore is assembled on a variable array of repeated DNA sequences. Kinetochore assembled on regional centromeres bind multiple microtubules. It occurs in fission yeast cell, humans and so on.
  3. Holocentromere: The microtubules bind all along the mitotic chromosome. Example: Caenorhabditis Elegans (transparent nematode) and many insects.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 12.
Distinguish between primary wall & secondary wall of the plant cell wall.
Answer:

PRIMARY WALL

SECONDARY WALL

First formed Formed later
Thin elastic, extensible Thick inelastic
Matrix made up of Hemi cellulose-bind micro, fibrils with matrix Pectinase- filling material, Glycoprotein-control orientation of microfibrils Water Here cellulose & pectin compactly arranged with different orients giving a laminated structure to give strength to the cell wall.
Only one layer Has three sub-layers s1,s2,s3.
Does not determine shape of cell Determine shape of cell

Question 13.
Describe the steps involved in cytological techniques.
Answer:
There are different types of mounting based on the portion of a specimen to be observed.

  1. Whole-mount: The whole organism or smaller structure is mounted over a slide and observed.
  2. Squash: This is a preparation where the material to be observed is crushed/squashed onto a slide so as to reveal its contents. Example: Pollen grains, mitosis, and meiosis in root tips and flower buds to observe chromosomes.
  3. Smears: Here the specimen is in the fluid (blood and microbial cultures etc) are scraped, brushed, or aspirated from the surface of the organ. Example: Epithelial cells.
  4. Sections: Freehand sections from a specimen and thin sections are selected, stained, and mounted on a slide. Example: Leaf and stem of plants.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 14.
List out any 3 stains used in histo- chemistry.
Answer:

S.No Stain Colour of staining Affinity
1. Eosin Pink or red Cytoplasm, Cellulose
2. Methylene blue Blue Nucleus
3. Saffranine Red Cell wall(lignin)
4. Janus green Greenish blue Mitochondria

Question 15.
Identify the diagram and label the parts.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 20
Answer:
This is a dark field microscope
A-objective lens
B-stage
C-condenser lens
D- patch stop
E-light source

Five Mark Questions

Question 1.
Differentiate between BFM & DFM.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 21
Question 2.
Differentiate between Light microscope & electron microscope.
Answer:

Light Microscope

Electron Microscope

Another name = compound microscope 1st introduced by Ernest Ruska & developed by   G.Binnin & H. Roher (1981)
Principle Principle
The transmission of visible light from the source of eye through a sample  It uses a beam of accelerated electrons as source of illumination.
Resolving power – Lesser Resolving power – Higher
Magnification – Less Magnification-1,00,000 times than the light
Purpose – studying in schools & college Purpose Microscope Research purpose -can be seen in scientific laboratories
Pattern of working:
The microscope transmits visible light from eye through sample where
interaction occur and magnified image is visible.
The specimen to be viewed under EM should be dehydrated and impregnated with election opaque chemicals like gold, palladium for withstanding electrons & also for contrast.
Types :1 Only one Types: 2 types TEM, SEM

Question 3.
Write down the functions of the cell wall.
Answer:

NAME OF THE CELL WALL

FUNCTIONS OF THE CELL WALL

SHAPE It gives definite Shape and Rigidity to the ceil
BARRIER It prevents several molecules from entering the cells
PROTECTION To the internal protoplasm against mechanical injury
MAINTAIN ANCE It maintains osmotic pressure So, prevent bursting of cells
DEFENCE They are acting as a source of defense for cells

Question 4.
Write down the functions of the Plasma Membrane or cell membrane.
Answer:

  • Cell transport is the main function
  • PM act as a channel of transport for molecules
  • PM is selectively permeable to molecules

It transported by

  1. Energy-dependent processes,
  2. Energy independent processes Membrane proteins involved processes
  3. Endocytosis & Exocytosis large quantity of solids and liquids are transported into a cell or out of cells.

I. Endocytosis 2 types
a) Phagocytosis particle is engulfed by membrance which fold around it forming vesicles, enzymes digest and products are absorbed.

b) Pinocytosis Fluid droplets are engulfed by forming vesicles.
II. Exocytosis -Vesicles fuse with the plasma membrane and eject contents.
-This may be a secretion in the case of digestive enzymes hormones or mucus.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 5.
Explain the fluid mosaic model of plasma membrane.
Answer:

  • Jonathan Singer & Garth Nicolson (1972) proposed FM model.
  • Plasma membrane made up of lipid (phospholipid), protein & little carbohydrate.

I. Phospholipid: Molecule has a hydrophobic tail(repel water) & hydrophilic head (water-loving)
II. Protein of membrane

  • Globular in nature intermingles between lipid bipolar most perfect beyond Jt known
    as (integral proteins)

Few are superficially attached on either surface of lipid bilayer (peripheral proteins)

  • They are involved in transport of molecules across the membrane
  • They acts as enzymes
  • They acts as receptors or antigens.

III Carbohydrate

  • They are short chain of polysaccharides.
    (i.e) With protein glycoprotein With lipid glycolipids, glycocalyx

Flip Flapping:

  • The movement of membrane lipids from one side of the membrane to the other side by vertical movement called flip-flap movement.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 22

Answer:
A- hydrolipid tail,
B-hydrophilic head,} lipid
C-intrisic protein
D-extrinsic protein
This movement is very slow than lateral diffusion of lipid molecules.

  • Phospholipids can flip flop due to smaller polar regions.
  • Proteins cannot do so because of extensive polar regions.

Question 6.
Give an account of the structure and function of mitochondria.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 23

  • 1st observed by A. Kolliker (1880)
  • Altmann(1894) – named it as Bio-plasts
  • Benda (1897) – named as Mitochondria

Structure

  • Ovoid, rod-shaped, pleomorphic structures
  • Double membrane
  • Outer membrane smooth, & permeable- contain porins

2 compartments
1. outer chamber between 2 membranes
2. Inner chamber filled with matrix

Cristae – Infoldings of inner membrane:

  • It contain enzymes for ETS(Electron Transport System)
  • Inner membrane has FI particles or exosomes
  • Each FI particle has a base, a stem & a rounded head
  • Head has ATP synthetase to do oxidative phosphorylation content.
    • 73% protein
    • 25-30% lipids
    • 5-7% RNA, DNA & enzymes(about 60 circular DNA &70’s Ribosomes.
  • All enzymes of Kreb’s cycle are found in the matrix except succinate dehydrogenase.
  • Mitochondria is a semi-autonomous body
  • It’s inheritance is uniparental (i.e) maternal
  • It is used to track recent evolutionary time because it mutates 5-10 times faster than DNA in the nucleus.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 7.
Structure of chloroplast
Answer:

  • A vital organ of green plants.
  • Double membrane-bound organelle peripheral space in between the membrane
  • Inner chloroplast is filled with gelatinous stroma
  • Inside the stroma interconnected sacs called Thylakoids
  • Inner space of the thylakoid is the thylakoid lumen
  • Thylakoids stacked together like piles of coins known as grana.
  • Light is absorbed and converted into chemical energy (carbohydrates) in the granum
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 27
  • Chloroplast genome encodes for approximately 30 proteins involved in photosystem I & II – cytochrome, b, f, complex and ATP synthase & also one of the subunits of RUBISCO is enclosed by it.
  • RUBISCO- is the major protein component of the stroma single most abundant protein on earth
  • The thylakoid contain small, rounded photosynthetic units called Quantosomes
  • The chloroplast is semi-autonomous, divided by fission.
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 24

Question 8.
Give an account of Ribosomes:
Answer:

  • 1953 – 1 observed by George Palade
  • Dense particles in the EM not membrane-bound

Electron microscope observation
1. Made up of 2 round subunits one large layer & one small unit to form a complete unit
2. Mg++ is required for complete cohesion.
Biogenesis – denova formation, auto replication and nucleolar origin
Function – Sites of protein synthesis.

Content – consists of

  • RNA 60%,
  • Protein 40%

Polysemes:
In protein synthesizing cells, many ribosomes attached to single m RNA – to form polysomes’ main role in the formation of several copies of particular.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 25

Question 9.
Differentiate between chromoplast & leucoplast
Answer:

Chromoplast

Leucoplast

Nature Coloured Colourless
Types & occurence Chloroplast:
occur in green algae& higher plants. Pigment chlorophyll a & b
Phaeoplast:
occur in brown algae & dinoflagelletes Pigment-fucoanthin
Rhodoplast:
Occur in red algae Stores protein
Pigment phycoerythrin
Amyloplast
Stores starch occur in storage parts Eg. Tapioca rootElaioplast Stores- lipids
Eg. Groundnut seeds
Aleuroplast or
proteoplast
Eg. Moon dhal

Question 10.
State any 3 functions of Lysosomes
Answer:
polypeptide Intracellular digestion:
They digest carbohydrates, proteins & lipids present in the cytoplasm

Autophagy:
During the adverse condition, they digest their own organelles like mitochondria ER

Auto lysis:
Causes self-destruction of cell on the insight of disease

Aging:
Have autolytic enzymes that disrupts intracellular molecules.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 11.
Explain the structure of Centrioles
Answer:

  • Central hub, surrounded by nine triplet peripheral fibrils (tubulin) connected to the tubules by radial spokes (9 + 0) pattern Cilia or Flagella Spindle fibres
  • Centriole is the basal body of Flagella, Lilia or, Spindle fibers.
  • It is a nonmembranous organelle

Question 12.
Differentiate between other inclusions of cells in Prokaryotes & Eukaryotes.
Answer:

Prokaryotes

Eukaryotes

Reserse material Phosphate granules & Cyanophycean granules Starch grains Glycogen granules
Organic materials Poly (3 hydroxyl granules sulphur granules, carboxysomes &Gas vacuoles Aleurone grains, flat droplets
Other secretions          ……………………………. Essential oil, resins, gums, latex and tannin
Inorganic inclusions metachromatic granules- such as polyphosphate granules (volutin granules) & sulfur granules Calcium carbonate crystals, Calcium oxalate crystals, Silica crystals Eg.cystolith- hypodermal cells of Ficus bengalensis (calcium carbonate)
Raphides- Eichhornia (calcium oxalate)
Prismatic crystals – dry scales ofAlliumcepa (calcium oxalate)

Question 13.
Explain the structure of the Nucleus.

  • It is important CPU of the cell, the largest part of it
  • Control all activities of cell
  • Hold the hereditary information

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life 26Nuclear envelope Nuclear space (nucleoplasm)

I Membrane:
Double membrane Nuclear envelope
a) Outer membrane

  • Rough by the presence of ribosomes and with irregular intervals continues with ER
  • It has nuclear pores that allow m RNA, ribosomal units, proteins & other macromolecules to pass in & out
  • Nuclear pore enclosed by circular structure – annuli

b) Inner membrane:
Smooth without ribosomes in between the two membranes perinuclear space is present

II. Nucleoplasm:
A gelatinous matrix has 2 parts

  • Nucleoli &
  • Chromatin reticulum

a) Nucleoli:

  • Small dense spherical structure occur in singly or in multiples.
  • It possesses genes for r RNA &, tRNA

b) Chromatin network

  • Uncoiled, indistinct , thread like structure(inter phase)
  • Has little amount of RNA, DNA bound to histone proteins in Eukaryotes
  • At the time of cell division – It get condensed to form Chromosome

Euchromatin With -2 parts
1. Euchromatin
2.Heterochromatin

  • The portion that get transcribed into rn RNA – active genes that are not tightly condensed & stains lightly.
  • Heterochromatin
  • The portion of chromatin that does not get transcribed into m RNA – remain tightly condensed & stains intensively.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 14.
Explain the structure of Endoplasmic reticulum
Answer:

  • The largest internal membrane (ER)
  • Name given by K.R.Porter(1948)
    Consists of Vesicles &Tubules, Cisternae

Cisternae:

  • Long broad, flat sac-like structures arranged in stacks to form lamella.
  • In between membrane is filled with fluid

Vesicles:
Oval membrane-bound vascular structure

Tubules:
Irregular shaped, branched, smooth-walled structure enclosing a space

Function:

  • It is associated with nuclear membrane and cell surface membrane
  • When ribosomes present on ER- it is known as (RER) Rough Endoplasmic Reticulum
  • When ribosomes absent on ER- it is known as Smooth Endoplasmic Retiöulum(SER).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 6 Cell The Unit of Life

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Pdf Chapter 10 Secondary Growth Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

11th Bio Botany Guide Secondary Growth Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part -I

I. Consider the following statements.

Question 1.
In spring vascular cambium
i) is less active
ii) Produces a large number of xylary elements
iii) forms vessels with wide cavities of these,
a) (i) is correct but (ii) and (iii) are not correct
b) (i) is not correct but (ii) and (iii) are correct
c) (i) and (ii) are correct but (iii) is not correct
d) (i) and (ii) are not correct but (iii) is correct
Answer:
b) (i) is not correct but (ii) and (iii) are correct

Question 2.
Usually, the monocotyledons do not increase their girth, because
a) They possess actively dividing cambium
b) They do not possess actively dividing cambium
c) Ceases activity of cambium
d) All are correct
Answer:
b) They do not possess actively dividing cambium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 3.
In the diagram of lenticel identify the parts marked as A, B, C, D
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth 1
a) A. phellem, B. Complementary tissue, C. Phelloderm, D. Phellogen.
b) A. Complementary tissue, B.Phellem, C. Phellogcn,
c) A. Phellogen, B.Phellem, C. Phelloderm, D. Complementary tissue
d) A. Phelloderm, B. Phellem, C. Complementary tissue, D. Phellogen
Answer:
a) A. phellem, B. Complementary tissue, C. Phelloderm, D. Phellogen.

Question 4.
The common bottle cork is a product of
a) Dermatogen
b) Phellogen
c) Xylem
d) Vascular cambium
Answer:
b) Phellogen

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 5.
What is the fate of primary xylem in a dicot root showing extensive secondary growth?
a) It is retained in the center of the axis
b) It gets crushed
c) May or may not get crushed
d) It gets surrounded by primary phloem
Answer:
b) It gets crushed

Question 6.
In a forest, if the bark of a tree is damaged by the horn of a deer, How will the plant overcome the damage?
Answer:
When the bark is damaged, the phellogen forms a complete cylinder around the stem and it gives rise to ring barks.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 7.
In which season the vessels of angiosperms are larger in size, why?
Ans:
In spring season the vessels are larger in size, because the cambium cells are very active during spring season.

Question 8.
Continuous state of dividing tissue is called meristem. In connection to this, what is the role is lateral meristem?
Answer:
The secondary growth in dicots and gymnosperms is brought about by two lateral meristems.

  1. Vascular cambium and
  2. Cork cambium

1. Vascular cambium:
The vascular cambium is the lateral meristem that produces the secondary vascular tissues, i.e.. secondary xylem and secondary phloem.

Origin and Formation of Vascular Cambium:

  • A strip of vascular cambium originate from the procambium is present between xylem and phloem of the vascular bundle. This cambial strip is known as intrafascicular or fascicular cambium.
  • In between the vascular bundles, a few parenchymatous cells of the medullary rays that are in line with the fascicular cambium become meristematic and form strips of vascular cambium. It is called interfascicular cambium.

A. Organization of Vascular cambium:

  • The active vascular cambium possesses cells with large central vacuole (or vacuoles) surrounded by a thin, layers of dense cytoplasm.
  • The most important character of the vascular cambium is the presence of two kinds of initials, namely fusiform initials and ray initials.

Fusiform Initials:

  • These are vertically elongated cells. They give rise to the longitudinal or axial system of the secondary xylem (tracheary elements, fibres, and Axia? parenchyma) and pholem (sieve, elements, fibres, and axial parenchyma).
  • Based on the arrangement of the fusiform initials two types of vascular cambium are recognized.

Stoned (Stratified cambium) and Non – storied (Non – stratified cambium)

  • If the fusiform initials are arranged in horizontal tiers, with the end of the cells of one tier appearing at approximately the same level, as seen in tangential longitudinal section (TLS) it is called storied (stratified) cambium. It is the characteristic of the plants with short fùsiform initials.
  • In plants with long fusiform initials, they strongly overlap at the ends, and this type of cambium is called non – storied (non stratified) cambium.

Ray Initials:
These are horizontally elongated cells. They give rise to the ray cells and form the elements of the radial system of secondary xylem and pholem.

Activity of Vascular Cambium:

  • The vascular cambial ring, when active, cuts off new cells both towards the inner and outer side. The cells which are produced outward form secondary phloem and inward secondary xylem.
  • Due to the continued formation of secondary xylem and phloem through vascular cambial activity, both the primary xylem and phloem get gradually crushed.

B. Phellogen (Cork Cambium)

  • It is a secondary lateral meristem. It comprises homogenous meristematic cells unlike vascular cambium. It arises from epidermis, cortex, pholem or pericycle (extrastelar in origin). Its cells divide periclinally and produce radially arranged files of cells.
  • The cells towards the outer side differentiate into phellem (cork) and those towards the inside as phelloderm (secondary cortex).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 9.
A timer merchant bought 2 logs of wood from, a forest & named them A & B, The log A was 50 year old & B was 20 years old. Which log of wood will last longer for the merchant? Why?
Answer:

  • In wood, the older it is, the stronger it becomes.
  • Log A – Which was 50 years old is stronger and it will last longer.
  • In a tree the central part of the wood will be darker in colour, dead in nature known as Heartwood or Duramen, and the outer sad wood is lighter in colour, living and conducting water.
  • In the central Heartwood the conduction is blocked by the formation of tyloses from the nearby parenchyma cells, and dead.
  • In the fully developed tyloses, starch crystals, resins, gums, oils tannins and coloured substances are found and it becomes very hard and durable.
  • It is more resistant to the attack of microbes and insects like termites.
  • Older woods have more heartwood than sapwood.
  • Here log ‘A’ is older, has more heartwood and it is stronger and will last longer.

Question 10.
A transverse section of the trunk of a tree shows concentric rings which are known as growth rings. How are these rings formed? What are the significance of these rings?
Answer:
Growth (or) Annual Rings:
1. In the spring season cambium is very active and produces large number of xylary elements called Earlywood or Springwood. In the Winter season – cambium is less active and form few xylary elements – Latewood or Autumn Wood.

2. The springwood is lighter in color and has a lower density whereas the autumn wood is darker and has a higher density. The annual ring denotes the combination of earlywood and latewood and the ring becomes evident to our eye due to the high density of latewood. Sometimes annual rings are called growth rings

3. Pseudo – Annual Rings:
Additional growth rings are developed within a year due to adverse natural calamities like drought, frost defoliation, flood, mechanical, injury and biotic factors. Such rings arc called pseudo – or false – annual rings

4. Dendrochronology:
Each annual ring corresponds to one year’s growth and on the basis of these rings, the age of a particular plant can easily be calculated. The determination of the age of a tree by counting the annual rings is called dendrochronology.

Part – II.

11th Bio Botany Guide Secondary Growth Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose The Correct Answer.

Question 1.
The roots and stems grow in length with the help of:
(a) cambium
(b) secondary growth
(c) apical meristem
(d) vascular parenchyma
Answer:
(c) apical meristem

Question 2.
The Gymnosperm in which vessel is present
a) Pinus
b) Cýcas
c) Ginkgo
d) Gnetum
Answer:
d. Gnetum

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 3.
The secondary vascular tissues include:
(a) secondary xylem and secondary phloem
(b) secondary xylem, cambium strip and secondary phloem
(c) secondary phloem and fascicular cambium
(d) secondary xylem and primary phloem
Answer:
(a) secondary xylem and secondary phloem

Question 4.
In a dicotyledonous stem, the sequence of tissues from the outside to the inside of
a) Phellem, Pericycle, Endodermis, phloem
b) Phellem phloem, Endodermis, Pericycle
c) Phellem, Endodermis, Pericycle, phloem
d) Pericycle, Phellem, Endodermis, Phloem
Answer:
c. Phellem, Endodermis, Pericycle, Phloem

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 5.
For a critical study of secondary growth in plants which one of the following pairs is suitable?
a) Sugarcane and sunflower
b) Teak and pine
c) Bamboo and Fem
d) Wheat and Fem
Answer:
b. Teak and pine

Question 6.
The axial system of the secondary xylem includes:
(a) treachery elements, sieve elements, fibers and axial parenchyma
(b) treachery elements, fibers and axial parenchyma
(c) treachery elements and fibers
(d) sieve elements and axial parenchyma
Answer:
(b) treachery elements, fibers and axial parenchyma

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 7.
Tissues considered in an annual ring is/are
a) Secondary xylem and phloem
b) Primary xylem and phloem
c) Secondary xylem only
d) Primary phloem and secondary xylem
Answer:
c. Secondary xylem only

Question 8.
Ray cells are present between:
(a) primary xylem and phloem
(b) primary xylem and secondary xylem
(c) secondary xylem and phloem
(d) secondary phloem and cambium
Answer:
(c) secondary xylem and phloem

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 9.
Interfascicular cambium is a
a) Primary meristematic tissue
b) Primordial meristem
c) Type of protoderm
d) Secondary meristematic tissue
Answer:
d. Secondary meristematic tissue

Question 10.
Interfascicular cambium develops from the cells of
a) Xylem parenchyma
b) endodermis
c) Pericycle
d) Medullary rays
Answer:
d. Medullary rays

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 11.
Which of the statement is not correct?
(a) In temperate regions, the cambium is very active in the winter season.
(b) In temperate regions, the cambium is very active in the spring season.
(c) In temperate regions, cambium is less active in the winter season.
(d) In temperate regions earlywood is formed in the spring season.
Answer:
(a) In temperate regions, the cambium is very active in the winter season.

Question 12.
At maturity, the sieve plates become impregnated with
a) Cellulose
b) Pectin
c) Suberin
d) Callose
Answer:
d. Callose

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 13.
You are given a fairly old piece of dicot stem and a dicot root, which of the following anatomical structures will you distinguish between the two?
a) Secondary xylem
b) Secondary phloem
c) Protoxylem
d) Cortical cells
Answer:
c. Protoxylem

Question 14.
determination of the age of a tree by counting the annual rings is called:
(a) chronology
(b) dendrochronology
(c) palaeology
(d) histology
Answer:
(c) palaeology

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 15.
Which one of the following is dead and works efficiently?
a) Sieve tube
b) Companian cells
c) Vessels
d) Both (b) and (c)
Answer:
c. Vessels

Question 16.
Which one of the following pairs is an example for meristematic tissue
a) Phellogen and phelloderm
b) Phellogen and Fascicular cambium
c) Procambium and phelloderm
d) Interfascicular cambium and phellem
Answer:
b. Phellogen and Fascicular cambium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 17.
In fully developed tyloses:
(a) only starchy crystals are present
(b) resin and gums only are present
(c) oil and tannins are present
(d) starchy crystals, resins, gums, oils, tannins, or colored substances are present
Answer:
(d) starchy crystals, resins, gums, oils, tannins, or colored substances are present

Question 18.
Which wood is also known as Non-porous
a) Softwood
b) Heartwood
c) Hardwood
d) Sapwood
Answer:
a. Softwood

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 19.
Which of the statement is not correct?
(a) Sapwood and heartwood can be distinguished in the secondary xylem
(b) Sapwood is paler in colour
(c) Heartwood is darker in colour
(d) The sapwood conducts minerals, while the heartwood conduct water
Answer:
(d) The sapwood conducts minerals, while the heartwood conduct water

Question 20.
Removal of a ring of wood tissue outside the vascular cambium from the tree trunk kills it because
a) Water cannot move up
b) Food does not travel down and root become starved
c) Shoot apex become starved
d) Annual rings are not produced
Answer:
food does not travel down root become starved

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 21.
The trees growing in the desert will
a) Show alternate rings of xylem and sclerenchyma
b) Have only conjunctive tissue and phloem formed by the activity of cambium
c) do show distinct annual rings
d) do not show distinct annual rings
Answer:
d. do not show distinct annual rings.

Question 22.
Canada balsam is produced from:
(a) Pisum sativum
(b) the resin of Arjuna plant
(c) Abies balsamea
(d) the root of Vinca rosea
Answer:
(c) Abies balsamea

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 23.
Choose the living cells from the given
I) Phellem
II) Phloem
III) Phellogen
IV) Xylem parenchyma
a) (I) (II) & (III)
b) (II) (III) & (IV)
c) (I) (III) & (IV)
d) (I) (II) & (IV)
Answer:
b) (II) (III) & (IV)

Question 24.
When we peel the skin of a potato tuber we remove
a) Periderm
b) Epidermis
c) Cuticle
d) Sapwood
Answer:
a) Periderm

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 25.
Phelloderm is otherwise called as:
(a) primary cortex
(b) corkwood
(c) secondary cortex
(d) rhytidome
Answer:
(c) secondary cortex

Question 26.
The waxy substances associated with cell walls of cork cells are impervious to water because of the presence of ………………. which gets deposited on the cork cells
a) Cutin
b) Suberin
c) Eignin
d) Hemicellulose
Answer:
b) Suberin

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 27.
The antimalarial compound quinine is, extracted from:
(a) seeds of cinchona
(b) bark of cinchona
(c) leaves of cinchona
(d) flowers of cinchona
Answer:
(b) bark of cinchona

Question 28.
Annual rings are distinct in plants growing in
a) Tropical regions
b) Arctic regions
c) Grasslands
d) Temperate region
Answer:
d) Temperate region

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 29.
The bark does include three except one from the options.
I) Cortex
II) Periderm
III) Pith
IV) Secondary phloem
a) (I) (II) & (Ill)
b) (II) (III) & (IV)
c) (I) (III) & (IV)
d) (I) (II) & (IV)
Answer:
d) (I) (II) & (IV)

Question 30.
Rubber is obtained from:
(a) Bombax mori
(b) Hevea brasiliensis
(c) Quercus suber
(d) Morus rubra
Answer:
(b) Hevea brasiliensis

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 31.
Wood actually means
a) Primary xylem
b) Secondary xylem
c) Primary phloem
d) Secondary phloem
Answer:
b) Secondary xylem

Question 32.
When a plant is wounded, the wound is healed by the formation of new cells, by the cavity of
a) Primary meristem
b) Apical meristem
c) Secondary meristem
d) Intercalary meristem
Answer:
c) Secondary meristem

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 33.
Commercial cork is obtained from
a) Oak
b) Silver oak
c) Pine
d) Ficus
Answer:
a) Oak

II. Match Correctly And Choose The Right Answer

Question 1.
I) Spicy bark – A Turpentine
II) Ornamental Antique – B Quinine
III) Active drug – C Cinnamon
IV) Thinner and solvent – D Amber
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth 2
Answer:
d) C-D- B-A

Question 2.
I) Phellogen – A. Cork
II) Phelloderm – B. Cork cambium
III) Phellem – C. Lack suberin
IV) Phelloids – D. Secondary cortex
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth 3
Answer:
a) B-D- A-C

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 3.
I) Sapwood – A. Softwood
II) Heartwood – B. Hardwood
III) Porous wood – C. Albumum
IV) Nonporous wood – D. Duramen
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth 4
Answer:
c) C-D-B-A

III Identify True Or False And From The Given Option Choose The Right Answer:

Question 1.
A) In pinus wood is Non-porous
B) In Morns wood is porous
C) In Quercus the wood is Diffuse porous
D) In Acer the wood is Ring porous
a) A&DTrue B&C False
b) A & B True C & D False
c) A & C True B & D False
d) A&BFalseC &DTrue
Answer:
b) A & B True C & D False

Question 2.
Arrange the given plants in order from more distinct Annual rings to least distinct Annual rings.
a) Seashore plants, Desert plants, Tropical plants & Temperature plants
b) Temperature plants, Tropical plants, Desert plants, Seashore plants
c) Tropical plants, Desert plants, Temperature plants, Seashore plants
d) Temperature plants, Seashore plants, Tropical plants, Desert plants
Answer:
b) Temperature plants, Tropical plants, Desert plants, Seashore plants.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 3.
In wood, the Annual rings become clearly evident to our eyes due to
a) The high density and dark coloured latewood or Autumn wood
b) The low density and light coloured early wood or springwood
c) The high density and dark coloured early wood or springwood
d) The low density and light coloured latewood or Autumn wood
Answer:
a) The high density and dark coloured of latewood or Autumn wood

Question 4.
Column I and Column II – Match them correctly and Find out the right option.
Answer:

Column I Column II
A. Springwood or earlywood
B. Autumn wood or Latewood
1. Lighter in colour
2. Density high
3. Density low
4. Darker in colour
5. Larger number of xylem elements
6. Vessels with wider cavity
7. Lesser number of xylem elements
8. Vessels with a small cavity

Which of the following combination is correct?
a) A – 2, 4, 7, 8 B- 1,3, 5,6
b) A- 1,2, 7,8 B-3,4, 5, 6
c) A – 1,3, 5,6 B – 2,4, 7, 8
d) A- 1,3,7, 8 B – 2, 4, 5, 6
Answer:
b) A – 1, 2, 7,8 B-3,4,5, 6

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

IV. Assertion And Reason

Question 1.
ASSERTION: – A All tissues lying inside the Vascular Cambium are called as Bark
REASON -R: Bark is made up of Phellogen. Phellem and Phelloderm Cortex, primary and secondary phloem
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true, but R is not the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but ‘R’ is false
d) A is false and ‘R’ is true
e) Both A and ‘R’ are false
Answer:
d) ‘A’ is false and ‘R’ is true

Question 2.
ASSERTION: -A In angiosperms, the conduction of water is more efficient because their xylem has vessels
REASON – R: Conduction of water by vessel element is an active process in which energy is supplied by xylem parenchyma with a large number of Mitochondria
Answer:
a) Both A and R – are true and ‘R’ is the correct explanation of A

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 3.
ASSERTION: -A. All the endodermal cells of the root do not contain Casparian thickenings on their radial and transverse walls.
REASON-R: Passage cells are found in the root endodermis, which conducts water in to the xylem
Answer:
a) Both A and R are true and ‘R’ is the correct explanation of A

Question 4.
ASSERTION:-A Cambium is a lateral meristem and causes growth in width
REASON-R Cambium is made up of fusiform and ray initials in stem
Answer:
b) Both A and R are true, but R is not the correct explanation of A

Question 5.
ASSERTION: – A The lenticel is meant for gaseous exchange.
REASON-R Lenticel checks excessive evaporation of water.
Answer:
b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 6.
ASSERTION:-A Heartwood is more durable
REASON – R Heartwood contains organic compounds like tannins, resins, oil, gums, aromatic substances and essential oils help to resist microbial and termites attack.
Answer:
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A

V. 2 Marks Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between Primary and Secondary growth.
Answer:
Primary growth

  1. The roots and stem grow in length with the help of Apical meristem
  2. It is known as longitudinal growth
  3. Eg. Angiosperms & Gymnosperms

Secondary growth

  1. The roots and stem show an increase in thickness or width with the help of Lateral meristem
  2. It is also known as latitudinal growth or growth in girth
  3. Eg. Most Angiosperms, including some Monocots and Gymnosperms

Question 2.
Mention the two Lateral meristems responsible for secondary growth.
Answer:
The secondary growth in dicots and gymnosperms is brought about by two lateral meristems.

  1. Vascular Cambium and
  2. Cork Cambium

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 3.
Define interfascicular cambium?
Answer:
In between the vascular bundles, a few parenchymatous cells of the medullary rays that are in line with the fascicular cambium become meristematic and form strips of the vascular cambium. It is called interfascicular cambium.

Question 4.
Fill in the blanks

The botanical name of the plant The common name of the product Use
1. Abies balsamea Canada balsam ………………………………..
2.  Acacia Senegal (meska) ………………………………………… Natural gum used as a bind to water colour painting
3. ………………………………… Cork Hydrophobic, impermeable, used as a bottle stopper.
4. ……………………………………………… Hematoxylin Dye from the heartwood to stain plant materials view under a microscope

Answer:

  1. The resin used as a mounting medium for microscopic slide preparation.
  2. Gum Arabic
  3. Quercus suber
  4. Haematoxylon campechianum

Question 5.
Distinguish between the stratified cambium and Non-stratified cambium.
Answer:
Stratified cambium: Plants with short fusiform initials, produced, storied, cambium in horizontal tiers known as
stratified cambium

Non-stratified cambium: Plants with long fusiform initials produced non-storied cambium, strongly overlap at the ends, known as Non-stratified cambium

Question 6.
Why does porous wood be harder than non-porous wood?
Answer:

  • Porous wood is wood with xylem vessels which appear as a pore in cross-section.
  • When a tree stem become old, most of its vessels are blocked by tyloses with deposition of gum, resin, tannin, oils, etc. (Heartwood)
  • So porous wood is harder and commercially important.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 7.
What is the source of turpentine? and What is its use?
Answer:

  • Turpentine is a resin obtained from the bark of conifers Eg. pinus
  • It is also used as a thinner for oil-based paints.
  • It is also used as an organic solvent.
  • It is also used as a balm to relieve muscular pain.

Question 8.
Distinguish between Periderm and Polydor
Answer:
Periderm:

  1. The secondary growth replaces the epidermis and primary cortex and forms the Periderm
  2. It consists of
    • Phellem
    • Phellogen
    • Phelloderm
  3. Eg. Dicot stem & roots

Polyderm:

  1. It is a special type of protective tissue consisting of a miserable suberized layer, alternating with multiseriate nonsuberized cells in periderm
  2. Eg. Roots and underground stems of Rosaceae plants

Question 9.
Define Rhytidome?
Answer:
Rhytidome is a technical term used for the outer dead bark which consists of periderm and isolated cortical or phloem tissues ? formed during successive secondary growth, eg: Quercus.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 10.
What is the use of Canada balsam?
Answer:
From the resin ducts, the Abies balsamea plant produces an organic gum-like substance, used as a permanent mounting medium for microscopic slide preparation.
Eg. A slide of 60 years old holotype specimen of a flatworm is permanently mounted in Canada balsam.

VI. 3 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between primary and secondary growth.
Answer:
1. Primary growth: The plant organs originating from the apical meristems pass through a period of expansion in length and width. The roots and stems grow in length with the help of apical meristems. This is tailed primary growth or longitudinal growth.

2. Secondary growth: The gymnosperms and most angiosperms, including some monocots, show an increase in the thickness of stems and roots by means of secondary growth or latitudinal growth.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 2.
Notes on Lenticels.
Answer:

  • The aerating pores are seen as raised opening on the surface of bark as scars on old stems and roots.
  • It is fonned during secondary growth in stems.
  • In this portion phellogen activity is more than elsewhere, a filling tissue known as complementary tissue (loosely arranged parenchyma) is formed.
  • Lenticel is helpful in the exchange of gases and also facilitate the little amount of transpiration

Question 3.
Explain briefly about false annual rings.
Answer:
Additional growth rings are developed within a year due to adverse natural calamities like drought, frost, defoliation, flood, mechanical injury and biotic factors during the middle of a growing season, which results in the formation of more than one annual ring. Such rings are called pseudo – or false – annual rings.

Question 4.
Differences between Diffuse porous wood and Ring porous wood
Answer:
Diffuse porous wood:

  1. This type of wood is formed where the climatic conditions are uniform
  2. The vessels are more or less equal in diameter in any annual ring
  3. The vessels are uniformly distributed throughout the wood

Ring porous wood:

  1. This type of wood is formed where the climatic conditions are not uniform
  2. The vessels are wide and narrow within an annual ring
  3. The vessels are not uniformly distributed throughout the wood

Question 5.
Differences between Porous Wood and Non – porous wood
Answer:
Porous wood or Hardwood, Ex: Morus:

  1. Common in Angiosperms
  2. Porous because it contains vessels

Non-porous wood or softwood Ex: Pinus

  1. Common in Gymnosperms
  2. Non – porous because it does not contain vessels

Question 6.
Differences between Sapwood (alburnum) and Heart Wood (duramen)
Answer:

Sapwood (Alburnum) Heartwood (Duramen)
1. Living part of the wood 1. Dead part of the wood
2. It is situated on the outer side of wood 2. It is situated in the centre part of wood
3. It is lighter in colour 3. It is dark coloured
4. Very soft in nature 4. Hard in nature
5. Tyloses are absent 5. Tyloses are present
6. It is not durable and not resistant to microorganisms 6. It is more durable and resists microorganisms insects and termites

Question 7.
Differences Between Phellem and Phelloderm
Answer:

Phellem (Cork) Phelloderm (secondary cortex)
1. It is formed on the outer side of phellogen1 1.  It is formed on the inner side of the phellogen
2. Cells are compactly arranged in regular tires and rows without intercellular spaces. 2. Cells are loosely arranged with intercellular spaces.
3. Protective in function. 3. As it contains chloroplasts, it synthesizes and stores food
4. Consists of non-living cells with suberized walls 4. Consists of living cells, parenchymatous in nature and does not have suberin
5. Lenticels are present 5. Lenticels are absent

Question 8.
Explain the term lenticel.
Answer:
Lenticel is raised opening or pore on the epidermis or bark of stems and roots. It is formed during secondary growth in stems. When phellogen is more active in the region of lenticels, a mass of loosely arranged thin-walled parenchyma cells is formed. It is called complementary tissue or filling tissue. Lenticel is helpful in the exchange of gases and transpiration called lenticular transpiration.

Question 9.
Mention the benefits of bark in a tree.
Answer:
Bark protects the plant from parasitic fungi and insects, prevents water loss by evaporation, and guards against variations of external temperature. It is insect repellent, decay proof, fireproof, and is used in obtaining drugs or spices. The phloem cells of the bark are involved in the conduction of food while secondary cortical cells involved in storage.

Question 10.
Annual rings are not clear and distinct in desert trees and seashore plants – Justify.
Answer:

  • In the desert, as well seashore regions the climatic condition remain the same throughout the year.
  • Secondary growth in plants is influenced by seasonal changes since in these areas seasonal changes are not significant enough to bring in distinct Annual rings with early and latewood formation alternatively.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 11.
A plant dies if the sapwood is damaged, but not with that of Heartwood – Give factual justification.
Answer:

  • Sapwood is a living part of the wood, perform water conduction, that’s why it is known as Sapwood.
  • Heartwood is a dead part of the wood, do not perform water conduction so if destroyed, no vital function of the plant is affected.
  • If sapwood is damaged, or exposed conduction of water will be blocked, water loss is rapid leading to decay and decomposition of tissues and leads to death of the plant.

Question 12.
What is Dendrochronology? Add a note on the significance of studying the growth rings.
Answer:

  • The annual ring of a tree corresponds to one year’s growth.
  • If we count the rings we can determine the very age of the plant.
  • This method of calculating the age of a tree by counting the annual ring is known as dendrochronology.

Significance of studying growth rings:

  • Age of wood – calculated
  • Age verified by Radioactive carbon dating
  • Provides evidence in Forensic investigation.

Question 13.
If  ‘A’ is vascular cambium, then label other parts with reference to cambial activity.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth 5

Answer:
A – Vascular cambium
B – First formed phloem – (Primary phloem)
C – First formed xylem – (Primary xylem)
D – Second formed phloem – (Secondary phloem)
E – Second formed xylem – (Secondary xylem)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 14.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth 6
Answer:
Cross-section of wood showing Annual rings.
A-Bark
B-Sapwood
C – heartwood
D -Annual rings

Question 15.
Identify the diagram & Label the parts.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth 7
Answer:
Structure of Tyloses A – Parenchyma cell
B – Tyloses
C – Vessel wall
D – Vessel Lumen

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 16.
In the given diagram, the parts labelled are A, B, C, D identify the part correctly with respect to its function.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth 8
a) A – Periderm for gaseous exchange
b) C – Secondary cortex for protection
c) B – Complementary tissues for gaseous exchange
d) D – Phellogen for xylem and phloem formation
Answer:
c) B – Complementary tissues for gaseous exchange

Question 17.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth 9
Answer:
Different stages of secondary growth in Dicot root
A – Cambial ring
B – Primary’ xylem
C – Secondary xylem
D – Primary phloem
E – Secondary phloem

VII. 5 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between Phellem and Phelloderm.
Answer:
Phellem (Cork):

  1. It is formed on the outer side of phellogen.
  2. Cells are compactly arranged in regular tires and rows without intercellular spaces.
  3. Protective in function.
  4. Consists of nonliving cells with suberized walls.
  5. Lenticels are present.

Phelloderm (Secondary cortex):

  1. It is formed on the inner side of phellogen.
  2. Cells are loosely arranged with intercellular spaces.
  3. As it contains chloroplast, it synthesises and stores food.
  4. Consists of living cells, parenchymatous in nature and does not have suberin.
  5. Lenticels are absent.

Question 2.
Distinguish the significance of Cork and Bark
Answer:
Cork:

  1. It includes only phellem layer of bark
  2. It is composed of suberin a hydrophobic substance
  3. It has impermeable buoyant, elastic and fibre retartant properties
  4. Used in making bottle stoppers Eg. Bark of Quercus suber

Bark:

  1. It includes all tissues outside vascular cambium (Periderm, Cortex, Primary and secondary phloem)
  2. It has insect repellent, decay proof, fire proof properties.
  3. Used as Drugs or spices.
  4. Eg. Bark of Chichona – (AntimalariaJ drug), Bark of Cinnamomum (Used as spice)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 3.
Differentiate between, the vascular cambial components Fusiform initials and Ray initials.
Answer:
Fusiform initials:

  1. Vertically elongated cells
  2. Give rise to axial system of secondary tissues, xylem and phloem
  3. Secondary xylem includes tracheary elements, fibres and axial parenchyma
  4. Secondary phloem includes sieve elements
  5. Based on arrangement of fusiform initials 2 types of vascular cambium recognised
    a – stratified cambium
    b – Nonstratified cambium

Ray initials

  1. Horizontally elongated cells
  2. Give rise to radial system of secondary xylem and phloem
  3. Radial system consists of rows of parenchymatous cells oriented at right angles to the longitudinal axis of xylem elements
  4. Secondary phloem include phloem rays fibres and axial parenchyma

Question 4.
Give an account of Primary & Secondary structure of Dicto Stern. (Flow chart)
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth 10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth

Question 5.
Give an account of Any 5 Commercial barks their, properties and uses
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 10 Secondary Growth 11